Logic Pro User Guide
Contents Logic Pro User Guide What’s new in Logic Pro 10 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.6 10 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.5 11 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.4 13 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.3 15 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.3 16 What’s new in Logic Pro 10.
Logic Pro User Guide Logic Pro basics 63 What is Logic Pro? 63 Logic Pro workflow overview 64 Logic Pro interface overview 66 Logic Pro project basics 88 Work with Logic Pro windows 92 Work with tools in Logic Pro 102 Logic Pro advanced tools and options 107 Undo and redo edits in Logic Pro 110 Manage Logic Pro content 111 How to get help for Logic Pro 115 Connect external devices 117 Logic Pro hardware connection overview 117 Connect audio devices 117 Connect MIDI devices 121
Logic Pro User Guide Use selection-based processing in Logic Pro 221 Export tracks and regions 224 Edit Logic Pro track parameters 229 Record your voice or a musical instrument 231 Overview of recording in Logic Pro 231 Record audio 231 Record software instruments 239 Use the metronome in Logic Pro 252 Advanced recording techniques 254 Comp your audio recordings 257 Use loops and other media files 280 Using loops and other media in Logic Pro 280 Use Apple Loops in your projects 281
Logic Pro User Guide Use Flex Time and Pitch in the Audio Track Editor 387 Automation in the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor 387 Edit MIDI regions in the Piano Roll Editor 388 Overview of the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro 388 Add and edit notes 390 View multiple regions in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro 408 Split chords in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro 408 The Automation/MIDI area in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro 409 Open other editors from the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro 41
Logic Pro User Guide Work with Mixer groups 581 Surround panning in the Mixer in Logic Pro 587 Binaural panning 587 Work with MIDI channel strips 593 Customize the Mixer 595 Use the I/O Labels window in Logic Pro 598 Undo and redo Mixer and plug-in adjustments in Logic Pro 600 Automate mix and effects settings 601 Overview of automation in Logic Pro 601 Track-based vs.
Logic Pro User Guide Record to cells 648 Change loop settings for cells in Live Loops for Logic Pro 654 How the Live Loops grid and Tracks area interact in Logic Pro 657 Edit Live Loops cells in Logic Pro 659 Edit Live Loops scenes in Logic Pro 662 Work in the Cell Editor in Logic Pro 665 Bounce Live Loops cells in Logic Pro 667 Record a Live Loops performance in Logic Pro 669 Change Live Loops view settings in Logic Pro 669 Control Live Loops in Logic Pro with other devices 671 Use Ste
Logic Pro User Guide Work with chord grids 812 Edit score region parameters 830 Work with staff styles 836 Create scores and parts using score sets 853 Edit the score layout 859 Share a Logic Pro score 863 Customize the Score Editor 864 Share projects 867 Overview of sharing in Logic Pro 867 Bounce projects 868 Share songs to the Music app from Logic Pro 879 Share songs from Logic Pro using AirDrop 880 Share songs from Logic Pro using MailDrop 881 Share songs to SoundCloud from Lo
Logic Pro User Guide Preferences, project settings, and key commands 996 Logic Pro preferences 996 Project settings 1036 Key commands 1077 Use the Touch Bar with Logic Pro 1113 Overview of Touch Bar shortcuts in Logic Pro 1113 Use control surfaces 1123 Control surface requirements in Logic Pro 1123 Connect control surfaces in Logic Pro 1124 Add a control surface to Logic Pro 1126 Automatic assignment for USB MIDI controllers in Logic Pro 1127 Create control surface groups in Logic Pro
What’s new in Logic Pro What’s new in Logic Pro 10.6 Optimized for Apple Silicon New Universal version provides improved performance and efficiency on Mac computers with Apple silicon. Live Loops enhancements You can now move and duplicate multiple scenes in the Live Loops grid. The Zoom tool is now in the Tool menu and can be activated with a key command. See Edit Live Loops scenes and Change Live Loops view settings.
What’s new in Logic Pro 10.5 Live Loops With Live Loops, you can arrange and play with musical ideas in real time in a grid of cells, each containing a musical phrase or loop. You can start and stop cells freely while keeping everything in sync with the beat and the project tempo. Additionally, you can record a Live Loops performance to the Tracks area. Live Loops is designed for use in live performance, and can be used with compatible hardware control surfaces.
Quick Sampler Quick Sampler makes it easy to capture audio and to create a sampler instrument using a single audio file. You can record directly to Quick Sampler or drag an audio file to use as the starting point for an instrument. Quick Sampler analyzes the audio and can intelligently create slices, find loop points, and adjust sample length and pitch independently.
What’s new in Logic Pro 10.4 Smart Tempo With Smart Tempo you can record a performance without the metronome and have Logic Pro adapt the project tempo to match the tempo of the recording, or keep the project tempo and flex the recording to match it. You can also use Smart Tempo when importing audio files with different tempos or tempo variations to have Logic Pro keep the project tempo and flex the audio regions to match it, or adapt the project tempo to use the tempos of the audio files.
Studio instruments The Studio instruments are high quality multisampled brass and string players that offer a collection of solo and grouped instrument presets. Each preset provides a range of articulations that let you create expressive, nuanced performances and recordings. Vintage Mellotron Vintage Mellotron recreates the features and a number of sounds from this famous keyboard instrument that has been featured on dozens of classic rock and pop songs from the 1960s, 1970s, and beyond.
Logic Pro Help Logic Pro Help now includes complete information about the included instruments and effects in one combined document, for easy searching and browsing. What’s new in Logic Pro 10.3 User interface Logic Pro has a new visual design with an expanded color scheme for enhanced readability in different working environments. Track alternatives Track alternatives allow you to create alternate edited versions of a track and switch between them at any time to audition or edit the different options.
New Drummers New percussion players in the styles of Pop, Songwriter, and Latin. Enhanced Quick Help Quick Help has been enhanced, and can now be viewed in a Coaching Tip-style window next to the pointer, as a movable floating window, or in the Inspector. See How to get help for Logic Pro. What’s new in Logic Pro 10.3 Alchemy Logic now includes Alchemy, an easy to use yet powerful sample manipulation synthesizer.
What’s new in Logic Pro 10.0 User interface Modern interface: The Logic Pro interface is redesigned for increased functionality. The transport controls are now at the top of the window for better visibility and access, the Library is relocated next to the track headers, and multiple tracks can now be selected and moved in one operation. Menus are reorganized and streamlined, and there are a host of other ergonomic improvements.
Groove tracks: Set one track in the project as the groove track, then select other tracks you want to follow the timing of the groove track. See Control timing with the groove track in Logic Pro. Editing Flex Pitch: Manipulate pitch and other parameters of vocal and monophonic instrument recordings. You can make quick pitch corrections in the Tracks area, or use the full Flex Pitch functionality to quantize and edit pitch and adjust other parameters in the Audio Track Editor.
Get started with Logic Pro Get started with Logic Pro overview Welcome to Logic Pro. This chapter introduces the main working areas of Logic Pro, and presents some basic tasks to help you start working in the app. Logic Pro is a full-featured music and audio app you can use for every aspect of music creation: recording, arranging, mixing, and more–everything from sketching your initial ideas to producing polished final mixes.
Get started with the Logic Pro main window The Logic Pro main window is where you work on your projects. You can access all of the major working areas of Logic Pro in the main window. The central part of the main window is the Tracks area. You record and arrange the musical material in your project on the tracks in the Tracks area. There are several different track types, including audio, software instrument, and Drummer tracks.
You can open the following working areas of Logic Pro by clicking their buttons in the control bar: • Library: You can audition patches and choose a patch for the selected track in the Library. A patch contains the instrument, effects, and routing settings that control the sound of a track. When you choose a patch, those settings are applied to the currently selected track. The Library shows available patches for the selected track.
• Inspector: You can view and edit parameters for the selected region, the selected track, and other items in the inspector. The available inspectors and parameters change, depending on which working area has focus, and what is selected. The channel strips for the selected track and its output appear in the lower part of the inspector, so you can view and quickly edit channel strip parameters and plug-ins.
• Smart Controls: Smart Controls let you quickly adjust the sound of the selected track using a set of onscreen controls. When you open the Smart Controls pane, you see the screen controls for the the selected track. Screen controls can control both channel strip and plug-in parameters, including software instruments and effects. Move the knobs and other screen controls, and hear how sound changes. To start working with Smart Controls, see Get started with Smart Controls in Logic Pro.
• Editors: Logic Pro includes a set of a set of editors you can use to edit individual tracks and regions, and manipulate their contents precisely. The available editors depend on the type of track or region selected. • The Piano Roll Editor shows notes in selected MIDI regions on software instrument (or external MIDI instrument) tracks. Each note appears as a bar that indicates the point in time where it starts playing, how long the note plays, and the note’s pitch.
• Loop Browser: Logic Pro includes an extensive collection of prerecorded Apple Loops that you can add to your projects. You browse or search for loops in the Loop Browser, where you can preview them to choose the ones you want to use. To start working with Apple Loops, see Get started with Apple Loops in Logic Pro. For more information, see Apple Loops in Logic Pro. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, additional features, browsers, and editors are available.
Get started with Logic Pro projects You create your music in a Logic Pro project. A project is the document that contains all of your recordings, the media files you add, and all the edits you make. You start working in Logic Pro by creating a project or opening an existing one. GarageBand users can open their GarageBand projects in Logic Pro and continue working, with the expanded capabilities of Logic Pro. You can create new projects and open existing projects.
Open a tutorial project 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > New from Template to open the Project Chooser. 2. In the Project Chooser, click Tutorials on the left, then double-click a tutorial project on the right. Open a demo project 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > New from Template to open the Project Chooser. 2. In the Project Chooser, click Demo Projects on the left, then double-click a demo project on the right. Save your project • In Logic Pro, choose File > Save (or press Command-S).
At the top of the Tracks area, the ruler shows units of time in bars, beats, and beat divisions (depending on the zoom level). The control bar contains a group of buttons called transport buttons that you can use to control playback, move the playhead, and start recording. The transport buttons include the following: You can use the cycle area to define part of a project to play back repeatedly.
Move the playhead In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • Drag the playhead to a new position. • Click the lower part of the ruler to move the playhead to the clicked position. If the project is playing, playback continues from the clicked position. • Shift-click in an empty part of the Tracks area at the new position. • While the project is playing, click the Rewind or Forward button. Each time you click Rewind, the playhead jumps back to the previous bar.
Move the cycle area In Logic Pro, grab the cycle area by the middle (the pointer turns into a hand) and drag it left or right. For iPad users, a separate app is available that you can use to navigate Logic Pro projects, and perform mixing, editing, and other functions, on your iPad. The Logic Remote app is available on the App Store. For more information about playback and navigation, see Play a Logic Pro project and Control playback in Logic Pro with the transport buttons.
Show project properties in the LCD • In Logic Pro, click the triangle on the right side of the LCD, then choose Beats & Project from the pop-up menu. Set the project tempo in the LCD • In Logic Pro, click and hold the tempo value (above the letters “bpm”) and drag up or down. Set the project key in the LCD • In Logic Pro, click and hold the key, then choose a new key from the pop-up menu.
Logic Pro includes a metronome, which plays a steady beat to help you play in time while recording. You can have the metronome play as you record, or only play a one-bar count-in before recording starts. Add an audio track 1. In the Logic Pro toolbar, click the Add Tracks button . 2. Click one of the two Audio icons at the top of the New Tracks dialog. • To create an audio track for recording from a microphone: Click the Microphone icon.
Prepare for audio recording Before you start recording audio in Logic Pro, do the following: • Make sure that your microphone or instrument, and any other audio equipment you’re using, such as an audio interface, is connected to the audio input on your computer, and is working. • Make sure there is enough free storage space on your computer or connected storage device. • Sing or play, and check the input level meter in the track header to be sure that the track is receiving the audio signal.
Get started with Logic Pro software instrument tracks If you have a USB or MIDI keyboard (or another type of MIDI controller) connected to your computer, you can play and record software instruments. Logic Pro features a complete library of professional-quality software instruments, including synthesizers and other keyboards, guitars, drums, world instruments, and more. A patch contains the instrument, effects, and routing settings that control the sound of the track.
3. If necessary, click the Details triangle to open the bottom of the dialog. 4. Make sure that “A Software Instrument” appears on the pop-up menu on the left, and “Output 1-2” appears on the Output pop-up menu on the right. 5. Make sure the Open Library checkbox is selected. 6. Click Create. The new track appears in the Tracks area, and the Library opens on the left. Choose a software instrument patch In the Library, click a category on the left, then click a patch name on the right.
Mute a track • In Logic Pro, click the track’s Mute button in the track header. Solo a track • In Logic Pro, click the track’s Solo button in the track header. The Solo button turns yellow, and the Mute buttons of all unsoloed tracks flash blue. Click the button a second time to restore the track to its previous state. Adjust a track’s volume level • In a Logic Pro track header, drag the Volume slider left to lower the volume level, or drag it right to raise the volume level.
Choose a patch for the selected track 1. In Logic Pro, click the Library button in the control bar (or double-click the track header) to open the Library. 2. Choose a patch category from the list on the left, then choose a patch from the list on the right. You can quickly move through the patches in the list using the Up and Down Arrow keys.
Move a region In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • Drag a region left or right to move it to a new time position. • Drag an audio region up or down to another audio track. • Drag a MIDI region up or down to another software instrument track. Resize a region 1. In the Logic Pro Tracks area, move the pointer over the lower-right edge of a region. The pointer becomes a Resize pointer. 2. Drag the edge of the region horizontally to shorten or lengthen it. Loop a region 1.
Split a region using the playhead 1. In the Logic Pro Tracks area, select the region you want to split. 2. Move the playhead over the point in the region where you want to split it, then choose Edit > Split. Only the selected region is split, even if an unselected region on another track is under the playhead as well. If multiple regions are selected and are under the playhead, they are all split. Split a region using the Scissors tool 1. In the Logic Pro Tracks area, select the region you want to split.
Editing regions Get started with the Logic Pro Piano Roll Editor The Piano Roll Editor shows the notes in MIDI regions on a software instrument track as colored bars in a time grid. On the grid, a note’s horizontal position indicates where the note starts playing, while its vertical position indicates its pitch. A keyboard graphic along the left edge of the Piano Roll Editor provides an easy guide to the pitches of notes.
Note: You can change the note length as you add a note, by holding down the mouse button and dragging left or right. Select a group of notes • In the Logic Pro Piano Roll Editor, drag over the keys on the keyboard graphic for the notes you want to select. Move notes • In the Logic Pro Piano Roll Editor, select one or more notes, then drag left or right. Copy notes • In the Logic Pro Piano Roll Editor, press and hold Option while dragging notes to a new position.
Drag a note vertically with the Velocity tool. A help tag indicates the velocity value of the note you clicked, with the value changing as you drag. The color of the note event changes and the horizontal line inside the event either lengthens or shortens. For more information about working in the Piano Roll Editor, see Overview of the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro.
Open the Audio Track Editor In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select an audio track, then click the Editors button . • Double-click an audio region to open it in the Audio Track Editor. The Audio Track Editor opens below the Tracks area. Along the top of the Audio Track Editor is a ruler showing time divisions, based on the time format chosen in the LCD, and a menu bar with local menus. The main area of the Audio Track Editor shows the audio waveform of the regions in the selected audio track.
2. Drag the pointer to trim the beginning or end of the region. Split an audio region In the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor, do one of the following: • Select the Scissors tool, then click the point where you want to split the region. You can scrub regions to find the point where you want to cut by dragging across the regions with the Scissors tool. • Select the region, move the playhead over the time position where you want to split the region, then choose Edit > Split.
Turn on flex in the Audio Track Editor 1. Open the Audio Track Editor by doing one of the following: • Select an audio track in the Tracks area, then choose View > Show Editors. • Select an audio track in the Tracks area, then click the Editors button control bar. • Double-click an audio region. 2. Click the Flex button in the in the Audio Track Editor menu bar. Note: Click the Audio Track Editor’s workspace before using the key command, to make sure that the Audio Track Editor has key focus.
Get started with Drummer in Logic Pro Using Drummer, you can add a virtual drummer to your project. You can choose from different genres, and choose different drummers in each genre. Each drummer has a specific drum kit and playing style. You can choose a drummer preset, edit drum settings to adjust the playing style, exchange drum kits, and choose individual drum sounds. To work with Drummer, you add a Drummer track to the project.
Choose a genre and drummer 1. In the Logic Pro Library, click a genre. The available drummers for the selected genre appear to the right of the genres. 2. Select a drummer. A drummer card appears in the upper part of the Library, showing the drummer’s name and a description of the drummer’s style. Choose a different drummer preset Each drummer includes a variety of presets, which appear on the left side of the Drummer Editor. • In the Logic Pro Drummer Editor, click a preset.
Adjust the complexity and loudness of a preset In the Logic Pro Drummer Editor, reposition the puck in the XY pad. The farther right you place the puck, the more complex the sound becomes; the higher you place the puck, the louder the sound plays. Choose a pattern variation for a drum or percussion instrument In the Logic Pro Drummer Editor, do any of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • For Tambourine, Shaker, and Handclap: Click an instrument, then drag the Percussion slider or choose an increment.
Exchange a drum 1. In the Logic Pro Drummer Editor, click the plug-in button at the bottom of the drummer’s card to open Drum Kit Designer. 2. Click a drum. The Exchange panel opens to the left if exchange pieces are available for that kit piece. 3. Click the Info button of a selected kit piece to view its description. 4. Click the kit piece that you want to exchange in the Exchange panel. You may need to scroll in order to find the one you want to use.
• Drag the Feel knob to the right to have the drummer play ahead of the beat (Push), or to the left to play behind the beat (Pull). • Drag the Ghost Notes knob to adjust the level of ghost notes—syncopated snare and kick hits—in the beat. Note: The presence of ghost notes depends on the chosen drummer and the complexity setting. • Drag the Hi-Hat knob to adjust the degree to which the Hi-Hat is opened and closed during the drum performance.
Manipulate screen controls In the Logic Pro Smart Controls pane, turn the knobs, click the switches, and move the other screen controls to see how they affect the sound of the patch. Each screen control has a text label indicating what aspect of the sound it controls. You can also change the layout for a Smart Control, save your own Smart Controls, map screen controls to channel strip and plug-in parameters, and assign controllers on your MIDI devices to screen controls.
Create an empty Live Loops project 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > New from Template (or press Command-N). 2. Click New Project, then click the Live Loops project icon. Choose a Live Loops template 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > New From Template (or press Command-N). 2. Click Templates and choose a Live Loops template from the list. For more information about working with Live Loops, see the Live Loops overview.
Open the Mixer Click the Mixer button in the control bar (or press X). The Mixer opens below the Tracks area.
Mute and unmute a channel strip • In the Logic Pro Mixer, click the channel strip’s Mute button (with an “M”). Click the button again to unmute the channel strip. Solo and unsolo a channel strip • In the Logic Pro Mixer, click the channel strip’s Solo button (with an “S”). When you solo a channel strip, the Mute buttons of all unsoloed channel strips flash. Click the button again to unsolo the channel strip.
Open a plug-in window In the Logic Pro Mixer, click the center area of a plug-in slot. For detailed information about mixing a project, see Overview of mixing in Logic Pro. For more information about channel strip controls, see Channel strip controls in Logic Pro. Get started with Apple Loops in Logic Pro Apple Loops are prerecorded musical patterns that you can use to quickly add drum beats, rhythm parts, and other musical phrases to a project.
There are three types of Apple Loops: • Audio Apple Loops: You add audio loops to audio tracks, and edit them like other audio regions. • Software Instrument Apple Loops: You add software instrument loops to software instrument tracks, and edit them like other MIDI regions. • Drummer Apple Loops: You can add Drummer loops to Drummer tracks, and then change the artist and edit parameters in the Drummer Editor.
Add a loop to the Tracks area In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Drag the loop to a track of the same type to add it to that track. Drag the loop to an empty part of the Tracks area to create a new track with the loop. After you add the loop to the Tracks area, you can drag it left or right to adjust the point where it starts playing. You can also search for loops by name, key, or time signature. For more information about using Apple Loops in your projects, see Apple Loops in Logic Pro.
Choose the Flex & Follow setting for an audio region 1. In the Logic Pro Tracks area, select the audio region. 2. In the Region inspector, select one of the following from the Flex & Follow pop-up menu: • Off: The region doesn’t follow changes to the project tempo, and isn’t Flex enabled. • On: The region is Flex enabled, so it follows any manual Flex edits. It also follows any changes to the project tempo.
Get started sharing Logic Pro projects You can share a project to the Music app to play. If you have a SoundCloud account, you can share a project to SoundCloud, choose the quality and visibility level, and set permissions for the shared project from within Logic Pro. Share the project to the Music app 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Share > Song to Music. 2. To rename the shared file, select the name in the Title field, then enter a new name. 3.
• To sign in to a different SoundCloud account, click Change, then enter the login information for the account. • To share the current project, select Bounce as the Source. • To share an audio file, select File as the Source, click Browse, then browse to the location of the file. • Type title, artist, composer, and album information for the project in the respective text fields. Projects must have a title in the Title field. The remaining information is optional.
If you are upgrading Logic Pro Welcome to Logic Pro. The latest version of Apple’s award-winning music and audio creation software has a refreshed interface, the power and flexibility of earlier versions, and many new and updated features to help make creating music and audio productions easier and more rewarding than ever.
Logic Pro User Guide Former term Logic Pro term Details Audio Bin Project Audio Browser File Browser All Files Browser project folder project file or project folder Project assets can now be saved in the project, or in a project folder. You can also reference assets stored in another location. -- project alternatives Alternatives let you save “snapshots” of a project in different states. -- project backups Backups let you recall earlier, automatically saved versions of a project.
Logic Pro basics What is Logic Pro? Logic Pro is a powerful, full-featured music app with all the tools you need to create professional-quality music productions. You can record, arrange, and edit audio and MIDI regions, add high-quality effects, mix your music in stereo or surround, and export the final mix in a variety of formats for distribution. Using Logic Pro you can create many different kinds of projects, from simple songs to complex ensemble arrangements.
• Arrange regions containing your musical material in the Tracks area. You can also define sections of the project and quickly rearrange them using arrangement markers. • Edit audio and MIDI regions using a set of editors optimized for different tasks and region types. • Edit the timing and pitch of audio regions, and of individual notes, chords, and sounds. • Mix your project in the Mixer, where you can view and edit channel strip controls, customize routing options, and add and edit plug-ins.
Create the arrangement Organize your recordings and other media to build an arrangement in the Tracks area. Recordings, loops, and other media files appear in the Tracks area as regions that you can can copy, move, resize, loop, and edit in other ways. You can also use arrangement markers to define and easily rearrange entire sections of a project. Edit regions Logic Pro offers a set of editors you can use to edit both audio and MIDI regions in a variety of ways.
Logic Pro interface overview Logic Pro main window interface You create and play projects in the Logic Pro main window. The main window is organized into different areas to help you focus on different aspects of your project, such as recording, arranging, and mixing. Buttons in the control bar show or hide different areas of the app.
• Inspector: Shows parameters for selected regions, tracks, and other items. The available parameters change depending on the area in which you are working, and what type of item is selected. • Smart Controls: A simplified set of visual controls that you can use to quickly modify the sound of the current patch without having to edit individual channel strip or plug-in settings. • Mixer: Shows channel strips for each track in the project, as well as auxiliary, output, and master channel strips.
Logic Pro Tracks area interface The Tracks area is the primary workspace of Logic Pro, where you record and arrange audio and MIDI regions to create your project. The main elements of the Tracks area include: • Tracks area menu bar: Contains local Tracks area menus as well as tool menus, controls for showing track automation and Flex edits, a Catch Playhead button, Snap and Drag pop-up menus, a Waveform Zoom button, and scroll and zoom sliders.
Logic Pro Library interface You can view available patches for the currently selected track, and choose a new patch, in the Library. Categories appear on the left, and patches for the selected category are displayed on the right. You can search for patches, create, save, and delete patches, and choose routing options. When a Drummer track is selected, you can choose drum genres and drummers in the Library, which apply to all regions in the Drummer track.
You can also access the following file types in the Library, when the corresponding item is selected: • Channel strip settings (.cst) • Plug-in presets (.pst) • Sampler instruments (.exs) • Environment instruments, and programs or banks of MIDI instruments created in the Audio MIDI Setup utility Open the Library Do one of the following: Click the Library button in the control bar. Choose View > Show Library. For information about using the Library, see Logic Pro patches overview.
• Region inspector: View and edit playback parameters, including transposition and quantization, for selected regions. Region parameters affect the playback of regions, but don’t alter the data in the region itself. If you change region parameters while the project is playing, you hear the changes immediately. • Track inspector: View and edit various track parameters, including transposition, velocity, and delay. All regions on the track are affected by the track parameters.
• Channel strips: Use to process audio or MIDI information that is routed from tracks. • Channel strip controls: Adjust the level and other aspects of the audio signal played through the channel strip. • View buttons: Use to switch between Single, Tracks, and All views, limiting the Mixer view to channel strips required for the task at hand. • Filter buttons: Use to limit the channel strips displayed in the Mixer to specific types.
Open the Smart Controls as a separate window Choose Window > Open Smart Controls. For information about working with Smart Controls, see Logic Pro Smart Controls overview. Editors Logic Pro Audio Track Editor interface The Audio Track Editor displays the audio waveform of the regions on an audio track. In the Audio Track Editor, you can copy, paste, move, trim, split, and join audio regions. Using the Audio Track Editor grid, you can precisely align edits with specific points in time.
Logic Pro Piano Roll Editor interface The Piano Roll Editor shows notes in MIDI regions as rectangles on a time grid. The position of each note on the grid shows the time position where it starts playing, its duration (length), and pitch. Note velocity is indicated by color. You can edit individual notes by moving them, resizing them, dragging them vertically to change their pitch, and in a variety of other ways.
Logic Pro Drummer Editor interface If you add a Drummer track to a project, you can view and edit Drummer track and region parameters in the Drummer Editor. The Drummer Editor shows settings for the selected Drummer region, including presets, an XY pad for adjusting the complexity and loudness of the region performance, and controls for editing performance parameters, including kit piece pattern variations and fill settings.
Logic Pro Score Editor interface The Score Editor displays MIDI regions as music notation, including notes, rests, and other MIDI events such as sustain pedal markings. You can add and edit notes and other musical symbols. Lyrics, titles, and other text can also be included in the score. You can control the display of individual staffs, extract parts from the score, modify the overall score layout, and print or export complete scores, partial scores, and parts.
Logic Pro Step Editor interface The Step Editor displays notes or controller events for selected MIDI regions as beams in a user-defined time grid. You can easily add or edit note velocities or other controller data (making some editing tasks, such as data scaling, much faster), or quickly create and edit MIDI drum parts. • Lane parameters: Determine the type of event displayed or modified. When you select a row in the name column, its event definition is shown in the Lane inspector.
• Ruler: Indicates the position and length of the region selected in the Tracks area, or in the Project Audio Browser. • Info display: Displays the start point and length of the selected area. • Waveform overview: Displays a miniature view of the entire audio waveform. • Waveform display: Provides a detailed view of the area selected in the waveform overview. • Playhead: Reflects the current playback position. • Anchor: Displays the absolute start point of the audio file.
• Project Text area: View and edit project notes in the Project Text area. • Project Text Edit button: Use to add or edit project-specific text in the Project Text area. You can also double-click the Project Text area. Open the Project Notes pane Do one of the following: Click the Note Pads button in the control bar. Choose View > Show Note Pads. Logic Pro track notes interface You can create, view, and edit notes for each track in the Track Notes pane.
List Editors Logic Pro Event List interface The Event List shows all the events in your project, such as MIDI note events or region start events, in a vertical list format. You can use it to make precise edits, and for other tasks better suited to numeric rather than graphic edits. You can display all events or limit them by category. Logic Pro User Guide • Display Level button: Click to move up one display level in the Event List. This view lets you see all regions in the current project.
Open the Event List Do one of the following: Click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Event. Choose View > Show List Editors, then click Event. Open the Event List as a separate window Choose Window > Open Event List (or press Command-7). For more information, see Logic Pro Event List editor overview. Logic Pro Marker List interface The Marker List displays all the markers in the project.
• Marker Text Area button: Shows or hides the Marker Text area. Use this area to enter or edit text for the selected marker. • Marker Text area: Enter text for the selected marker by double-clicking the area or clicking the Marker Text Area button. • Marker Set pop-up menu: Choose the marker set to view and edit. Open the Marker List Do one of the following: Click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Marker. Choose View > Show List Editors, then click Marker.
• Create button: Click to create a new tempo event. • Tempo List area: Displays all tempo changes, and their position in a project. • Tempo Set pop-up menu: Choose the tempo set to view and edit. Open the Tempo List Do one of the following: Click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Tempo. Choose View > Show List Editors, then click Tempo. For more information, see Logic Pro Tempo List overview.
• Create button: Click to create a new signature event. • Signature List area: Displays all time and key signature changes, and their position in a project. • Signature Set pop-up menu: Choose the signature set to view and edit. Open the Signature List Do one of the following: Click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Signature. Choose View > Show List Editors, then click Signature. For more information, see Logic Pro time and key signature overview.
• Keyword buttons: Filter loops by clicking keyword buttons. Matching loops appear in the results list below. • Category columns: Filter loops by choosing categories and subcategories from left to right. Matching loops appear in the results list below. • Results list: Displays all loops that match the search criteria. Click a loop to preview it, and drag a loop from the results list into the Tracks area to add it to your project. • Volume slider: Adjusts the volume of loops you are previewing.
The Project Audio Browser is available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. Logic Pro User Guide • File path: Shows the location of the audio file. • Name column: Displays audio files by name. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of an audio file to reveal regions associated with the file. • Icon column: Displays icons to indicate missing or timestamped files, files that follow the project tempo, or files that contain tempo information.
Open the Project Audio Browser Do one of the following: Click the Browsers button in the control bar, then click Project. Choose View > Show Browsers, then click Project. Open the Project Audio Browser as a separate window Choose Window > Open Project Audio (or press Command-8). For more information about using the Project Audio Browser, see The Project Audio Browser in Logic Pro.
The All Files Browser displays the following file types found on your computer or any connected storage device: • Logic Pro project files (including projects created with previous versions of Logic Pro) • GarageBand projects • Audio files • QuickTime movies • All file formats that can be imported into a Logic Pro project The All Files Browser includes the following features and controls: • Back and Forward buttons: Move back and forward through previously viewed levels of the folder hierarchy.
For more information about working with projects, see Logic Pro projects overview. For information about creating Logic Pro projects, see Create Logic Pro projects. The basic elements of a Logic Pro project include the following: Tracks The horizontal rows in the Tracks area are called tracks. Tracks help you organize and control the sound of the recordings, loops, and other material in a project.
Regions Regions are the building blocks of a project. Each time you make a recording, drag an Apple Loop to the Tracks area, or add a media file to your project, a region representing the recording or file appears in the Tracks area. Different types of regions correspond to different track types and types of material. • Audio regions refer to (point to) an underlying audio file (a recording made in Logic Pro, an audio Apple Loop, or an imported audio file).
Channel strips Each track in a project is represented and controlled by a channel strip corresponding to the track type. Channel strips contain controls to adjust the volume level and pan position of the track, mute and solo the track, insert plug-ins, route the output signal, and control the track in other ways. You can view and edit the channel strips for a project in the Mixer.
Work with Logic Pro windows Open and close Logic Pro windows You can open editors and other working areas as separate windows, open multiple windows simultaneously, customize your window setup, and save different window arrangements as screensets. The contents of each window update to show your latest changes. Only one window can have key focus at a given time, this is called the active window. When several normal windows overlap, the active window is the window in the foreground.
Close a window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Click the close button at the top-left corner of the window. Choose File > Close (or press Command-W). The window with key focus closes. Close all windows (of the active project) In Logic Pro, Option-click the close button to close all windows of the active project. Note: If you close all open windows of a project, Logic Pro asks if you want to save your changes.
Adjust the size of window elements 1. In Logic Pro, move the pointer over the resize bar. 2. When the pointer turns into the Resize pointer, drag the window element. Zoom Logic Pro windows You can also zoom in to see regions or events in closer detail, or zoom out to see more of the project. Most Logic Pro windows have zoom sliders. When you zoom in or out, the top-left (and selected) event or region remains in the visible area of the screen.
Zoom the Tracks area or editor using the playhead • In Logic Pro, press and hold Option as you click and hold in the lower section of the ruler, then drag the top of the playhead up or down. Dragging down zooms in, while dragging up zooms out. Zoom using your computer trackpad • In Logic Pro, pinch on the trackpad using two fingers. Pinch open to zoom in, or pinch closed to zoom out. Zoom a section of the Tracks area using the Zoom tool 1.
Scale Logic Pro plug-in windows You can adjust the size of individual plug-in windows to increase their readability. Adjust the size of an individual plug-in window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag the lower-right corner of the plug-in window. • Choose the window size in the plug-in window’s View pop-up menu.
You also have the option of using Catch mode together with the Scroll in Play setting. The View menus of all windows that display time horizontally (Tracks area, Score Editor, Piano Roll Editor, and Step Editor) offer the View > Scroll in Play setting. If the Catch function of the window is also activated, the playhead remains in the middle of the window, while the background scrolls smoothly from right to left.
Link windows in a Logic Pro project When Additional Advanced Editing Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can independently link or unlink windows (including the Tracks area, Piano Roll Editor, Score Editor, and Event List) to control the relationship between what they display. For example, you could set up two Event Lists, one showing arrange regions, and the other showing their contents, then click a region in the first Event List to update the contents of the second one.
Control windows using screensets Create and recall screensets in Logic Pro You position windows in a layout that suits the way you work. This layout of various windows, including their display size, zoom levels, position, and other settings, is called a screenset. Once defined, you can save, and freely switch between different screensets, much as you might between different computer displays.
4. Alter the number in the Num column from 50 to 49. This changes the name to screenset. 5. Enter the screenset number in the Val column. You can stop screenset switching by muting the MIDI region that contains the meta 49 event. For information about using the Event List, see Logic Pro Event List editor overview. For information about meta events, see Meta events in Logic Pro. Copy, rename, and delete screensets in Logic Pro You can protect, copy, rename, and delete a screenset.
Rename the current screenset 1. In Logic Pro, choose Screensets > Rename (or use the Rename Screenset key command). 2. In the Rename Screenset dialog, do one of the following: • Enter a new name. • Click the Auto Name button to automatically name the screenset. The default is the visible window names. The name is automatically updated whenever a window or view is opened or closed. 3. Click OK.
Work with tools in Logic Pro Logic Pro tools overview Logic Pro provides tools for a variety of editing tasks and other functions. Tools menus are available in the Tracks area, various editors (including the Piano Roll, Audio Track, Audio File, Score, and Step Editors), and the Environment. Some tools are common to all working areas, while others are available only in some working areas. When you choose a tool from the Tools menu, the pointer changes to show the chosen tool.
Assign tools in Logic Pro You can assign tools to the Left-click and Command-click Tool menus. The pointer adopts the shape of the active tool, so you can quickly identify which tool is being used. The Command-click Tool menu is located on the right by default, but is located in the middle when a third (Right-click) tool is assigned. You can assign the Right-click tool in the Logic Pro General > Editing preferences pane. See Editing preferences in Logic Pro.
• Is Assignable to a Tool: When this option is chosen, a third Tool menu (Right-click Tool menu) appears to the right of the Left-click and Command-click Tool menus. Choose the appropriate menu item to assign the tool, which is available when the right mouse button is pressed while editing. • Opens Tool Menu: Right-clicking in the working area of the active window opens the Tool menu with the Pointer tool (and not the currently selected tool) located under the pointer position. Click a tool to choose it.
Set the behavior of the Pointer tool in the Tracks area 1. In Logic Pro, choose Logic Pro > Preferences > General (or use the corresponding key command). 2. Click Editing, then select the behavior you want for the Pointer tool. • Fade Tool Click Zones: When selected, placing the pointer over the upper-left and upper-right edges of a region activates the Fade pointer and behavior. The Loop pointer and behavior can still be accessed in these click zones by holding down Option.
Eraser tool Use the Eraser tool to delete selected regions or events. When you click a region or event with the Eraser tool, all of the currently selected regions or events are deleted (similar to pressing the Delete key). The Eraser tool can also delete an unselected region or event by clicking it. Text tool Use the Text tool to rename regions and other items, or add text to a score in the Score Editor.
Automation Curve tool Use to Automation Curve tool to bend or reshape the curve between two automation points, creating a nonlinear transition between the points. Marquee tool Use the crosshair-shaped Marquee tool to select and edit parts of regions. In the Tracks area, you can select part of a region or regions with the Marquee tool and apply selectionbased processing with audio effects.
You turn on advanced tools by selecting Show Advanced Tools in the Advanced preferences pane. Turning on advanced tools (without turning on any of the specific additional options) lets you do the following: User interface • Access the Event, Marker, Tempo, and Signature Lists. • Access the Project Audio Browser and All Files Browser. • Access the Step Editor (formerly Hyper Editor) to graphically edit MIDI events. • Customize the control bar and toolbar with additional buttons and controls.
Projects • Open and work on multiple projects. • Manage different versions of projects called alternatives. • Revert to automatically saved versions of a project called backups. • Save assets either inside the project or in a project folder with subfolders for different asset types. Additional Options When Show Advanced Tools is selected, additional options providing further expert capabilities become available, and can be selected individually depending on the type of tasks you want to perform.
Undo and redo edits in Logic Pro You can undo one or more edit operations, and redo undone edits. Logic Pro includes an Undo History window with a time-ordered list of all edits that can be undone. You can also change the number of steps that can be undo in Logic Pro preferences. Undo your last edit operation • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Undo (or press Command-Z) immediately after making the undesired edit.
Change the number of undo steps 1. In Logic Pro, choose Logic Pro > Preferences > General, then click Editing. 2. Change the number in the Number of Undo Steps value slider. Manage Logic Pro content Logic Pro features an extensive Sound Library of Apple Loops, patches, drum kits, and other content that you can use in your projects. When you install Logic Pro, essential sounds and instruments are included as part of the installation.
Content types The Sound Library includes the following types of content: • Apple Loops • Drum kits • Patches • Plug-in settings • Quick Sampler samples • Sampler instruments and their associated samples • Impulse responses • Legacy and compatibility content, including Jam Packs, sounds, and instruments Content locations Logic Pro installs Sound Library content in several different locations on your computer: Content type Location Apple Loops /Library/Audio/Apple Loops/Apple/ Impulse resp
Note: Other Apple music creation apps such as MainStage and GarageBand share the same Sound Library location. When you relocate the Sound Library, it is also relocated for these apps if they are installed on your computer. Reinstalling the Sound Library You can reinstall the Sound Library. This can be useful to make sure you have the latest version of all available content, and also in case the drive containing the Sound Library is no longer available.
Download additional content 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • In the Sound Library Manager, select the checkbox for each content package you want to download. • To download all uninstalled content, click the Select All Uninstalled button. 2. Click Install. While additional content is downloading, a progress bar appears in the lower part of the LCD. You can view more detailed information about the progress of the download by clicking the progress bar.
How to get help for Logic Pro Logic Pro provides several ways for you to get answers to questions, learn about controls and functions while you’re working, and view detailed information about all aspects of the app. You can also view information directly in the app using the Quick Help feature. In addition to being available from the Logic Pro Help menu, the full suite of help documents is available online in HTML, PDF, and EPUB formats.
Logic Pro Instruments Provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful collection of instruments included with Logic Pro. • To view the Logic Pro Instruments guide in Logic Pro, choose Help > Logic Pro Instruments. • To view the Logic Pro Instruments Guide in EPUB format, click the Go to Apple Books link on the Welcome page, or search for Logic Pro Instruments in the store in Apple Books.
Connect external devices Logic Pro hardware connection overview You can use Logic Pro with a wide variety of audio and MIDI devices, including microphones, keyboards and other musical instruments, mixers, and other audio equipment. To connect audio devices to your computer, you can use an audio interface. Keyboards and other MIDI devices can be connected directly, or using a MIDI interface.
Connect a microphone to a computer running Logic Pro You can connect a microphone to your computer to record your voice, an instrument, or any other sound to an audio track. You can connect a microphone to your computer’s audio input port, a USB port, or to an audio interface connected to your computer. You can also use your computer’s built-in microphone to record sound.
Connect an electric instrument to your computer Do one of the following: • Connect an audio interface to your computer’s Thunderbolt or USB port, then connect an electric instrument to the audio interface. • Connect the electric instrument to a channel on the audio interface or the adapter cable, using a standard 1/4-inch tip-sleeve instrument cable. • If your computer has an audio input port, connect an electric instrument to the audio input port using an adapter cable.
All digital audio interfaces can be susceptible to latency—a noticeable delay between the time the audio signal is produced, and when you hear it. You should always attach your audio interface directly to the computer, rather than through a hub, or daisy-chaining it through another device. Doing so can cause an unacceptable amount of latency, particularly with slower USB 1.1 devices.
Open Audio Devices preferences In Logic Pro, choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio (or use the Open Audio Preferences key command), then click the Devices tab. Logic Pro automatically recognizes any installed Core Audio hardware, and uses the default settings as defined in the Audio MIDI Setup utility (Applications/Utilities/Audio MIDI Setup).
Connect a USB music keyboard to use with Logic Pro You can connect a USB music keyboard to your computer to play and record software instruments, or record MIDI regions to use with external MIDI devices such as synthesizers or sound modules. Connect a USB music keyboard to your computer • Connect the USB cable from the keyboard to your computer. If the keyboard has MIDI ports instead of a USB port, see Connect MIDI devices to use with Logic Pro.
• For keyboard controllers without tone generators: You only need to connect the MIDI Out port of the keyboard to a MIDI In port on your MIDI interface, using a MIDI cable. • For keyboards with tone generators: You should also connect the MIDI Out port of the MIDI interface to the keyboard MIDI In port. If your MIDI interface offers more than one MIDI output, connect any other tone generators (or other MIDI devices, such as control surfaces that require bidirectional MIDI communication) to these.
About multichannel MIDI devices and Logic Pro Multi-timbral MIDI tone devices can simultaneously receive MIDI data on multiple MIDI channels. Each MIDI channel can be assigned a tone or sound, such as piano, strings, bass, and so on. To take full advantage of the capabilities of such multi-timbral devices, you should use separate MIDI Out ports (from the computer MIDI interface to the MIDI In ports) for each device.
Stop local sound generation for MIDI devices in Logic Pro If your MIDI keyboard has an internal sound source, it’s important that you stop the keyboard from generating sounds directly from its own keyboard. For example, if you buy a new keyboard to be used without a sequencer, and connect it to an amplifier, you would expect the device to make a sound when you press its keys—in other words, the keyboard is directly connected to the sound generator.
Work with projects Logic Pro projects overview A project is a Logic Pro document that contains all of your recordings, the location of media files you add, and all the changes you make. You start working in Logic Pro by creating a project, or opening an existing project. You can have multiple projects open at the same time, and transfer media and other data between them. Logic Pro projects are organized in a new way compared to earlier Logic Pro versions.
When you create a project folder for a new project, the project file is saved in the project folder, and the file types selected in the Save dialog are saved to the corresponding subfolder in the project folder. Create a project 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > New (or press Command-N). 2. In the Project Chooser, select an option from the list on the left: • To create a new, empty project: Click New Project. • To see recently open projects: Click Recent.
• To set the project tempo: Drag the Tempo slider, enter a tempo in the Tempo field, or click the Tap Tempo button several times. • To have regions in the project use the musical grid: Select the “Use musical grid” checkbox. • To set the key signature: Choose a key from the Key Signature pop-up menu, then click Major or Minor. • To set the time signature: Click the arrows to change the number of beats, or double-click the time signature and enter a new time signature.
Open Logic Pro projects You can open an existing project to continue working. You can also open several projects simultaneously, allowing you to copy or move data between them, or to compare different versions of a project. Opening projects created in earlier Logic Pro versions You can open projects created in Logic Pro 5 or later. Projects saved in Logic Pro are not backward-compatible with earlier Logic Pro versions.
Open a recent project In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose File > Open Recent, then choose your project. • In the Project Chooser, click Recent, then double-click the project. You can clear all items in the Open Recent submenu by choosing Clear Menu. Tip: If you set the Startup Action in Logic Pro > Preferences > General > Project Handling to Open Most Recent Project, Logic Pro reopens the last open project automatically. Open a demo project 1.
• Project package: Project assets are copied to the project package, or are referenced from another location, depending on which asset types are selected in the Save dialog. By default, the converted project is saved inside the existing project folder, if one exists. • Project folder: Project assets are copied to the appropriate subfolders of the project folder, or are referenced from another location, depending on which asset types are selected in the Save dialog.
4. Select the type of assets to copy to the project, then click Save. For more information about managing project assets, see Manage Logic Pro project assets. Save a copy of the project, including project assets 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Save a Copy As. 2. In the Save As dialog, enter a new name for the project. 3. Select the type of assets to copy to the project, then click Save. For more information about managing project assets, see Manage Logic Pro project assets.
Revert to the last saved version of a project If you decide you don’t want to keep your latest edits to a project, you can revert to the last saved version of the project. • In Logic Pro, choose File > Revert to (or use the corresponding key command), then choose the last saved version (at the top of the list). Important: After a project is saved as a Logic Pro project, it can no longer be opened in earlier versions of Logic Pro.
Stop playback • In Logic Pro, click the Stop button in the control bar (or press the Space bar). For more information about project playback, see Control playback in Logic Pro with the transport buttons. Set the playhead position in Logic Pro The playhead is the vertical line showing the current playback position in the Tracks area and other time-based windows (such as the Audio Track Editor, Piano Roll Editor, and Score Editor).
Control playback in Logic Pro with the transport buttons You can use the transport buttons in the control bar to control playback, or to set the playhead position. You can click the buttons to activate or deactivate functions, or use the corresponding key commands to speed up your workflow. The default set of transport buttons includes the Rewind, Forward, Stop, Play, and Record buttons to the left of the LCD, and the Cycle, Replace, Autopunch, Solo, and Click (Metronome) buttons to the right of the LCD.
Use additional transport buttons In Logic Pro, click any of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • Go to Beginning button: Moves the playhead to the start of the project. • Go to Position button: Moves the playhead to a target bar or time position that you specify in the Go to Position dialog. • Go to Left Locator button: Moves the playhead to the left locator position shown in the ruler. The left locator defines the cycle area start point.
Use transport shortcut menus in Logic Pro Some transport functions are only accessible from shortcut menus. Both the Stop/Go to Beginning button and the Play button in the control bar have shortcut menus with additional transport functions. Use the Stop button transport functions 1. In Logic Pro, control-click the Stop/Go to Beginning button in the control bar. 2. Choose any of the following items from the shortcut menu: • Stop: Stops project playback. • Stop and Go to Left Locator: Stops playback.
Use transport keyboard shortcuts in Logic Pro Some transport functions are available as key commands. Most of these transport key commands have no default assignment, and need to be assigned manually. See Assign key commands in Logic Pro. For supported USB MIDI controllers, button controls on the device may be automatically assigned to transport key commands. For more information, see Automatic MIDI controller assignment in Logic Pro. • Play or Stop: Starts or stops playback. Press the Space bar.
Customize the Logic Pro control bar The control bar offers a default set of buttons and other controls, providing commonly used options. In the center of the control bar is the LCD, which shows the playhead position and the project tempo, key, and time signature. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can customize the control bar in the following ways: • You can show or hide the entire control bar to maximize the amount of available space in the main window.
Turn the Use SMPTE View Offset setting on or off You can set a SMPTE offset for the project. As songs don’t always need to start precisely at bar 1, you can select any bar position to be played at the set SMPTE time. • In Logic Pro, click the triangle on the right side of the LCD, then choose Use SMPTE View Offset from the pop-up menu. Change the time, tempo, and clock format 1. Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Display (or use the Open Display Preferences key command). 2.
4. Choose one of the following settings in the Display Tempo as pop-up menu: • Beats Per Minute (BPM, Maelzel): Beats per minute, to four individually adjustable decimal places. • BPM without Decimals: Beats per minute, with no decimal places. • Frames Per Click with Eights: Frames per beat with eighths. After the value, you will see fpc. • Frames Per Click with Decimals: Frames per beat, to four decimal places. Take care, as this display can easily be confused with the bpm display. 5.
Change the LCD display mode In the LCD, located in the center of the control bar, you can view the playhead position in either time or beats, and set the project tempo, key, and time signature. Set the display mode for the LCD The LCD has display modes that let you view the time format in either musical units (bars and beats) or absolute time units (minutes and seconds), independent of the time format of the ruler. You can show additional information using the Custom display mode.
Stop unwanted modulation • In Logic Pro, use the Send Reset Controllers key command. This transmits control change message #121, with a value of 0 (reset all controllers), on all MIDI channels and outputs used by defined instruments. This neutralizes all MIDI controllers, such as modulation or pitch bends. Set all MIDI channels to maximum volume • In Logic Pro, choose Options > Send to MIDI > Maximum Volume (or use the Send Maximum Volume key command).
Set the cycle area in the ruler • In Logic Pro, drag left or right in the top part of the ruler. The cycle area appears as a yellow strip in the ruler, and Cycle mode is automatically turned on. Set the locator positions in the LCD 1. In Logic Pro, click the triangle on the right side of the LCD, then choose Custom from the pop-up menu. The left and right locator positions appear in both beats and time formats in the LCD. 2.
Set the locator positions using key commands • In Logic Pro, use any of the following key commands: • Set Locators by Regions/Events/Marquee: Sets the locators at the start and end points of the selected regions or events, or the marquee selection. • Set Locators and Play: Sets the locators at the start and end points of the selected regions or events, or the marquee selection, and starts playback.
Use the Chase Events function in Logic Pro If you start playback in the middle of a project, some events might not be heard (such as MIDI notes, sustain pedal events, and pitch bend events that start before the point where playback begins). With the Chase Events function, Logic Pro analyzes the project to include some or all of these events when the project plays back. There is a potential problem when using Chase Events with notes used to trigger a drum loop in a sampler.
Control Logic Pro using Apple Remote You can use your Apple Remote to control Logic Pro from a distance. A short click offers the following functions: A long click offers the following functions: Note: Apple Remote is compatible with Apple products that have a built-in Infrared (IR) receiver. Front Row is not available while Logic Pro is open.
Set project properties Logic Pro project properties overview Each Logic Pro project has properties that include the project tempo, key and scale, time signature, and sample rate. You can set project properties when you create a project, and change them later while you’re working. Some project properties, such as tempo and sample rate, should be set when you create the project if possible, because they can affect recordings or media files you add to the project, creating extra work.
• Open the Tempo track, then drag the tempo line up or down with the Pointer tool. • Assign a key command to Tap Tempo, then use the key command to set the tempo. The first time you tap the tempo, an alert appears, asking if you want to enable Tap Tempo. For information about the Tempo List, see Logic Pro Tempo List overview. For information about the Tempo track, see Logic Pro tempo track overview.
When you change the project’s scale type from major to minor or vice versa, in some cases the key may change enharmonically (for example, from Db major to C# minor). These changes follow common practice for printed music, and affect only the key as shown in the menu, not the pitch of regions in your project. Set the time signature of a Logic Pro project Each project has a time signature, which defines how musical time is divided into measures and beats.
• Open the Signature track, then double-click the value shown. Set the Numerator and Denominator values (and other settings, if you like). For more information about time signatures, see Logic Pro time and key signature overview. Set the sample rate of a Logic Pro project The project’s sample rate determines the number of samples Logic Pro uses for audio playback.
Note: If the LCD does not show the Sample Rate display, Control-click the LCD and choose Customize Control Bar from the shortcut menu. Select the Sample Rate checkbox in the Customize Control Bar dialog. Match a file’s sample rate with the project sample rate • In Logic Pro, use the Project Audio Browser’s Copy/Convert File(s) command (which is also available by Control-clicking the Project Audio Browser or using the corresponding key command), then replace the file in the project.
Set the project end point In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag the Project End marker in the ruler to the left or right. • Set the value in the LCD’s numerical Project End display (by dragging or double-clicking the value). Note: If the Project End display doesn’t appear in the LCD, Control-click the LCD and choose Customize Control Bar and Display in the shortcut menu. Select the Key Signature/ Project End checkbox in the Customize Control Bar dialog.
Manage projects Logic Pro project management overview You can manage Logic Pro projects to control where files used in the project are saved, how projects are organized, and perform other management functions. A project can include various assets, which are media files and other files used in the project. By default, project assets are saved in the project. Assets can also be referenced from an external location.
Edit project alternatives 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Project Alternatives > Edit Alternatives. 2. In the Edit Alternatives window, select an alternative from the list, then do either of the following: • To rename the alternative: Click Rename, then enter a new name. • To delete the alternative: Click Remove. You cannot remove the Main alternative. 3. Click Done. Choose a different alternative • In Logic Pro, choose File > Project Alternatives, and choose a different alternative from the list.
Clean up Logic Pro projects When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can clean up a project by deleting unused or unneeded media files using the Clean Up command. Clean up project files 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Project Management > Clean Up. 2. In the dialog that appears, select the checkboxes for the cleanup options you want to apply to the current project.
• To copy the respective file types to the project: Select any of the copy checkboxes. • To automatically convert the sample rate of all imported files (with a different sample rate) to match the project sample rate: Select the “Convert audio file sample rate when importing” checkbox. • If you deselect the “Copy Sampler audio data into project” option, only Sampler instrument files are copied to the project when saving, not the samples associated with the Sampler instrument files.
Rename Logic Pro projects You can rename the currently open project without leaving Logic Pro. If the project contains only one alternative, and both have the same name, both are renamed. If a project contains multiple alternatives, and all alternatives have their default names (project name #1, project name #2, and so on), then the project and all alternatives are renamed. Rename the current project 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Project Management > Rename Project. 2.
Import data from another project 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose File > Import > Logic Projects. • Click All Files in the Browser. 2. Locate and select the project from which you want to import data. • If using the Import dialog, the Import button becomes active. • If using the Browser pane, an Import button appears at the bottom-right corner of the pane. 3. Click the Import button, or double-click the project file. The All Files Browser updates to show a Track Import view.
4. Select the data that you want to import by selecting the relevant checkboxes. You can filter which tracks or channel strip types are displayed using the buttons above the Track Import table. • Num(ber): Shows the track number. No number is displayed for channel strips that do not appear in the Tracks area. Folder tracks are also displayed with an entry such as 3-1, where 3 is the track number and 1 is the folder number. You can double-click a folder track to reveal its contents at the next level.
Import settings from another project 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose File > Project Settings > Import Project Settings (or use the corresponding key command, default: Option-Command-I). • Click All Files in the Browser. 2. Locate and select the project from which you want to import settings, then click Import. Note: If accessing the settings from the Browser pane, you also need to click the Import Project Settings button, which appears after you click the Import button. 3.
Close Logic Pro projects You can close the active project when you want to stop working on it. Close the currently active project • In Logic Pro, choose File > Close Project (or press Option-Command-W). If you have made any changes since the last Save operation, Logic Pro prompts you to save the project before closing. Important: The Close Project without Saving key command closes the currently active project without saving it—and you will not be asked to do so.
Open the Project Information window • In Logic Pro, use the Project Information key command. The Project Information key command has no default assignment. For details about assigning a key command, see Assign key commands in Logic Pro. Reconfigure project memory • In Logic Pro, click the Reorganize Memory button in the Project Information window. When you reorganize memory, the current project is checked for any signs of damage, structural problems, and unused blocks.
Work with tracks Logic Pro Tracks overview Tracks help you organize and control the sound of the recordings and other material in a project. You record and arrange audio and MIDI regions on tracks in the Tracks area. Each track is assigned to a channel strip in the Mixer. When you create a track, you choose the track type, format, and output. You can also choose a patch, which controls the sound of the track, and modify the sound of a patch using Smart Controls.
Each track has a track header located to the left of the track, which shows the track’s name and icon. Track headers also contain controls that you can use to mute, solo, and adjust the volume level and pan position of the track, and control the track in other ways. You can use Track Stacks to organize projects with high track counts, and simplify the creation of audio subgroups for related tracks. There are several different types of Track Stacks, designed for different situations.
1. Choose the audio output and output channel (or channels) from the Output pop-up menus. Tip: Below the Output pop-up menu, a line of text shows the current output device. To change the output device, click the arrow next to the text, then change the device in the Audio preferences pane. 2. Do any of the following: • To set the number of multi-timbral parts for software instrument tracks: Select the Multi-timbral checkbox, then enter the number of multi-timbral or layer parts.
The new track appears in the Tracks area. If the Open Library checkbox is selected, the Library opens so you can choose a patch for the track. For information about choosing patches, see Choose patches in the Logic Pro Library. Create a track below the selected track 1. In Logic Pro, control-click the track header. 2. Choose a track type from the shortcut menu. A new track of the chosen type, with default settings, is created below the selected track. Create a track below all existing tracks 1.
Create tracks using drag and drop in Logic Pro You can quickly create a new track by dragging one or more audio files, regions, or Apple Loops to the area below all existing tracks in the Tracks area. When you drag an audio file to the area below existing tracks, an audio track is created; when you drag a region or an Apple Loop, a track of the corresponding type (audio, software instrument, or Drummer) is created.
Create a track with an Alchemy plug-in (single files only) Dragging content to one of the available Alchemy zones creates a software instrument track with an Alchemy instrument plug-in using the synthesis type you choose: Additive, Granular, or Spectral. See the Alchemy chapter in Logic Pro Instruments.
2. When the “Create New Track using” dialog appears, drag the item to one of the available zones to choose the type of instrument plug-in used on the track. Add a track by dragging multiple files, regions, or loops to the track header area 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag multiple audio files, regions, or Apple Loops to the area below the track headers. • Hold down the Command key and drag multiple audio files, regions, or Apple Loops between two existing track headers. 2.
Create tracks using existing channel strips in Logic Pro When you create a new track using the New Tracks dialog, a new channel strip for the track is also created. In some situations, however, you may want to create tracks that use existing channel strips. For example, when using a Sampler instrument with a drum kit loaded, you may want to send multiple tracks, with MIDI regions that trigger individual drum sounds, to the channel strip on which the Sampler instrument is inserted.
Create a new track for overlapped regions • In Logic Pro, select the regions, then choose Track > Other > New Track For Overlapped Regions. New tracks are created for wholly or partly overlapped regions, which are redistributed across the newly created tracks. A new track is created for each overlap. All tracks use the same channel strip as the original track. In other words, only one channel strip is used for all tracks.
Globally reassign multiple tracks that share the same channel strip • In Logic Pro, press and hold Option when reassigning a track channel strip, then confirm the action by clicking the Reassign All Tracks button. The new channel strip will be used for every track that shared the original channel strip in the current project (including tracks in folders).
Change the focused track in a multiple selection When multiple tracks are selected, only one can have focus. You can change the focused track while keeping the multiple selection using the track numbers. • In Logic Pro, with multiple tracks selected, click the track number (to the left of the track header) for the track you want to have focus. Deselect all selected tracks • In Logic Pro, select any unselected track.
Change track icons in a Logic Pro project By default, tracks use the same icon as the patch chosen for the track. You can change a track’s icon at any time. Change the icon for a track In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Control-click the icon in the track header, then choose a new icon from the shortcut menu. • Select the track, click the track icon in the Track inspector, then choose a new icon from the Icon pop-up menu.
Change track colors in a Logic Pro project By default, track colors reflect the track type. You can change the color of specific tracks, to use color to help visually organize the Tracks area and identify tracks in a large arrangement. Track colors are visible when you configure track header components to show the track color bars. Changing the color of a track also changes the color of the corresponding channel strip in the Mixer.
Zoom tracks in Logic Pro In the Tracks area, tracks can be zoomed using the Tracks area zoom controls (and Waveform Zoom slider) and also zoomed independently. When a window is first opened, there is a default zoom setting that provides a compromise between optimal visibility and working space in the Tracks area. Zoom a track 1. In Logic Pro, move the pointer to the bottom-left corner of a track. The pointer changes to a pair of up- and down-pointing arrows. 2. Drag vertically.
Zoom tracks using key commands In Logic Pro, use any of the following key commands: • Individual Track Zoom In and Individual Track Zoom Out: Increases or decreases the “individual track zoom” factor of the selected track by one. • Toggle Individual Track Zoom: Switches the selected track between its individual zoom level and the window zoom level. This option is useful for zooming in on a track to edit its automation data.
• The Drum Replacement/Doubling dialog opens. 3. In the Drum Replacement/Doubling dialog, set the following parameters: Logic Pro User Guide • Instrument pop-up menu: Choose the drum sound you want to replace or double (Kick, Snare, Tom, or other). • Mode buttons: Choose one of the following modes: • Replacement: The new sound replaces the original, and all regions on the original track are muted. • Doubling: The new sound is added to the original (the original sound is not muted).
You may want to set the playhead or activate the cycle area to preview a part of the project requiring special attention for drum replacement. Click Preview again to stop playback, return the playhead to the previous play position, and unsolo the two tracks. • Trigger Note pop-up menu: Set the pitch of the trigger notes created on the software instrument track.
Show or hide track header components 1. In Logic Pro, control-click the track header. 2. Choose Track Header Components from the shortcut menu, then select or deselect items from the submenu. Selected items are indicated with a checkmark. Configure track header components 1. In Logic Pro, open the Track Header Configuration popover by doing one of the following: • Choose Track > Configure Track Header (or use the corresponding key command).
Horizontally resize all track headers 1. In Logic Pro, position the pointer over the line dividing the track headers from the left edge of the tracks. The pointer changes to a Resize pointer. 2. Drag the line left or right to resize the track headers. Mute tracks in a Logic Pro project You can silence, or mute, a track so that you don’t hear it when you play the project.
Solo tracks in a Logic Pro project You can solo a track, silencing all tracks that are not also soloed. Soloing tracks is useful when you want to work on a track individually, or work on a few tracks, without hearing the other tracks in the project. The first time any track in a project is soloed, a large Clear/Recall Solo button appears in the area above the track headers. You can quickly unsolo or resolo all soloed tracks using this button.
The level meter in a track’s Volume slider shows the output volume for the track as the project plays. You can watch the level meter as you record to the track to see if clipping occurs on the track. Set track pan positions in a Logic Pro project The Pan/Balance (pan is short for panorama) knob controls whether a track is heard from the left, right, or center of the stereo field. You can set the pan or balance position for each track in a project.
Enable tracks for recording in Logic Pro You enable (arm) a track for recording using the Record Enable button in the track’s header. Similar to corresponding buttons on a hardware multitrack recorder, Record Enable buttons have multiple states: • For audio tracks: Off (gray), Armed (blinking red), Recording (solid red). For the focused track, the letter “R” in its Record Enable button turns red to indicate that it will be enabled together with the Record function.
Turn on input monitoring for an audio track • In Logic Pro, click the Input Monitoring button (with the “I” icon) in the track header. Click the Input Monitoring button again to turn off input monitoring for the track. Note: Input monitoring always involves some latency. The amount of latency depends on the audio hardware and the driver settings. In certain configurations, it may be best not to turn on input monitoring, to obtain the best possible timing.
Add a track alternative • In a Logic Pro track header, click the Track Alternatives button from the shortcut menu. , then choose New A new, empty track alternative is added. The track name changes to show the name of the new alternative. By default only the active track alternative is visible. Note: Any regions on the track when you create a new alternative are saved to the previous alternative.
Make a track alternative active • In Logic Pro, click the upward-pointing arrow in the track header for the inactive alternative. The alternative will be exchanged with the active alternative (which becomes inactive). Move or copy regions to the active alternative using key commands 1. In Logic Pro, select the regions you want to move or copy (on any inactive alternative). 2. Do one of the following: • To move regions to the active alternative: Use the Move Selected Regions to Selected Track key command.
Make plug-ins inactive on a track • In Logic Pro, hold down Option and click the On/Off button in the track header. If the On/Off button is not visible, you can show it or configure track header components. To reactivate plug-ins on the track, Option-click the On/Off button again. When a Software Instrument track is turned off, all MIDI regions on the track are silenced, but live input (playing) is still audible. Protect tracks in Logic Pro You can protect a track to prevent accidental changes.
Freeze tracks in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can freeze a track, reducing the processing power needed to play the track. Freezing a track reduces its processor usage to that of a high-resolution audio track with no effects plugins, regardless of the number or complexity of the plug-ins actually used on the track. Freezing is particularly useful for software instrument tracks and for audio tracks that use complex effects.
Hide tracks in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can hide tracks in the Tracks area. This is useful when you’re working on projects using a large number of tracks, for example. Hiding a track has no effect on playback, only the appearance of the Tracks area. You can hide and unhide tracks using the menu commands in the Track menu (Hide Track, Unhide All Tracks, and Show Hidden Tracks), or using key commands.
Delete tracks in a Logic Pro project You can delete a track to remove it from the project. When you delete a track, all regions on the track are deleted. Delete a track • In Logic Pro, Control-click the track header, then choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu.
For Track Stacks, the patches available in the Library vary, depending on the Track Stack type, and which track in the Track Stack is selected. For more information, see Track Stacks and the Logic Pro Library. Note: You can also choose presets, channel strip settings, and other items in the Library. If you have saved channel strip settings from a previous version of Logic Pro, they appear along with patches when the corresponding track type is selected.
2. Choose a patch category from the list on the left, then choose a patch from the list on the right. You can quickly move through the patches in the list using the Up and Down Arrow keys. After you select a new patch, you can start playing it immediately. When you choose a patch, the left inspector channel strip shows the patch name, along with the instrument (for software instrument patches) and effects plug-ins the patch uses.
Merge patch settings in the Logic Pro Library You can merge patch settings from another patch with the current patch. This has several uses: for example, you can merge effects with a patch while keeping the existing instrument, or conversely try out different instruments while preserving the existing effects setup. The patch merging area contains buttons for four types of patch settings: MIDI effects, instruments, audio effects, and sends.
Save custom patches in a Logic Pro project You can save a patch’s settings in the Library and apply the settings to other instruments, or use them in another project. You can delete a patch you have saved from the Library if you no longer want to use it. You can’t delete the sounds included with Logic Pro. Save a custom patch 1. In Logic Pro, select the track you want to use as a starting point for the custom patch. 2.
Performance patches can also exhibit interesting characteristics that differ when playing live and when playing back a region. When you play a note live on the keyboard, the sample is played from the sample anchor—a marker that represents the musical focus of the sample, or the position that should land on a beat. When you play back recorded MIDI events, however, the full sample is played, even if it starts before the note on event.
Use the Bongos and Bongos Stick performance patches Bongos and Bongos Stick: Velocity splits are used to emulate different playing styles, such as fingertips, open palm, or thumbstrikes.
Use the Cajon performance patch Cajon: Velocity splits are used to emulate different playing styles, such as open palm or fingertips. There is no performance key mapping in this instrument.
Use the Claps and Snaps performance patch Claps & Snaps: Velocity splits are used to emulate different articulations, such as group size and timing. There is no performance key mapping in this instrument.
Use the Congas and Congas Bright performance patches Congas and Congas Bright: The performance key uses velocity splits to access three articulations. If you play the key at low velocity, the Conga Mute articulation is triggered. Moderate velocity triggers the Conga Open articulation, and high velocity triggers the Conga Slap articulation.
Use the Shakers 1 and Shakers 2 performance patches Shakers 1 and 2: The performance key triggers different shaker speed articulations based on velocity. In addition, pressing and releasing the performance key triggers different shaker forward and backward articulations, emulating the movement of real shaker players.
Use the Tambourines performance patch Tambourines: The Tambourines performance triggers different articulations, such as shake speed variations at different velocities. It also offers different movement articulations (forward/backward) for note on/off triggers.
Use the Timbales performance patch Timbales: Velocity splits are used to emulate different playing styles, such as stick strokes, rim shots, and rolls.
Work with Track Stacks Logic Pro Track Stacks overview Track Stacks provide a convenient way to organize and control tracks, to manage projects with high track counts, and to create and manage audio subgroups. You can create a Track Stack from a group of existing tracks, and use the controls on the master track to control all the subtracks in the Track Stack. There are two types of Track Stacks: folder stacks and summing stacks. Both types have a main track and one or more subtracks.
Summing stacks Summing stacks let you combine multiple tracks and route their output to an audio subgroup. When you create a summing stack, the outputs from the subtracks are routed to a bus. The destination aux of the bus is assigned to the main track. When the main track is selected, you can mute, solo, and adjust volume and send levels for the summing stack, and add and edit plug-ins, affecting the sound of all the subtracks in the summing stack. This is similar to the way an audio group works.
After you create a summing stack, you can route individual subtracks to different destinations. In the Bus submenu of the Send pop-up menu on subtracks, local busses are sorted into stack submenus. Note that if you route subtracks to a destination “outside” of the stack, those subtracks are no longer affected by the controls on the main track. Audio subgroups you create are saved as part of the summing stack, and their auxes appear as the last (bottom) subtracks in the summing stack.
Show or hide the subtracks for a Track Stack • In Logic Pro, click the disclosure triangle to the left of the track icon in the main track. To show or hide the subtracks for all track stacks in a project, Option-click the disclosure triangle for any track stack in the project. Add a track to a Track Stack • In Logic Pro, drag the header of the track you want to add between two of the subtracks in the Track Stack.
Track Stacks and the Logic Pro Library The patches available in the Library vary depending on the Track Stack type, and which track in the Track Stack is selected: • When the main track of a folder stack is selected, no patches are available in the Library, and patches can’t be saved. • When the main track of a summing stack is selected, patches of all underlying channel strip types (software instrument, audio) are available in the Library.
Match other tracks to the groove track • In Logic Pro, select the Match Groove Track checkbox on the left side of each track’s header. To prevent a track from matching the groove track, deselect the Match Groove Track checkbox. Turn off the groove track • In Logic Pro, click the star in the header of the current groove track. Note: If a project contains Apple Loops, the original loop follows the groove track, but loop repetitions do not follow the groove track.
Manage articulations in the Logic Pro Editors If articulations have been recorded along with notes and events in a region, an Articulation pop-up menu becomes available in the Piano Roll Editor. You can also select all notes that use the same articulation and choose articulations via the shortcut menu. Finally, you can color notes by articulation as well. Other MIDI Editors, such as the Event List and Score Editor, also allow you to view and edit articulations.
You can also view and change articulations using the Keyswitches view of the Smart Controls pane. In addition to getting a graphic view of the assigned keyswitches, you can use this view to enable or disable keyswitches, and change the octave and key where keyswitches are located. Choose an articulation from the plug-in window header • In Logic Pro, click the Articulation pop-up menu in the plug-in header and choose from the available articulations.
Use the Articulation Set Editor in Logic Pro The Articulation Set Editor can be used to create sophisticated key switch and controller switch definitions, and define output transformations, which enables compatibility with third party sample libraries. You can also use the Articulation Set Editor to create Articulation Sets for instruments that have assigned Articulation IDs to sample groups, but do not have pre-configured articulations.
The Switches pane The Switches pane is where you create and customize keyswitches and controller switch assignments for each articulation. You can determine the type of MIDI message to use for switches, what values within that MIDI message to use, and you can specify the articulation behavior when the switch is triggered. It includes the following controls: • MIDI Remote button: This button has to be active for your articulation switches to respond to the defined MIDI messages.
Logic Pro User Guide • Selector pop-up menu: Determines which specific value of the MIDI message chosen in the Type column triggers the articulation. For example, if you chose Note On in the Type column, here is where you would choose the specific note for the keyswitch. If you chose Controller in the Type column, you would choose the specific controller number. If you choose Program, Aftertouch, or Pitch Bend in the Type column, there will be no Selector value.
• Toggle (Trigger): Immediately applies the newly selected articulation to the currently playing note. As soon as the switch is disengaged all notes are stopped. This is useful to trigger falls, doits, and so on, at the end of a musical phrase. • Articulation pop-up menu: Choose from among the available articulations. You can use the same articulation multiple times, each triggered by a different status or selector, and with different value ranges.
• Selector pop-up menu: Determines which specific value of the MIDI message chosen in the Type column triggers the articulation. For example, if you chose Note On in the Type column, here is where you would choose the specific note for the keyswitch. If you chose Controller in the Type column, you would choose the specific controller number. • Value Start slider: Defines the low end of the range for the controller switches.
• Both save CPU power by rendering all effects (or instrument) plug-ins of a track. • Freeze allows you to return to the original state of the tracks and their automation data, unlike Bounce in Place. • Freeze (in 32 Bit Float) safeguards against volume clipping. Bounce a track in place in a Logic Pro project You can render one or more selected audio, software instrument, or Drummer tracks (including active plug-ins and automation on the tracks) to a new audio file.
• • Normalize pop-up menu: Choose between three states of normalization: • Off: Turns off normalization. • Overload Protection Only: Allows downward normalization in case of overloads— levels above 0 dB, which would lead to clipping—but no normalization in case of lower levels. • On: Allows full bidirectional normalization. Restore Defaults button: Click to set all parameters in the dialog to their default settings. 4. Click OK to trigger an in-place bounce of the selected track or tracks.
Bounce a region in place in a Logic Pro project You can render one or more selected regions on audio or software instrument tracks into an audio file, including all active plug-ins and automation data. Bounce one or more regions in place 1. In Logic Pro, select one or more regions on an audio or software instrument track. 2. Do one of the following: • Choose File > Bounce > Regions in Place (or use the corresponding key command).
• Add Effects Tail to File checkbox: Select to continue the bounce process after the end of the bounce range—either to the end of the cycle or to the end of the last selected region—until there is no longer a signal. Otherwise, only the bounce range is bounced. • Add Effects Tail to Region checkbox: Select to include the entire bounce file in the bounce region. Otherwise, the bounce region only includes the bounce range.
Apply effect plug-ins to regions or a marquee selection 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select one or more audio regions in the Tracks area or the Audio Track Editor. • Make a marquee selection in the Tracks area or the Audio Track Editor. 2. Do one of the following: • Choose Functions > Selection-Based Processing from the Tracks area or Audio Track Editor menu bar (or use the Show/Hide Selection-Based Processing key command).
• To create a new take containing an audio file with the changes: Select the Create New Take checkbox. • To extend the length of the created file to include any instrument release and potential effect tail: Select the Add Effect Tail checkbox. • To set the gain compensation for the selection: Choose a setting from the Gain popup menu. • • No Change: No gain change is applied to the signal.
Export tracks and regions Export tracks as audio files in Logic Pro You can export one or more selected tracks as audio files, or export all tracks (all audio, software instrument, and Drummer tracks) in a project as audio files—one file per track. When you export tracks as audio files, you can specify the naming of the audio files using filename elements. Export selected tracks as an audio file 1. In Logic Pro, select the track to export, then choose File > Export > Track as Audio File. 2.
6. To specify the filename pattern: Drag one or more elements to the Pattern field in the order you want them to have in the filenames. To add a custom name, drag the Custom element to the Pattern field, then type in the Custom field. An example filename appears below the elements. 7. Browse to a location to save the exported file or files. 8. Click Save. Export all tracks as audio files 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Export > All Tracks as Audio Files. 2.
To add a custom name, drag the Custom element to the Pattern field, then type in the Custom field. An example filename appears below the elements. 7. Browse to a location to save the exported file or files. 8. Click Save. Export regions as audio files in Logic Pro You can export audio or MIDI regions as audio files to reuse in Logic Pro or use with another audio app. When you export regions as audio files, you can specify the file naming of the audio files using filename elements.
• Bypass Effect Plug-ins: Select to disable all plug-ins on the source track. • Include Audio Tail: Select to extend the length of the created file to include any instrument release and potential effect tail (reverb, delay, and so on). • Include Volume/Pan Automation: Select to have volume and pan automation performed on export, with their result influencing the created file. Otherwise, the volume and pan automation is simply copied, but not performed.
Export MIDI regions as MIDI files in Logic Pro You can export one or more MIDI regions as standard MIDI files, to play in another music app. If your project contains only MIDI regions, you can merge the regions and export the entire project as a MIDI file. Before exporting, you need to perform several steps to prepare the MIDI regions. Because Standard MIDI file type 0 format files can only save a single MIDI region, you must also join MIDI regions you want to export as a MIDI file in file format 0.
Edit Logic Pro track parameters Each track has a set of parameters. The parameters available depend on the track type (some parameters are common to all track types, while some are specific to audio tracks or software instrument tracks only). You can view and edit parameters for the selected track in the Track inspector, located below the Region and Event inspectors.
Logic Pro User Guide • Staff Style pop-up menu (software instrument tracks only): Choose the default staff style for the track. • Articulation Set pop-up menu (software instrument tracks only): Choose an articulation set, or edit the current set. For more information about articulation sets, see Use the Articulation Set Editor in Logic Pro.
Record your voice or a musical instrument Overview of recording in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, you have many powerful recording options for recording voices, electric instruments, acoustic instruments, and software instruments. When recording either audio or MIDI, you can choose to record one track at a time, record multiple tracks at once (called multitrack recording), replace audio or MIDI recordings, or record multiple performances over the same section of a track, called take recording.
• Set the project bit depth, which is the number of digital bits each sample contains. Recording at a bit depth of 24 bits is recommended for most situations and is the default setting. • Add an audio track, which is used to record a voice, an acoustic instrument, or any other sound from a microphone. • Set the metronome, which plays a steady beat so you can play and record in time, or as a count-in before recording starts.
5. Start singing or play your instrument. The recording appears as a new audio region on the track as you record. 6. Click the Stop button in the control bar (or press the Space bar) to stop recording. You can view the newly recorded audio region in the Project Audio Browser when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. Record multiple audio takes in Logic Pro When you’re recording, you can record multiple versions, or takes, of a phrase or section in quick succession.
The cycle area appears as a yellow strip in the ruler, and Cycle mode is automatically turned on. 3. Set the metronome for recording, if desired. 4. Click the Record button in the control bar (or press R) to start recording. Recording starts automatically at the beginning of the defined cycle area. Record as many cycle passes as you wish. After the second cycle pass, a take folder is created on the track. Each subsequent cycle pass is added to the take folder. 5.
Record to multiple audio tracks in Logic Pro If you don’t want to use takes folders, you can choose to record multiple audio versions to new tracks. You can also record to more than one audio track at a time, allowing you to record several instruments at once—placing each instrument on a separate track, for example. Record multiple audio versions to new tracks 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Record > Overlapping Audio Recordings > Cycle > Create New Track.
A new audio region appears on each of the record-enabled tracks. 8. Click the Stop button in the control bar (or press the Space bar) to stop recording. Punch in and out of audio recordings in Logic Pro Punch recording is a technique you can use to overwrite a portion of a previously recorded track, during playback, without touching any of the recording before or after that portion. You punch in to interrupt playback and make the recording, then punch out to return to playback mode.
When it comes to judging punch-in and punch-out points during punch recording, you should turn on auto input monitoring (which it is, by default). This setting allows you to hear the input signal only during the actual recording; before and afterward you’ll hear the previously recorded audio on the track. If auto input monitoring is turned off, you can always hear the input signal.
2. Set the autopunch area by doing one of the following: • Drag the Punch In and Punch Out locators in the ruler. • Drag vertically in the autopunch locator fields in the control bar. • Drag the cycle area into the autopunch area to quickly match the autopunch area to the cycle range. 3. Place the playhead at any position before the punch-in point. 4. Click the Record button 5. Click the Stop button in the control bar (or press R) to start recording.
5. Click the Record button in the control bar (or press R) to start recording. 6. Start singing or play your instrument. 7. Click the Stop button in the control bar (or press the Space bar) to stop recording. A new audio region is created on top of the existing one. The original recording is replaced with the new recording. Delete audio recordings in Logic Pro You can delete an audio region that was recorded before or since the current project session was opened.
Add a software instrument track and choose a patch 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Track > New Instrument Track. (If you use this method, you can skip steps 2 and 3.) • Choose Track > New Tracks. • Click the Add Tracks button above the track headers. 2. In the New Tracks dialog, select Software Instrument & MIDI, and make sure that An Instrument Plug-in is chosen as the input source from the Input pop-up menu.
3. Play the software instrument using the keys on your computer keyboard. Use the other keys shown in the window to perform the following actions: • Press Z or X to move down or up by octaves. • Press C or V to lower or raise the velocity. • Press 4 through 8 to change the modulation (mod wheel) value, or 3 to turn off modulation. • Press 1 or 2 to bend the pitch down or up. The pitch is bent for as long as you press the key. • Press Tab to turn sustain on or off (similar to using a sustain pedal).
4. To change the range of the onscreen keyboard, do one of the following: • Drag the blue rectangle in the overview over the range you want to play. • Click an area of the overview outside the blue rectangle to move it to where you clicked. • Click one of the small triangles to the left and right of the keys. Clicking the left triangle lowers the range by an octave, and clicking the right triangle raises the range by an octave. Play a software instrument using the Touch Bar 1.
The recording appears as a new MIDI region on the track as you record. 6. Click the Stop button in the control bar (or press the Space bar) to stop recording. Record additional software instrument takes in Logic Pro You can record multiple versions, or takes, in quick succession. Later, you can preview the take recordings and choose which one you want to use in the project. Recording multiple MIDI takes is possible only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane.
Overdub software instrument recordings in Logic Pro Overdubbing is the process of recording a performance on top of an existing performance, merging them into a single region. You can use this process to add a supplementary recorded sound to a previously recorded performance, for example. You can also use spot erase to remove any unwanted notes from a recorded performance. Overdub a software instrument recording 1. In Logic Pro, select a MIDI region. 2. Click the Set Locators button in the toolbar.
Use Note Repeat in Logic Pro It’s possible to transform incoming MIDI notes into a repeated MIDI note of the same pitch, as long as the key is held down. You can define parameters such as repetition rate, velocity, and gate length, as well as assign MIDI controllers for controlling these parameters. Transform incoming MIDI notes 1. In Logic Pro, click the Note Repeat button in the toolbar (or use the corresponding key command). 2.
4. Select the Key Remote checkbox in the lower-left area of the dialog to display the keyboard, then use the keys to define the rate and gate time settings. The Note Repeat and Spot Erase keys have On/Off buttons, which offer the following functions: • When turned off (default), Note Repeat or Spot Erase is always active as long as the respective window is open. • When turned on, Note Repeat or Spot Erase is active only as long as the respective remote key is held down.
Record to multiple software instrument tracks successively In Logic Pro: • • To continue playing previous tracks while recording, do one of the following: • Choose Record > Overlapping MIDI Recordings > Cycle Mode On > Create Tracks. • Choose File > Project Settings > Recording, then choose Cycle > Create Tracks from the Overlapping MIDI Recordings pop-up menu.
Record over an existing MIDI region 1. In Logic Pro, click the Replace button in the control bar. 2. Drag left or right in the top part of the ruler. The cycle area appears as a yellow strip in the ruler, and Cycle mode is automatically turned on. 3. Click the Record button in the control bar (or press R) to start recording. Recording starts automatically at the beginning of the defined cycle area. 4. Use your MIDI keyboard, Musical Typing window, or onscreen music keyboard to play some notes.
3. In the Track Inspector for each track, choose a unique MIDI channel using the MIDI Channel pop-up menu that matches the MIDI output channel for the MIDI input device sending to that specific track. For more information about track parameters see Edit Logic Pro track parameters. 4. Move the playhead to the point in the ruler where you want to start recording. 5. See Use the metronome in Logic Pro if you wish to use the metronome during recording. 6.
Record multiple MIDI input devices and audio simultaneously You can record multiple MIDI input devices simultaneously, each device representing a unique performance and triggering different sounds, on multiple software instrument tracks at the same time you record multiple audio sources. You need to configure each MIDI input device that you are recording to transmit on a unique MIDI channel. Consult the documentation of your MIDI input device for information on how to change its MIDI output channel.
Insert notes using musical typing 1. In Logic Pro, choose Window > Show Musical Typing. The Musical Typing window appears, showing the layout of keys used for playing notes and changing controller information. 2. Select the software instrument track you want to play. 3. Play the software instrument using the keys on your computer keyboard. Use the other keys shown in the window to perform the following actions: • To move down or up by octaves: Press Z or X. • To lower or raise the velocity: Press C or V.
• To insert multiple notes at different pitches at the same time: Click the Chord button. The notes are “stacked” at the same position, resulting in a chord. The playhead doesn’t advance until the Chord button is clicked again (turned off). Chord mode prevents the playhead from moving after the insertion of a note, allowing you to insert as many notes as you like at the same bar position.
Set conditions for the metronome click • In Logic Pro, click-hold the Metronome button in the control bar. To limit the metronome to only click when you toggle the metronome on, choose Simple Mode. With this mode selected, the other metronome settings in the pop-up menu are unavailable. If you want the metronome to click during recording whether or not the metronome is toggled on or off, choose Click While Recording.
Advanced recording techniques Advanced recording commands in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can use several advanced commands to speed up the recording process: • Record/Record Toggle: Use to stop recording but to continue playback. Use it again to resume recording from the playhead position. • Record/Record Repeat: Use to delete the recording, move the playhead back to the recording start position, and start recording again.
• Click the Toolbar button Colors button. in the control bar to show the toolbar, then click the 3. Choose a color. Color an audio take automatically while recording 1. In Logic Pro, open the Recording project settings by doing one of the following: • Choose File > Project Settings > Recording. • Control-click the Record button Settings from the shortcut menu. in the control bar, then choose Recording 2. Select the Auto-Colorize Takes checkbox.
Capture most recent MIDI performance in Logic Pro It’s possible to capture your most recent MIDI performance, even if Logic Pro isn’t recording using the Capture Recording feature. You can use Capture Recording whether in playback mode or stopped. When Cycle mode is off, Capture Recording creates a region containing all the MIDI events received during playback.
Comp your audio recordings Overview of comping in Logic Pro Comping is only possible when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. Imagine a scenario in which you have recorded multiple performances of a vocal solo over the same section of a project. You can select the best parts from the different performances and piece them together into a single master take.
Preview take recordings in Logic Pro In order to create and edit comps, you first need to preview the take recordings in a take folder. The simplest way to preview take recordings is to open the take folder. You can then select the individual takes for playback. You can also select and preview takes in a closed take folder. Open a take folder and preview the takes 1.
Preview takes in a closed take folder • In Logic Pro, during playback, choose a take from the Take Folder pop-up menu. You can also use the following key commands to step through take recordings in an open or closed take folder: • Select Previous Take or Comp: Moves back through the takes or comps as listed in the take folder’s pop-up menu. • Select Next Take or Comp: Moves forward through the takes or comps as listed in the take folder’s pop-up menu.
• Click the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder, and make sure Quick Swipe Comping is chosen. 2. Drag across take sections with the Pointer or Pencil tool. Selecting a section in one take automatically deselects the same section in another take. The comp sections, located in the top lane of the take folder, reflect the combined selections from all takes. The vertical lines in the comp overview indicate the transitions between the different take sections.
Save the current comp • In Logic Pro, choose Duplicate Comp from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upperleft corner of the take folder. The current comp is saved, and added to the list of comps in the pop-up menu. Create a comp from the current take • In Logic Pro, choose Create New Comp from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upperleft corner of the take folder. The current take is saved as a new comp named Comp X: Comp X, and is added to the list of comps in the pop-up menu.
Edit sections of different take regions In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • To extend a take section: Place the pointer over the start or end point of a take selection, then drag. Extending a take selection (dragging the start point to the left or the end point to the right) shortens adjacent selections on other takes. Shortening a take selection (dragging the start point to the right or the end point to the left) extends adjacent selections on other takes.
Move a selected area to the left or right • In Logic Pro, place the pointer over the center area of a take selection, then drag when the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow. This action moves the selection, while at the same time extending or shortening any adjacent take selections. Note: If you have enabled Quick Swipe / Take Edit click zones in Preferences > General > Editing, make sure you place the pointer over the bottom half of the take region.
Remove a take selection from the comp • In Logic Pro, Shift-click the take selection. Remove an entire take from the comp • In Logic Pro, Shift-click the take’s header area. If the take doesn’t contain any selections, all unselected areas in other takes are selected in the take you click.
Rename takes and comps in Logic Pro You can rename both takes and comps. Rename a take 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to rename from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose Rename Take from the same pop-up menu. 3. Enter the new name in the dialog that appears, then click OK. You can also click a take with the Text tool, then enter a new name in the text field that appears. Rename a comp 1.
Delete takes and comps You can delete takes and comps from take folders at any time. When deleted, they no longer appear in the take folder’s list of takes and comps. Any comp selections using deleted takes are also removed. Delete a take 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to delete from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Delete the take by doing one of the following: • Choose Delete Take from the Take Folder pop-up menu.
Delete all but the currently active comp 1. In Logic Pro, choose the comp you want to keep from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose Delete all other Comps from the Take Folder pop-up menu. All comps, with the exception of the currently active comp, are deleted. (This command is available only when a take folder contains more than one comp and when a comp is active.
Edit a take region’s start or end point when bordered by another take region • In Logic Pro, place the pointer over the top-left or top-right edge of the take region, then drag when you see the Junction pointer. Extending a take region (dragging the start point to the left or the end point to the right) automatically shortens the adjacent take region. Shortening a take region (dragging the start point to the right or the end point to the left) automatically extends the adjacent take regions.
Cut multiple take folders • In Logic Pro, select multiple take folders, then click any one of them with the Scissors tool. The take folders are cut at the clicked position and all takes inside the take folders are also cut at the same position. As a result, your track lanes contain multiple take folders and your take lanes contain multiple take regions, all of which can be edited independently. Cut a take region • In Logic Pro, click the take region using the Scissors tool.
Slice a take region at comp section borders • In Logic Pro, control-click the take region, then choose Slice at Comp Section Borders from the shortcut menu. Trim a take region to active comp sections • In Logic Pro, control-click the take region, then choose Trim to Active Comp Sections from the shortcut menu. Move take folders and take regions in Logic Pro You can move take folders and take regions—within the same take lane, between take lanes, and to other tracks.
Move a take folder or take region within its own lane • In Logic Pro, drag the take folder or take region to the new position. Move take regions between take lanes • In Logic Pro, drag the take region to another take lane. Empty take lanes are automatically removed. Create a new take lane for a take region • In Logic Pro, drag the take region onto the take folder, at a position where it overlaps with a take region in the currently active take.
Export an active comp to a new track 1. In Logic Pro, choose the comp you want to export from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose “Export active Comp to New Track” from the Take Folder pop-up menu. The active comp is copied to a new track, which is created below the take folder track. The content of the original take folder remains intact.
Move takes and comps in Logic Pro You can move an active take or comp from a take folder to a new track, which removes the take or comp from the original take folder. Move an active take to a new track 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to move from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose Move active Take to New Track from the Take Folder pop-up menu. The active take is moved to a new track, which is created below the take folder track.
Move an active comp to a new track 1. In Logic Pro, choose the comp you want to move from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose Move active Comp to New Track from the Take Folder pop-up menu. The active comp is moved to a new track, which is created below the take folder track. This comp is no longer available in the original take folder.
Flatten a take folder 1. In Logic Pro, choose the comp you want to keep from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2. Choose Flatten from the Take Folder pop-up menu. The take folder is replaced with multiple regions that represent the current comp selections. Flatten a take folder and merge the results 1. In Logic Pro, choose the comp you want to keep from the Take Folder pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the take folder. 2.
The take folder is replaced with multiple regions that represent the current comp selections. The new regions are then merged to create a new audio file in the Tracks area. Unpack take folders in Logic Pro You can unpack take folders using the original channel strip for all new tracks, or you can unpack take folders using different channel strips for each new track. Both methods replace the selected take folder—or take folders—with new audio tracks for each take and each comp.
These commands use the original channel strip for all new tracks. All takes and comps, with the exception of the currently active comp, are muted. This ensures that the playback result remains unchanged. Any edits made to one of these tracks are reflected in all others. Unpack a take folder to new tracks In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Control-click the take folder header area, then choose Folder > Unpack Take Folder to New Tracks from the shortcut menu.
These commands use different channel strips for each new track, but automatically assigns the original channel strip setting to all of them. None of the takes or comps is muted. Edits can be made to each of the tracks independently. Unpack a take folder to new track alternatives When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can show and use track alternatives.
All the takes from the folder can be accessed as separate alternatives from the take alternatives menu on the track header. Note: In order to access take alternatives, you must have enabled track alternatives in the track headers. For more information, see Use track alternatives in Logic Pro. Pack regions into take folders in Logic Pro You can select multiple regions and pack them all into a single take folder. Each region appears as an individual take in the resulting take folder.
Use loops and other media files Using loops and other media in Logic Pro Logic Pro comes with a large collection of prerecorded loops, offering a great starting point for many of your projects. You can start composing a song by dragging Apple Loops from the Loop Browser to the Tracks area. Combining existing loops and other media files provides a quick method for laying down project foundations.
• Project Audio Browser: Use to add and remove audio files. • All Files Browser: Use to import files, search for files using advanced search criteria, and import data and settings from other projects. Use Apple Loops in your projects Apple Loops in Logic Pro Apple Loops are prerecorded musical phrases or riffs in the Loop Browser that you can use to easily add drum beats, rhythm parts, and other sounds to a project.
When you add an Apple Loop to a project, a region is created for the loop. When the project plays, the region plays at the project tempo and key. This lets you use several loops together, even if the loops were recorded at different speeds and in different keys. There are four types of Apple Loops: Logic Pro User Guide • Audio loops (blue) are audio recordings. You can add them to audio tracks, and edit them just like other audio regions in the Tracks area and Audio Editor.
• Drummer loops (yellow) contain all the performance information necessary, such as the artist and parameter adjustments, to play a Drummer region. You can change the artist and parameters in the Drummer Editor to change the sound of the loop. You can convert them to software instrument loops by adding them to software instrument tracks, and also convert them to audio loops by adding them to audio tracks.
Open the Loop Browser In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Loop Browser button in the control bar. • Choose View > Show Apple Loops (or press O). Browse for loops In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • Click the Button View button to see the category buttons. Click the category buttons to access the keyword buttons for that category. You can also Shift-click multiple categories for more keyword buttons.
• Click Loop Pack at the top of the Loop Browser, then from the pop-up menu that appears, choose the Loop Pack or folder with the loops you want to view. Clear all keyword selections • In Logic Pro, click the Reset button. Search for loops by name • Logic Pro User Guide In Logic Pro, enter a search term in the search field, then press Return.
Any files that match your search term are displayed in the results list. Filter searches by loop type You can limit search results in the Apple Loops Browser to one or more of the four types of Apple Loop. 1. In Logic Pro, click the Loop Types button. 2. Select one or more loop types to limit the results in the Apple Loops Browser to just those types, or select All Loops to view all loop types.
Play Apple Loops in Logic Pro After searching for loops in the Loop Browser, you can listen to the results to find the loop that sounds best in your project. When you listen to a loop, you can hear it by itself (solo), or play it together with the project. Play a loop 1. In Logic Pro, select a loop in the search results list. The loop plays back in the project’s tempo and key. 2. Drag the Volume slider at the bottom of the Loop Browser to adjust the volume of the loop you’re listening to. 3.
Mirror the selected filter settings in the Logic Remote app The Logic Remote app can mirror the filter settings selected in the Logic Pro Loop Browser. You can also use the Logic Remote app to change the filter settings in the Logic Pro Loop Browser. • In Logic Pro, choose Link Filter Settings to Logic Remote in the Action pop-up menu of the Loop Browser. When you change filter settings in the Logic Pro Loop Browser, this change is reflected in Logic Remote.
Access your favorite Apple Loops in Logic Pro You can specify loops you use frequently as “favorites,” so you can quickly access them in the Loop Browser. This feature is ideal for compiling a collection of Apple Loops that you use regularly. The loops you choose can be replaced or added to easily as your project advances, but the use of favorites may form a great starting point for many of your songs. Specify and access your favorite loops 1.
Choose a different loop in the same family Many Apple Loops are part of a loop “family.” Loops that are part of a family have the same name, but each has a unique number at the end. For example, Classic Rock Guitar 01 and Classic Rock Guitar 02 belong to the same family. Loops in the same family work well together. You can quickly try out different loops in the same family to see which one you like best. 1. In Logic Pro, click the up and down arrows in the upper-left corner of the loop. 2.
If you want the loop you are creating to be part of an existing loop family, give your loop the same name as the rest of the loop family and append the next consecutive number to the end of the name. For example, if you have a loop family consisting of two Apple Loops, Mod Beat 01 and Mod Beat 02, and you want to create your loop as part of that loop family, name the new loop Mod Beat 03. 4.
8. The Tempo field shows the tempo of the Apple Loops to be created. The tempo for the loops is determined by the project tempo and includes any tempo changes that affect the regions being exported. If you wish to change the tempo for the loops, click Cancel and then change the project tempo at the desired position in the timeline. 9. Select an instrument category from the left column of the Instrument Descriptors list, then select an instrument from the right column. 10.
Restrict loops by time signature • In Logic Pro, choose a time signature from the Signature pop-up menu. Restrict loops by loop type • Logic Pro User Guide In Logic Pro, choose All Loops, Audio Loops, Software Instrument Loops, Pattern Loops, or Drummer Loops from the Loop Types pop-up menu.
Sort Loop Browser results • In Logic Pro, click any of the column headers to sort the results by that column type, in ascending or descending order. • Name column: Sorts Apple Loops by name. • Beats column: Sorts Apple Loops by beats. • Favorites column: Sorts Apple Loops by Favorites checkbox selection. • Tempo column: Sorts Apple Loops by tempo. • Key column: Sorts Apple Loops by key.
Add untagged loops to the Loop Browser In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag a loop or folder containing loops into the Loop Browser. A dialog appears, asking whether you want to add the dragged loops into the Untagged Loops folder. After you click Add to Untagged Loops a new folder named Untagged Loops is created in the Audio Music Apps subfolder of the Music folder. • In the All Files Browser, right-click a folder and select Add to Untagged Loops Library from the shortcut menu.
Preview untagged loops at the project tempo 1. In Logic Pro, right-click in the Untagged Loops tab and select Preview > At Project Tempo from the shortcut menu. 2. Click the Play button at the bottom of the Loop Browser to play the loop. 3. Drag the Volume slider at the bottom of the Loop Browser to adjust the volume of the loop you’re listening to. Preview untagged loops at the original tempo 1.
Import media files with the All Files Browser 1. Click the Browsers button in the control bar, then click All Files (or press F). 2. Click the List View button use. or Column View button to choose the view you want to • List view: Shows folders and files in a list, along with details such as name, creation date, size, and type. Double-click a folder to show its contents. • Column view: Shows folders and contents in columns. Select a folder to show its contents. 3.
Import files using File > Import > Other You can import various file types, such as AAF, supported MIDI, XML, and project files, using the File > Import > Other menu command. This is most commonly used to import Groove Templates. For more information on importing Groove Templates into your project see Import groove templates to Logic Pro. 1. In Logic Pro, select File > Import > Other (or use the key command). 2. In the Open File window, navigate to the file you wish to open. 3. Click Import.
View or clear recent search terms in the All Files Browser In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • To view a recent search term: Click the magnifying glass icon at the left side of the search field, then choose a search term from the pop-up menu to display the results. • To clear a search term: Click the small “x” at the right side of the search field.
First pop-up menu Second pop-up menu Additional pop-up menus/fields Format is, is not Pop-up menu, in which you can choose between the following options: AIFF, Apple Loops, WAV (BWF), Apple Lossless, AAC, MP3, CAF, Sound Designer I, Sound Designer II, Logic Project, MIDI File, AAF File, and XML File Note that AIFF format searches do not include Apple Loops.
Bookmarks in the Logic Pro All Files Browser You can bookmark folders that you wish to quickly access in the All Files Browser. This is useful if you have folders with files you like to drag into various projects, or if you have files scattered around your drives but consolidated into specific folders. You can access bookmarked folders by clicking the Bookmark button. Bookmark a folder 1. In Logic Pro, navigate to a folder in the All Files Browser. 2.
Open a bookmark • In Logic Pro, double-click a bookmark in the Bookmark list. Remove a bookmark • In Logic Pro, right-click a bookmark in the Bookmark list and select “Bookmark ” from the shortcut menu. Use the Project Audio Browser The Project Audio Browser in Logic Pro The Project Audio Browser shows all audio files and regions that have been added to or recorded in your project, whether or not they are used in the Tracks area.
Open the Project Audio Browser In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Browsers button in the control bar, then click Project. • Choose View > Show Browsers (or press B), then click Project. Open a separate Project Audio window • In Logic Pro, choose Window > Open Project Audio (or press Command-8). Add and delete audio files in Logic Pro When you add an audio file to your project, Logic Pro automatically creates a region that encompasses the entire file length.
Import a Music Memos file 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Import > Music Memos File. 2. In the Open File dialog, select the Music Memos file that you want to add. A Music Memos file can be one of the three following types: • Audio file: An unchanged, uncompressed idea. • Mixdown: A stereo mix including backing tracks. • GarageBand project: An editable GarageBand project with separate tracks for the idea and each backing instrument. 3.
Create a region from an audio file in the Project Audio Browser In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select an audio file in the Project Audio Browser, then choose Audio File > Add Region. • Select an audio file in the Project Audio Browser, choose Edit > Copy (or press Command-C) in the main menu bar, then choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). The new region appears below the existing regions in the list. Each region is assigned a unique numerical appendix. For example, organ.
• Preview Channel Strip: The Environment’s Preview channel strip is used for playback. You can access the Preview channel strip in the Environment’s Mixer layer. It is located to the right of the highest-numbered audio channel strip. 3. Click the Preview button (or press the Space bar) to start and stop playback. Play a region from a specific position 1. In Logic Pro, click-hold the region’s waveform display. Playback starts at the click point. 2. Release the mouse button to stop playback.
Delete a group of audio files • In Logic Pro, select a group, then choose View > Delete Selected Groups (or press Delete). The audio files of deleted groups reappear at the top of the list in the Project Audio Browser. Rename audio files • In Logic Pro, double-click a filename in the list, enter a name in the Name field, then press Enter. The audio file is renamed in all currently opened projects that use the file. Any backup files on the same disk drive are also renamed.
6. Select the “Change file reference in Project Audio” checkbox to replace the audio file used in the project with the copied file. If unselected, both the copy and original audio file are shown in the Project Audio Browser. 7. Click Save. Convert selected regions into independent audio files 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Audio File > Save Region(s) As from the Project Audio Browser menu bar. • Choose Edit > Convert > Audio Region to New Audio File from the Tracks area menu bar.
Import compressed audio files into Logic Pro You can use the Finder to import compressed audio files of the following file types into a Logic Pro project: • AIFF • WAV • AAC • MP3 • Apple Lossless The compressed audio file is added to the Tracks area, and a region that encompasses the complete audio file is created. Audio regions that point to compressed audio files are denoted by the following symbol: You can edit this region in the same way as a normal audio region in the Tracks area.
Supported media and file formats Media and file formats in Logic Pro Logic Pro allows you to access any digitally stored audio recordings (audio files) on your hard disk, in the most common Mac file formats, as well as several other formats. Audio files imported into a Logic Pro project can be at any supported bit depth and sample rate. Logic Pro supports bit depths of 16, 20, and 24 bits, and sample rates of 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz.
GarageBand projects in Logic Pro You can open a GarageBand project in Logic Pro just as you would open a Logic Pro project. The GarageBand project translates 1:1 into Logic Pro: • Logic Pro automatically creates the required number, and type, of tracks to mirror those used in the GarageBand project. • The project uses the tempo of the GarageBand project. • The initial key signature is set in accordance with the project key of the GarageBand project.
Export a Logic Pro project as a Final Cut Pro XML file 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Export > Project to Final Cut Pro XML. 2. In the Export Project to Final Cut Pro XML dialog, do the following: • Enter a name for the export file in the Save As field. • Select the Export as Final Cut Compound Clip checkbox if you want to export the project as a compound clip. • Select the “Include video in export” checkbox if you want to include the movie (if one exists) in the XML file. 3. Click Save.
Open a MIDI file 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Open (or use the corresponding key command), then select a MIDI file in the dialog that appears. 2. If a project is loaded, a dialog asks if you want to create a new environment or copy the current environment for the MIDI file. Do one of the following: • To replicate the existing environment: Click Copy. The tracks of the MIDI file are automatically assigned to suitable instruments. • To load the environment of the default project template: Click New.
AAF files in Logic Pro AAF (Advanced Authoring Format) is used by other DAW applications such as Pro Tools. You can use it to import multiple audio tracks, inclusive of references to tracks, time positions, and volume automation. Export the current project as an AAF file 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Export > Project as AAF File. 2. In the Save AAF File As dialog, set the following options: • Sample Rate: Choose 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz. • Bit Depth: Choose either 16 or 24 bit.
Arrange a project Logic Pro Arranging overview After adding audio, MIDI, and Drummer regions to your project (by recording, adding loops, using Drummer or adding media files), you build the project by arranging the regions in the Tracks area. As you work in the Tracks area, you can play the project at any time to hear your latest changes.
The playhead extends from the top to the bottom of the Tracks area, and moves as the project plays, showing the point currently playing in the project. At the top of the playhead is a triangle that you can drag to move the playhead to a different part of the project, or scrub the regions in the Tracks area. You can also scroll to see another part of the project, and zoom in for precise editing or zoom out to see more of the project. When you open Logic Pro, the Tracks area appears in the main window.
To set a project to use the musical grid, go to File > Project Settings > General. You can also show a secondary ruler that displays the alternative time format by choosing Secondary Ruler from the Tracks area View menu. For more details about setting the project to use the musical grid, see General settings in Logic Pro.
Set the Snap value for the Tracks area • In Logic Pro, choose a value from the Snap pop-up menu in the Tracks area menu bar: • Smart: Edit operations snap to the nearest bar, beat, sub-beat, and so on, depending on the current ruler division value and the zoom level. • Bar: Edit operations snap to the nearest bar. • Beat: Edit operations snap to the nearest beat in a bar. • Division: Edit operations snap to the nearest division value. (This is the time signature shown in the LCD and the ruler.
Snap to an absolute position • In Logic Pro, choose Snap > Snap Regions to Absolute Value from the Tracks area menu bar. A checkmark appears to the left of this option when it’s active. This feature works in conjunction with the chosen snap grid division. For example, if the Snap value is set to Bar, and Snap Regions to Absolute Value is active, moving a region (from position 1.2.1.16) two bars forward results in the region being snapped to position 2.2.1.1 rather than its relative position (2.2.1.16).
Quantize regions in Logic Pro Quantizing involves the rhythmic correction of audio or MIDI regions to a specific time grid. Any notes not played in time are moved to the nearest position on the grid. You can quantize regions in the Tracks area by using the Quantize parameter in the Region inspector. Several advanced quantization parameters are also available in the Region inspector for greater control over quantization.
When you quantize audio regions, white lines called quantize flex markers appear over the selected audio regions, to indicate where audio has been time-stretched during the time quantization process. The quantization grid for a MIDI region always begins at the start of the region. If the MIDI region is not aligned with the beginning of a bar, neither is the quantization grid. Important: For MIDI regions, the chosen Quantize value affects the way notes are displayed in the MIDI editors.
Use drag modes in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, the Drag pop-up menu is available in the Tracks area and in time-based editors (such as the Audio Track Editor and Piano Roll Editor). Using drag modes, you can control the results of moving, resizing, or deleting regions in the Tracks area.
Scrub a Logic Pro project You can scrub a project to locate or listen to a sound at a particular point in time. When you scrub a project, you quickly audition it by moving the playhead across the Tracks area. The speed at which you move the playhead controls the playback speed. Scrubbing makes it easy to zero in on a particular drum beat or other audio event before cutting or editing a region. Scrubbing always applies to MIDI regions in the Tracks area.
Scroll and zoom the Logic Pro Tracks area Depending on the size of the project and your display, you may not be able to see the entire project at one time. You can scroll both horizontally and vertically in the Tracks area to view other parts of the project. You can zoom in to make precise edits and see more detail in the Tracks area, or zoom out to view more of your project. You can also zoom the amplitude of the waveforms in audio regions in the Tracks area.
Customize the Logic Pro toolbar The toolbar offers a variety of buttons and other controls for working with regions in the Tracks area, as well as other functions. The default set of buttons provides the most commonly used options for most users. If you find that you need to access particular functions that are not part of the default set, you can customize the toolbar by adding additional controls, or removing existing controls. Change the controls on the toolbar 1.
• Drummer regions generated on Drummer tracks or from Drummer Apple Loops You can edit regions in the Tracks area in several ways.
Select all regions in a track In Logic Pro, click the track header. Select all regions in a project In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Select > All from the Tracks area menu bar. Select regions meeting specific criteria In Logic Pro, choose any of the following from the Tracks area Edit menu: • To select all following regions in the project: Choose Select All Following. • To select all following regions on the same track: Choose Select All Following of Same Track.
If you play a project after making a marquee selection, playback starts at the left edge of the selection, and ends at the right edge. If you create a marquee selection while the project is playing, playback continues past the end of the selection. If you start recording after making a marquee selection, Autopunch mode is activated, and the marquee selection is replaced by the punch locators. All tracks within the marquee selection are record-enabled, and all other tracks are record-disabled.
• Use the Left Arrow key or Right Arrow key to change the selection end points. You can also use the Select Previous Region/Cell/Event or Move Marquee End to Previous Transient key commands, depending on the type of region selected. You can access Logic Pro key commands in the Key Commands window. Move the entire selection In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Press Shift–Home (the default Select First, or Shift Marquee Selection Left key command).
Cut and paste regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can cut or copy regions in the Tracks area, and paste them at a different position. You can also paste a copied region at the same time position, to double the content of the region to use on another track. You can quickly double a region or cut it in half at its existing location. Cut a region • In Logic Pro, select the region, then choose Edit > Cut (or press Command-X).
Cut a region in half When you cut a region in half, the region is cut at its center and the right half is discarded, leaving only the left half. • In Logic Pro, select the region, then choose Edit > Length > Halve. Double a region When you double a region, its length is doubled and the contents are repeated in the right half. • In Logic Pro, select the region, then choose Edit > Length > Double.
When an audio region is rotated, it is converted to a one-track folder (indicated by a folder icon in the upper-left corner of the region) containing two regions. If it is rotated multiple times, the number of regions in the one-track folder stays the same, but the junction point between the two regions moves through the folder, reflecting the extent of the cumulative rotation.
Slip regions by the nudge value • In Logic Pro, select the regions, then do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Move > Slip Left (or use the corresponding key command: ControlOption-Left Arrow). • Choose Edit > Move > Slip Right (or use the corresponding key command: ControlOption-Right Arrow).
• Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Tick • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Division • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Division • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Beat • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Beat • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Bar • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Bar • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Nudge Value • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Nudge Value • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Sample • Nudge Region/Event Position Left
Insert a gap between regions using the locators (the cycle length) 1. In Logic Pro, set the left and right locator positions by doing one of the following: • Drag from left to right across a portion of the ruler. • Set the values in the locator fields in the LCD. 2. Select the regions you want to move by the cycle length. If no selection is made, all regions that fall between the locators are affected.
The first selected region on each track is moved to the right, and all subsequent regions remain unchanged. Remove a section of an arrangement using the locators 1. In Logic Pro, set the locators to span the section you want to remove (bars 5 through 8, for example). 2. Do one of the following: • To cut all regions that fall between the locators: Click the Cut Section button in the toolbar, or choose Edit > Cut/Insert Time > Cut Section Between Locators.
Tip: This workflow is perfect for when you want to insert a part (a chorus, for example) at another point in your arrangement. To guarantee all tracks are shifted, including tempo, time signature changes, and markers, make sure everything is selected (using Command-A or Shift-I) before cutting and inserting. Copy a section of the arrangement 1. In Logic Pro, set the locators to span the section you want to copy (bars 5 through 8, for example). 2.
The portions of all regions that are wholly or partially encompassed by the locators are copied and pasted starting at the right locator position. You can also move, copy, and delete sections of a project using arrangement markers. For more information, see Add arrangement markers in Logic Pro. Delay region playback in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can shift the playback position of regions on a track using the Delay parameter.
Loop regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can loop regions so that they play repeatedly, and extend them to fill any amount of musical time in the Tracks area. When you play the project, the region repeats the number of times you have extended (looped) it. You can also loop a region that has been resized. When you loop a resized region, only the visible portion of the region repeats when you play the project.
Note: Deselecting the Loop parameter resets the manually created loop length. The next time the Loop parameter is used, the region is repeated until it either encounters another region in the same track, or reaches the end of the project (or folder). Convert loops into aliases or clones • In Logic Pro, select the original region, then choose Edit > Convert > Loops to Aliases (or use the Convert Loops to Aliases key command). Software instrument loop repeats are converted into aliases.
Resize regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can shorten both audio and MIDI regions so that only part of the region plays. You can lengthen MIDI regions to add silence to the beginning or end of the region. In addition, you can resize the common edge of two adjacent regions to control the transition between them and remove overlaps. You can also move and resize regions numerically by opening an Event Float window. For more information, see Use the Event Float window in Logic Pro. Resize a region 1.
Remove overlaps between regions 1. In Logic Pro, select the overlapping regions, or select all regions on the track by clicking the track header. 2. Choose Edit > Trim > Remove Overlaps (or press \). Where the selected regions overlap, the length of the left (earlier) region is reduced to remove the overlap. Remove overlaps by reducing the length of the later region 1. In Logic Pro, select the left (earlier) region of a pair of overlapping regions. 2. Choose Edit > Trim > Remove Overlaps (or press \).
2. Select the regions within the locator boundaries. You can quickly select all regions inside the locators by choosing Edit > Select > All Inside Locators. 3. Choose Edit > Trim > Fill within Locators (or use the corresponding key command). All selected regions within the locator boundaries are lengthened, closing the gaps between them. On each track, the last region within the locator boundaries is not lengthened.
Solo regions using the Solo button 1. In Logic Pro, click the Solo button in the control bar (or press S). 2. Select the regions you want to solo. 3. While the project is playing, you can Shift-click additional regions to hear them. Select a soloed region (or Shift-click multiple soloed regions) to unsolo them. 4. When you’re finished, click the Solo button (or press S) again. Lock the solo status of regions 1. In Logic Pro, Option-click the Solo button in the control bar (or press Option-S). 2.
Time stretch MIDI regions • In Logic Pro, Option-drag the left or right edge of one or more MIDI regions. The events within the region are stretched or compressed, proportionately, by the amount that the MIDI region is altered in length. Time stretch or compress audio regions • In Logic Pro, Option-drag the right edge of one or more audio regions.
Split regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can split a region in the Tracks area, and use the split segments of the region in different places in the Tracks area. When you split a MIDI region, any notes at the split point are shortened to that point. If notes in a split MIDI region overlap other notes by more than a 1/16 note, a dialog appears, asking if you want to keep, shorten, or split the notes. You can also split regions by selecting part of the regions using the marquee stripe in the ruler.
Split regions at the locator positions 1. In Logic Pro, set the left and right locator positions. 2. Select the regions you want to divide within the locator boundaries. 3. Choose Edit > Split > Region(s) by Locators (or use the Split Regions/Events by Locators or Marquee Selection key command). All selected regions located wholly, or partly, between the locators are cut at the left and right locator positions.
For example, to divide a 16-bar region into eight 2-bar regions, cut the region at the start of bar 3, while holding down Option. Handle overlapping notes in split MIDI regions If any notes in a split MIDI region overlap other notes by more than a 1/16 note, a dialog appears, asking if you want to keep, shorten, or split the notes. In Logic Pro, select one of the following options: • Keep: Leaves all notes unaltered.
Split MIDI regions by note pitch 1. In Logic Pro, select the MIDI regions you want to split. 2. Do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Separate MIDI Events > by Note Pitch from the Tracks area menu bar (or use the Separate MIDI Region by Note Pitch key command). • Control-click the MIDI region, then choose MIDI > Separate by Note Pitch from the shortcut menu. A separate MIDI region is created for every note number found.
Join regions per track 1. In Logic Pro, select the regions you want to join on each track (by Shift-clicking, dragging, or using Command-A). 2. Choose Edit > Join > Regions per Tracks (or use the Merge Regions per Tracks key command). The selected regions on each track are joined into a single region on that track.
Genuine mixdown with Clipscan If you combine audio regions from two or more tracks, the current pan and volume values for the individual tracks define the pan and volume settings in the new audio file. If you want to combine both sides of a stereo audio file (a mono channel on each of two tracks), first set the pan controls of the component mono sides to hard left and hard right, respectively.
Create regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area In addition to recording regions or dragging Apple Loops and other media files, you can create regions in the Tracks area.
Create MIDI aliases in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can create an alias for a MIDI region or a folder. An alias is a reference to a region, and looks similar to a normal region in the Tracks area. If you alter the original region, all aliases of the region are similarly altered. Aliases can be useful when you want to repeat a phrase or riff in different parts of an arrangement.
Search for an original region or alias If you forget where the original or source region is for a certain alias, you can search for it. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select the alias, then choose MIDI > Alias > Select Original (or use the Find Original of Alias key command). • Choose Functions > Region Alias > Select Aliases of Region.
Clone audio regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area You can clone audio regions in the Tracks area. Cloning an audio region is similar to creating an alias of a MIDI region; the clone doesn’t contain any audio data, but is only a reference to the original, and any changes to the original apply to its clones. Clone an audio region • In Logic Pro, press and hold Option-Shift while dragging an audio region.
Convert repeated MIDI regions to loops in Logic Pro When MIDI regions with adjacent repetitions exist in the Tracks area, you can convert the repetitions to loops. After the regions are converted to loops, any changes you make to the original region are carried over to the loops. Convert repetitions of a region to loops 1. Select the region in the Tracks area. 2. Choose Edit > Convert > Repetitions to Loops, or use the corresponding key command.
Convert audio regions to Sampler zones in Logic Pro You can convert one or more regions or tracks into one-note/one-sample zones of a new Sampler instrument. This Sampler instrument is set up on a new software instrument track, which contains trigger notes to play the zones at their original positions. Convert audio regions to sample zones on a new sampler track 1. In Logic Pro, select the audio regions you want to convert in the Tracks area. 2.
A new software instrument track is created, below the selected track, with Sampler inserted as the instrument plug-in. MIDI regions with ascending trigger notes are created on this track. The new track and regions are selected, while the processed regions are muted and deselected. See Manage Logic Pro project assets. Note: The Sampler samples are saved to the project only if the File > Project Settings > Assets > “Copy Sampler audio data into project” setting is turned on.
Restore deleted regions • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Undo History, then click the step you want to restore. Restoring audio and MIDI regions deleted from the Tracks area involves somewhat different procedures. When you delete an audio region from the Tracks area, it remains in the Project Audio Browser. You can restore it to the Tracks area by adding it from the Project Audio Browser. Both audio and MIDI regions can be restored using the Undo history.
Create a fade-in or fade-out using the Region inspector 1. In Logic Pro, select one or more regions. 2. Set the value for the Fade In or Fade Out setting in the Region inspector by dragging the pointer vertically, or double-clicking and entering a value. Fades created using the Fade tool and the Region inspector are interactive. After you create a fade using the Fade tool, for example, you can adjust the fade using the Region inspector Fade In or Fade Out parameters.
Apply the last fade to a marquee selection 1. In Logic Pro, make a marquee selection to part of one or more regions. 2. Use the “Apply Last Fade or Fade Marquee Selection” key command.
Adjust the fade curve shape In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag the fade curve with the Fade tool. • Select a region, then edit the Curve value in the Region inspector. In the example below, a positive curve is shown for both the fade-in and fade-out. In this next example, a negative curve is shown for the fade-in, and a linear fade (no curve) is shown for the fade-out. Change the fade type In the Logic Pro Region inspector, choose a fade type from the Fade Out pop-up menu.
Logic Pro offers Speed Up and Slow Down parameters in the Region inspector, which you can use to speed up or slow down the playback speed of fades. These parameters share pop-up menus with the Fade In and Fade Out parameters. Create automatic crossfades in Logic Pro Logic Pro can automatically create crossfades on overlapping audio regions on a track to smoothly segue between adjacent (or overlapping) audio regions.
Remove silent passages from audio files Remove silent passages in a Logic Pro project You can remove silent passages from audio regions in the Remove Silence window. The basic process is simple: all amplitude values below a threshold level are removed, and new regions are created from the remaining passages. The parameters of the Remove Silence window are: Logic Pro User Guide • Threshold: Use to define the amplitude level that a passage must exceed, in order to be defined as a region.
Open the Remove Silence window • In the Logic Pro Project Audio Browser, Control-click an audio region, then choose Remove Silence from the shortcut menu. Remove silent passages from the selected region 1. In Logic Pro, set parameters in the Remove Silence window. Note: Depending on the material in the audio file, all parameters can affect the number and division of regions. Try different values to see what produces the best result.
Create segments of spoken recordings You can use Remove Silence to divide long spoken passages into several convenient segments, like sentences, words, or syllables. For film synchronization or jingles, you can move or reposition the speech segments by simply dragging them around in the Tracks area. Tempo changes allow you to simulate a time compression or expansion effect, as the syllables automatically move closer together, or farther apart.
Work with folders Logic Pro folders overview A folder is a region that can contain other regions, similar to a folder in the Finder that can contain different files. You can edit a folder in many of the same ways you edit a MIDI region. A folder can be thought of as an arrangement within an arrangement. A folder can contain as many tracks (with their regions) as needed.
Pack and unpack folders in Logic Pro You can pack selected regions into a folder, or create an empty folder and add regions to it. Pack regions into a folder • In Logic Pro, select the regions, then choose Functions > Folder > Pack Folder from the Tracks area menu bar. If the selected regions are all on the same track, the folder is created on that track. If the regions are located on different tracks, a new folder track is created.
If a MIDI region, rather than a folder, is selected when you use the key command, the Piano Roll Editor opens. Double-clicking the header of a folder track opens the Mixer. Close a folder In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Double-click the background of the Tracks area (or use the Go Out of Folder or Region key command). • Click the Display Level button Folder. in the Tracks area menu bar.
Remove regions from a folder 1. In Logic Pro, open a second Tracks area window by choosing Window > Open Tracks, or use the Open Tracks key command (Command-1). 2. In one of the two windows, open the folder containing the regions you want to remove. 3. Drag the regions into the Tracks area in the other window. You can also cut a region from a folder, using the Edit > Cut command to transfer the region to the Clipboard.
Create a groove template 1. In Logic Pro, select the audio or MIDI region or regions you want to create a groove template from. If you select multiple regions, the transients or notes from all the selected regions are used for the groove template. When there are multiple transients or MIDI notes around the same musical position, however, only the first will be evaluated for the groove template. 2. In the Region inspector, choose a quantization value from the Quantize pop-up menu. 3.
This function transforms the exact timing of transient markers or notes in the selected audio or MIDI region into a groove template that can be accessed, and used, like any value in the Quantize pop-up menu. Important: The source audio or MIDI region used for a groove template must remain in your project if you want to use the groove template. If you delete the source region from the project, the groove template is not removed from the Quantize pop-up menu, but it can no longer be used.
Note: The quantization templates are saved with the project and can be used, even when the project is played on a computer that doesn’t have the corresponding DNA Groove Templates on its hard disk. Edit region parameters Logic Pro Region inspector You can view and edit region parameters in the Region inspector, located in the upper part of the inspector.
Logic Pro audio region parameters The following parameters are available for audio regions in the Region inspector. • Mute: Lets you mute individual regions in the Tracks area to exclude them from playback. • Loop: The playback of regions can be continuously repeated by selecting the Loop checkbox, or by using the Loop tool. (See Loop regions in the Logic Pro Tracks area.) • Quantize: All note events contained in the region are time corrected to the (quantize) grid format chosen in the pop-up menu.
• Q-Range: Q-Range is a very musical quantization method that requires a certain amount of technical musical prowess. It’s ideal for recordings that already have the right groove, but are too hurried or laid back in places. It allows you to retain the original feel, but positions the rhythmic center precisely in the groove. A value of 0 means that every note is quantized.
To guard against drum notes and so on being transposed, select the No Transpose checkbox in the Track inspector. When the checkbox is selected, Logic Pro ignores the Transpose parameter in all MIDI regions played by this channel strip (including instrument Apple Loops added to tracks routed to instrument channels). • Velocity: All notes in the relevant MIDI region are offset by the selected value.
• Q-Length: This parameter (also expressed as a percentage value) determines how the lengths of quantized notes are affected by the equivalent note lengths (notes at the same position) of a template MIDI region. A value of 0% has no effect, while at 100%, the notes adopt the exact note lengths of the template region. Negative values alter note lengths further, resulting in a more significant deviation from the template.
Note: If you’re editing MIDI regions that appear as notation on a polyphonic staff style, you should use use the Apply All except Channel function, as the event channel is used to assign notes to individual polyphonic voices in the Score Editor. Logic Pro MIDI quantization types For MIDI regions, there are two types of quantization: Classic Quantize and Smart Quantize. • Classic Quantize quantizes MIDI notes to the nearest beat, using the current Quantize setting and any advanced Quantize parameters.
The values of the Quantize parameter in the Region inspector are grouped in the following categories: • No quantization: The off setting plays the notes at the finest possible timing resolution: 1/3840 note, which is unquantized playback, for practical purposes. • Normal quantization: The 1/1-Note, 1/2-Note, 1/4-Note, 1/8-Note, 1/16-Note, 1/32-Note, and 1/64-Note settings quantize the MIDI region to the equivalent note value.
Advanced quantization parameters in the Region inspector include the following: In the Region inspector, the Q-Swing field is located below the Quantize pop-up menu. The other advanced quantization parameters are available by clicking the More disclosure triangle. They can be applied to any quantization value (except “off”). • Q-Swing: Alters the position of every second point in the current quantization grid. Values over 50% delay the beats; values under 50% pre-delay (advance) them.
• Logic Pro User Guide Q-Length: Determines how the lengths of quantized notes are affected by the equivalent note lengths (notes at the same position) of a template MIDI region. A value of 0% has no effect, whereas at 100% the notes adopt the exact note lengths of the template region. Negative values alter note lengths further, resulting in a more significant deviation from the template.
Edit audio regions in the Audio Track Editor The Audio Track Editor in Logic Pro The Audio Track Editor shows a close-up view of part of an audio track in the Tracks area, displaying the audio waveform of the regions on the track in a time grid. In the Audio Track Editor, you can move and trim audio regions, split and join them, and edit them in other ways. You can scroll and zoom the Audio Track Editor, and zoom the amplitude of the waveforms in audio regions.
Vertically resize the Audio Track Editor • In Logic Pro, place the pointer in the bar at the top of the Audio Track Editor, and drag upward. Drag downward to make the Audio Track Editor smaller again. Zoom the Audio Track Editor horizontally • In Logic Pro, drag the zoom slider in the Audio Track Editor menu bar left or right. Zoom audio waveforms • In Logic Pro, click-hold the Waveform Zoom button in the Audio Track Editor menu bar, then drag the slider vertically to zoom the amplitude in or out.
Select all regions on the track • In Logic Pro, click the track header in the Tracks area. Select content inside regions using the Marquee Tool • In the lower half of the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor, drag across the material that you wish to select with the Marquee Tool. Cut, copy and paste in the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor You can cut or copy an audio region or region segment in the Audio Track Editor and paste the copy at a different time position.
Trim regions in the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor You can trim an audio region in the Audio Track Editor to remove part of the beginning or end of the region. Trim an audio region 1. In Logic Pro, place the pointer over the lower-left or lower-right edge of the region. The pointer changes to a trim pointer. 2. Drag the pointer to remove the part you want to trim. As you drag, the help tag shows the region length and the amount by which it is trimmed.
Split an audio region • In Logic Pro, select the Scissors tool, then click the point where you want to split the region. You can scrub regions to find the point where you want to cut by dragging across the regions with the Scissors tool. You can also split regions by selecting them in the Tracks area, then selecting Edit > Split > Regions at Playhead. Before moving or deleting a segment of a split audio region, click the region to select it. Join regions or region segments 1.
Delete regions in the Logic Pro Audio Track Editor You can delete audio regions in the Audio Track Editor. When you delete a region, it’s also deleted from the Tracks area, and from the project (but not from the Project Audio Browser). Delete an audio region 1. In Logic Pro, select the region or regions you want to delete in the Audio Track Editor. 2. Choose Edit > Delete (or press Delete).
Edit MIDI regions in the Piano Roll Editor Overview of the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro The Piano Roll Editor shows the notes in a MIDI region as colored bars in a time grid. Horizontal lines show the time position, while vertical lines indicate pitch. A keyboard along the left edge of the Piano Roll Editor provides a reference for the pitches of notes. The info display after the tool pop-up menus in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar shows the note name and time position under the pointer.
Open the Piano Roll Editor In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select a software instrument (or external MIDI instrument) track or a MIDI region, then click the Editors button . • Select a software instrument (or external MIDI instrument) track or a MIDI region, then choose View > Show Editors. • Double-click a MIDI region (if Piano Roll is chosen from the Logic Pro > Preferences > General > Editing > Double-Clicking a MIDI Region Opens pop-up menu).
Hide or show the local Piano Roll Editor inspector • To hide the Piano Roll Editor inspector: In Logic Pro, choose Hide Local Inspector from the Piano Roll Editor View menu. • To show the Piano Roll Editor inspector: In Logic Pro, choose Show Local inspector from the Piano Roll Editor View menu. Set the Link mode for the Piano Roll Editor You can turn on Content Link for the Piano Roll Editor, so that it always displays the contents of the currently selected MIDI region.
• Click the MIDI In button if it is not already active (red), and use your music or computer keyboard to enter notes using step input recording methods. See Use step input recording in. The newly created note’s length, velocity, and channel match that of the previously created or edited note event. When you start a new project, the default values are a length of 240 ticks, a velocity of 80, and MIDI channel 1. Note: When you create a note using the Pencil tool, you can edit the length of notes on the fly.
Duplicate an existing note at another position or pitch 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Control-click the original note, then choose Define as Default Note from the shortcut menu. • Click the original note with the Pencil tool. Note: Editing an existing note also defines it as the default note. 2. Click a position in the Piano Roll Editor background with the Pencil tool. The new note’s length, velocity, and channel are the same as the default note.
Select the previous or next event in the region In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • To select the previous event: Choose Edit > Select > Previous Event. • To select the next event: Choose Edit > Select > Next Event. Select all following events on the track • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Select > All Following. Select all regions on the track • In Logic Pro, click the track header in the Tracks area.
• Division: Edit operations snap to the nearest division (this is the time signature shown in the LCD and ruler). • Ticks: Edit operations snap to the nearest clock tick (1/3840 of a beat). • Frames: Edit operations snap to the nearest SMPTE frame. • Note values: Choose a note value between 1/1 (whole note) and 1/64–triplet. By default, the Snap functionality is relative, so that when you move notes or other items, they retain their relative distance from their original position.
Move notes in finer increments 1. In Logic Pro, select the notes. 2. Press and hold Control, then drag the notes to the new position. The drag resolution depends on the current Snap value and zoom level (see Snap to grid in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro). Alternatively, you can press Control-Shift as you drag to move the notes in tick steps, overriding the Snap value. Limit dragging to one direction 1. Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > General (or use the Open General Preferences key command). 2.
• Nudge Region/Event Position Left by SMPTE Bit • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Tick • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Tick • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Division • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Division • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Beat • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Beat • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Bar • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Bar • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Nudge Value • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by
Tip: You can Option-drag notes between two Piano Roll Editor windows (showing different regions, for example), or even between the Piano Roll Editor windows of different projects. • Use any of the following Clipboard commands: • Edit > Cut (or Command-X) to move notes to the Clipboard. • Edit > Copy (or Command-C) to copy notes to the Clipboard. • Edit > Paste (or Command-V) to paste notes at the current playhead position, at their original pitch. Copy or move a range of MIDI events 1.
• Direct Swap: Exchanges the source data with data of the same length, starting at the target position. This allows you to swap the notes in bar 1 of a four-bar MIDI region with the notes in bar 3 of the same region, for example. • Remove: Removes the MIDI data from the source region, but leaves the region at its original position. • Left Locator and Right Locator: Allow you to edit the source area you defined with the left and right locators.
Resize notes in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro You can resize notes in the Piano Roll Editor to change their length (duration). Notes can be resized from either their start or end point using the Pointer, Finger, or Pencil tool. There are a number of commands in the Edit > Trim submenu in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar to change the length of selected notes, in relation to notes surrounding or overlapping them. They can be very useful for tidying up the start and end points of notes.
Make notes legato 1. In Logic Pro, select the notes you want to edit. 2. Choose one of the following commands in the Edit > Trim submenu in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar: • Note Start to Playhead • Note End to Playhead • Note End to Selected Notes • Note End to Following Notes Convert sustain pedal events to note lengths • In Logic Pro, choose Functions > Convert Sustain Pedal to Note Length in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar.
Edit the velocity of notes using the pointer In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select one or more notes, then drag the Velocity slider in the Piano Roll Editor header left or right. • Drag over a note vertically with the Velocity tool. You can select the Velocity tool from the Tool menu, or you can press Control-Command to temporarily change the Pointer to the Velocity tool. A help tag showing the note velocity updates as you drag.
Quantize timing in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro You can quantize, or automatically correct, the timing of individual MIDI notes in the Piano Roll Editor. This is useful when regions in the track contain the right notes, but are not perfectly in time with the project. When you quantize the timing, items are adjusted to the selected note value. You can quantize the timing of regions with drums, single-note instruments, and chordal or polyphonic instruments.
Quantize pitch in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro You can quantize the pitch of notes in MIDI regions to a particular scale or key. This is especially useful when you want to reuse a repeating pattern of notes, but transpose them to a different key. Quantize the pitch of notes in a MIDI region 1. In Logic Pro, select the notes you want to quantize. 2. Choose the scale and key from the Scale Quantize pop-up menus.
Change articulations using the shortcut menu 1. In Logic Pro, select the notes in the Piano Roll Editor. 2. Control-click a selected note, then choose Articulation from the shortcut menu. 3. Choose an articulation from the submenu. You can also change the color of notes by articulation. See Change colors in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro.
The Select Muted Regions/Events key command is also available in the Piano Roll Editor. You can use it to select all muted notes in a MIDI region. Mute or unmute all notes of a particular pitch • In Logic Pro, click a key in the keyboard at the left of the Piano Roll Editor, then click one of the selected notes with the Mute tool.
Delete notes in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro You can delete notes from MIDI regions, and delete notes meeting certain criteria. Delete one or more notes In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select the notes, then press Delete. • Select the notes, then click one of the selected notes with the Eraser tool. • Select the Eraser tool, then click the notes you want to delete. Delete similar or equal events 1. In Logic Pro, select one of the notes you want to delete. 2.
Delete events outside the MIDI region • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Delete MIDI Events > Outside Region Borders from the Piano Roll Editor menu bar. Delete unselected events within the selection • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Delete MIDI Events > Unselected Within Selection from the Piano Roll Editor menu bar. All unselected notes between the start of the first selected note and the end of the last selected note are deleted. Delete all selected events and select the next one 1.
Note: You can Shift-click notes to unselect or select them. You can also Option-shift-drag to select the required range of notes without having to choose Functions > Time Handles in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar first. View multiple regions in the Piano Roll Editor in Logic Pro You can view the contents of several selected MIDI regions, all MIDI regions in a folder, or all MIDI regions in a project using Link modes.
Assign notes to different MIDI channels by pitch 1. In Logic Pro, select the notes you want to reassign by clicking keys on the keyboard along the left edge of the Piano Roll Editor. • Shift-click to select multiple keys. • Drag across the keyboard to select a range of contiguous pitches. 2. Choose Functions > Set MIDI Channel to Voice Number from the Piano Roll Editor menu bar. Logic Pro assigns MIDI channel numbers (in ascending order) to individual note pitches in the selected MIDI region.
Note: Region-based automation is effectively the same as MIDI Draw in previous versions of Logic Pro. If you had MIDI Draw data in a project created in a previous version of Logic Pro, it appears as region-based automation data. Show automation or MIDI controller data in the Piano Roll Editor • In Logic Pro, click the Show/Hide Automation button bar.
Show region-based automation in the MIDI/Automation area 1. In Logic Pro, click the Automation button and set it to Region (if it isn’t already set to Region). 2. Choose the desired automation or MIDI controller parameter from the Automation/MIDI pop-up menu. Cycle through existing automation curves and MIDI data • In Logic Pro, click the Automation/MIDI Cycle Through button.
Add drummers to your project Overview of Drummer in Logic Pro Drummer allows you to add virtual drummers to your project, using Drummer tracks. You can create as many Drummer tracks as you like per project. You can choose drummers from different genres—Rock, Alternative, Songwriter, R&B, Electronic, Hip Hop, and Percussion. Each drummer comes with its own acoustic kit or electronic drum kit and a distinct playing style.
If you have a device with a Touch Bar, you can edit Drummer parameters using the Smart Controls screen and play the selected drum kit and percussion instruments using the Drum Pads screen. When you add a Drummer track to your project, a drummer and a default patch associated with that drummer are loaded. The default patch is based on a stereo mixdown of the full, multi-miked acoustic or electric drum kit or percussion mix.
2. In the New Tracks dialog, select the Drummer track and choose a genre from the Genre pop-up menu. 3. Click Create. • If the project doesn’t have arrangement markers: A Drummer track containing one 8-bar region is created. • If the project has arrangement markers: A Drummer track containing as many regions as there are arrangement markers is created. The length and name of the Drummer regions correspond to the existing arrangement markers.
Fill the entire Drummer track with regions • In Logic Pro, control-click an empty area of the Drummer track, then choose Populate with Drummer Regions from the shortcut menu. The Drummer track is filled with regions up to the project end point. Gaps are filled with 8-bar regions as much as possible, without overwriting existing regions. Any gaps smaller than one bar are not filled; the expectation is that such gaps were created for short pauses, for example.
The Drummer Editor includes region-based settings, which influence the complexity, loudness, and other aspects of selected Drummer regions. You can choose and create presets for Drummer regions. Presets offer a quick way to browse predefined, regionbased Drummer Editor settings, including percussion and kit piece pattern variations and fill settings. Note: Drummer regions can be edited in the Tracks area in much the same way as you edit MIDI regions, with the exception of region overlapping.
Choose genres and drummers in Logic Pro Each genre comes with a number of drummers that have their own drum kit or percussion instruments and distinct playing style. When you add a Drummer track to the project, a default genre and drummer are loaded, along with a default patch associated with the drummer. You can change the genre and the drummer, with these changes influencing all regions on the track.
Choose a drummer without changing the current patch • In Logic Pro, hold down Option while choosing a drummer. Choose a drummer without changing region settings on the track • In Logic Pro, choose “Keep settings when changing drummers” from the Action pop-up menu in the presets area. Choose a drummer without changing the drum kit on the track • In Logic Pro, choose “Keep drum kit when changing drummers” from the Action pop-up menu in the presets area.
Play a subtly different version of the selected region (without editing region settings) In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • In the Drummer Editor: Choose “Refresh region” from the Action pop-up menu in the presets area. • In the Tracks area: Control-click the Drummer region, then choose Edit > Refresh Region from the shortcut menu. Choose a different preset • In Logic Pro, click a preset on the left side of the editor.
Edit a drummer’s performance in Logic Pro There are a number of settings in the Drummer Editor that affect the drummer’s playing style. These settings are located to the right of the presets area. You can edit the complexity and loudness of the performance, mute and unmute drum kit and percussion pieces, and choose whether a pattern is played on the toms, cymbals, hi-hat, or percussion instruments.
Choose a pattern variation for acoustic drum or percussion instruments • In Logic Pro, select an instrument, then drag the slider to the right of the instrument to choose an increment. You can also click a specific increment. In some cases, you can select more than one instrument in a category. Choose a pattern variation for electronic drum or percussion instruments • In Logic Pro, select an instrument, then drag the slider to the right of the instrument to choose an increment.
• To remove a piece from the performance: In Logic Pro, click the piece so that it’s dimmed, or muted. Use a half time or double time variation for acoustic kick and snare drums • In Logic Pro, choose 1/2 or 2x at the right end of the Kick & Snare slider. Adjust the snare brush technique of drummers using a brush kit When using a drummer who uses snare brushes, the Brush Sweep or Brush Tap checkbox appears under the Kick & Snare slider.
• Adjust the shuffle feel of the currently playing pattern: In Logic Pro, drag the Swing knob vertically. You can click the lock to prevent any changes to the swing setting when switching presets or drummers. • Determine whether the swing is based on eighth notes or sixteenth notes: In Logic Pro, click the 8th or 16th button.
Edit other electronic drum performance settings • In Logic Pro, click the Details button, then do any of the following: • Drag the Humanize knob to generate drum patterns that are not perfectly quantized, making the performance more realistic, or human. You can click the lock to prevent any changes to the humanize setting when switching presets or drummers. • Drag the Phrase Variation knob to determine the amount of rhythmic change that occurs over the course of several bars within a region.
Set Drummer to follow another track’s rhythm in Logic Pro You can have the kick and snare portions of a Drummer region follow another track so that the beat Drummer plays is influenced by the rhythm of the content of another instrument. You may find, for example, that it makes more musical sense to have the chorus beat influenced by a guitar track, while the rest of the song follows a bass track. You can set this option on a region basis, which means that each Drummer region can follow a different track.
Work with Producer Kits in Logic Pro When you add a Drummer track to your project, a drummer and a default patch associated with that drummer are loaded. If you chose an acoustic drummer, its default patch is based on a stereo mixdown of the full, multi-miked drum kit or percussion mix. These patches are optimized for performance. The original producer patch (Producer Kit) offers full access to all mix options.
Choosing a Producer Kit gives you full access to all 15 individual drum microphone channel strips and any effect plug-ins and routings. You also have access to additional mic and room sound settings, and additional drum replacement pieces. Once you choose a Producer Kit for your drummer, switching drummers also switches to the corresponding Producer Kit. For more information on how to use producer kits, see Drum Kit Designer in Logic Pro Instruments Help.
Convert a regular MIDI region back into a Drummer region In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • If the region is on the Drummer track: Control-click the MIDI region, then choose Convert > Convert to Drummer Region from the shortcut menu. • If the region is on another track: Drag the MIDI region to the Drummer track. The resulting Drummer region do not contain any MIDI edits you may have made.
Edit the timing and pitch of audio Overview of Flex Time and Pitch in Logic Pro Flex Time—similar to what is often referred to as elastic audio in other applications— simplifies the process of editing the timing of notes, beats, and other events in audio regions. You can compress or expand the time between specified events in an audio region without the need for trimming, moving, nudging, or crossfading. You can edit the timing of notes and beats in audio regions using flex markers.
Turn on flex in the Tracks area 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following to show the flex parameters: • Choose Edit > Show Flex Pitch/Time from the Tracks area menu bar (or press Command-F). • Click the Show/Hide Flex button in the Tracks area menu bar. A Track Flex button and Flex pop-up menu appear in the track header of each audio track. 2. Click the Track Flex button in the track header of the audio track you want to edit.
3. Choose Flex Pitch or one of the Flex Time algorithms from the Flex pop-up menu. Assign the same flex algorithm to all audio tracks • In the Logic Pro Tracks area or Audio Track Editor, hold down Shift while choosing a flex algorithm from the Flex pop-up menu. Choose how Flex Time and Follow Tempo adjust individual regions You can configure how Flex Time and Follow Tempo adjust each region on a flex-enabled track using the Flex & Follow pop-up menu. 1. In Logic Pro, select an audio region. 2.
Edit the timing of audio Flex Time algorithms and parameters in Logic Pro Flex Time algorithms are track-based settings that determine how the timing or pitch of your audio material can be altered—using time compression or expansion, manipulating invisibly sliced segments, or speeding up or slowing down the material. You can choose an algorithm based on the type of audio material you’re working with. Each algorithm comes with its own individual parameters, located in the Track inspector.
Use the Slicing algorithm • In Logic Pro, choose Flex Time - Slicing from the Flex pop-up menu. Slicing cuts the audio material at transient markers, then shifts the audio while playing each slice at its original speed. No time compression or expansion is applied to the shifted audio. Any gaps that occur as a result of shifting the audio can be filled using the decay function.
Use the Monophonic algorithm • In Logic Pro, choose Flex Time - Monophonic from the Flex pop-up menu. Monophonic is designed to be used on melodic instruments only playing a single note at a time, and is therefore good for solo vocals and monophonic solo instruments—melody and bass lines, for example. When you use this flex algorithm, your recording should be relatively dry, without audible reverberation. Otherwise, you may want to try using Polyphonic.
Time stretch using flex markers in Logic Pro In the Tracks area, you edit the timing of audio material using flex markers. After adding flex markers to an audio region, you use them to time stretch—compress or expand—the audio material. The boundaries within which this is done are determined by the preceding and following flex markers, or the region start and end positions if there are no preceding and following flex markers.
If you move the flex marker to the left and it crosses a previous flex marker, the previous flex marker jumps back to the previous transient marker. This allows you to extend the Flex Time editing range to the left. The same behavior occurs if a flex marker crosses a tempo marker. • Drag the flex marker to the right. The audio material is time expanded up to the preceding flex marker, the preceding tempo marker, or the region start position.
Add multiple flex markers to an audio region In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Place the pointer over or beside a transient marker in the lower half of the waveform body (note how the pointer changes), then click. Three flex markers are added: on the transient marker, on the previous transient marker, and on the following transient marker. • Place the pointer in the lower half of the waveform body where there is no transient marker (note how the pointer changes), then click.
• Click in the lower half of the marquee selection. Three flex markers are added: one at the clicked position and two at the marquee borders. 3. Drag the marquee selection in either direction. Flex tool time stretching in Logic Pro The Flex tool gives you quick access to basic Flex Time editing functionality, without having to turn on Flex view.
• Place the Flex tool over the region body, then drag when you see the following pointer: Three flex markers are added: at the clicked position, on the previous transient marker, and on the following transient marker. You are compressing or expanding the audio material between the middle flex marker and the other two. • Make a selection in the region with the Marquee tool, then drag the selection using the Flex tool.
Delete multiple flex markers from an audio region • In Logic Pro, drag across multiple flex markers with the Eraser tool. Important: Use the Eraser tool in the body of the waveform only. Using it in the region header deletes the entire region. Delete all manually added flex markers from an audio region • In Logic Pro, control-click the region background, then choose Reset Manual Flex Edits from the shortcut menu.
Quantize timing of an audio track With Flex enabled on an audio track, you can adjust the timing of the audio so that it adheres to a specific timing grid. This is explained in detail in the section on quantizing regions. • In Logic Pro, choose a value from the Quantize pop-up menu in the Region inspector. Quantize timing of multiple audio tracks Quantizing multiple audio tracks requires Logic Progroups function, which is only available if you have Show Advanced Tools selected. 1.
2. Choose which tracks in your group you wish to be the Q-Reference by clicking their Q-Reference buttons. 3. Choose a value from the Quantize pop-up menu in the Region inspector of one of the grouped tracks. If after quantizing your group, you feel that the audio of one track, or section of a track, needs some additional timing correction, you can temporarily disable the group and use flex markers to adjust specific sections. See Working with Mixer groups for details on disabling groups.
Edit the pitch of audio Flex Pitch algorithm and parameters in Logic Pro Flex Pitch is a track-based setting that determines how the pitch of your audio material can be altered. The algorithm comes with two parameters, located in the Track inspector. Flex options are only available in the Track inspector when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane.
Edit pitch using Flex Pitch in Logic Pro When you choose Flex Pitch for a track in the Audio Track Editor, or if you zoom into the track in the Tracks area, any sections of audio on that track that are identified as individual notes are displayed like notes in the Piano Roll Editor. When viewing Flex Pitch in this way, you can edit the pitch, time position, and length of notes in much the same way as you would in the Piano Roll Editor. You can also cut notes and merge multiple notes into one.
Resize a note • In Logic Pro, drag the left or right edge of a note. Split a note • In Logic Pro, click a note with the Scissors tool. Merge two or more notes • Logic Pro User Guide In Logic Pro, select two or more notes, then click with the Glue tool.
Edit the parameters of a note using “hotspots” • In Logic Pro, select a note, then do any of the following: • To edit the pitch drift at the start of the note: Drag the upper-left hotspot vertically. • To edit the vibrato: Drag the upper-mid hotspot vertically. • To edit the pitch drift at the end of the note: Drag the upper-right hotspot vertically. • To edit the gain: Drag the lower-left hotspot vertically. • To edit the fine pitch: Drag the lower-mid hotspot vertically.
Edit the gain of a note using the Volume tool When working in the Audio Track Editor, the Volume tool allows you to edit the gain of a note without having to drag the hotspot. To adjust the gain using the Volume tool: 1. In Logic Pro, select the Volume tool from the Tools pop-up menu in the Audio Track Editor menu bar. 2. Drag up on the note to raise the gain, and down to lower the gain. Note: The Volume tool is only available in the Audio Track Editor, not the Tracks area.
Adjust the pitch of a note within the current semitone (between +0.50 and –0.50 cents/semitone) • In Logic Pro, drag the bar toward the zero line. You can adjust the pitch within the range ±0.50 cents. Adjust the pitch of a note to the next lower or higher semitone (beyond +0.50 and –0.50 cents/semitone) • In Logic Pro,drag the part of the bar on the zero line away from the line.
4. Choose the note value to use as the basis for timing quantization from the Time Quantize pop-up menu. 5. Drag the Strength slider to the left to decrease the strength of quantization. For more information about Flex editing, see Overview of Flex Time and Pitch in Logic Pro. Quantize pitch in the Audio Track Editor in Logic Pro When Flex Pitch is turned on in the Audio Track Editor, you can quantize, or automatically correct, the pitch of notes on an audio track.
5. To quantize the pitch of notes to a particular scale, choose the scale and key (major or minor) from the Scale Quantize pop-up menus. For more information about Flex editing, see Overview of Flex Time and Pitch in Logic Pro. MIDI from audio using Flex Pitch in Logic Pro You can create MIDI regions from audio regions in an audio track with Flex Pitch enabled.
5. Choose a patch for the new track from the Library. After creating a new MIDI region, you may want to play it together with the original audio recording to hear any inaccuracies, then make corrections to MIDI notes, adjust their velocity, quantize the region, or perform other edits in the Piano Roll Editor. You can also open the region in the Score Editor to view MIDI notes as music notation.
Turn Varispeed on or off • In Logic Pro, click the Varispeed button in the control bar. Note: If you don’t see the Varispeed button in the control bar, Control-click the control bar, choose Customize Control Bar and Display from the shortcut menu, choose Custom from the LCD pop-up menu, then select the Varispeed checkbox.
Advanced edit features Logic Pro advanced editors overview Logic Pro includes several advanced editing windows that you can use to process and manipulate audio or MIDI information in unique ways. The advanced Logic Pro editors are available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. To access the Audio File Editor, you need to select the Show Advanced Tools checkbox and the Audio checkbox in the Advanced preferences pane.
All functions and options are shown at the top of the Event List area. The events themselves are shown in the list below. Open the Event List as a pane in the Logic Pro main window • In Logic Pro, click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Event (or use the Toggle Event List key command, default assignment: D).
Event List display options View events and regions in the Logic Pro Event List By default, the Event List shows all events in the selected MIDI region. The Event List can also display a list of all regions (and folders) in the Logic Pro main window. View the events within a region in an open Event List window • In Logic Pro, click the name of the region with the Pointer tool. The Event List can’t show the events of a multiple region selection.
View a list of regions (and folders) • In Logic Pro, click the Display Level button window. at the top-left corner of the Event List This button is only accessible when the Event List is showing the contents of a region (it’s showing events, in other words). Filter event types in the Logic Pro Event List When viewing events in a selected MIDI region, you can use the event type buttons to filter what is shown.
• In Logic Pro, click the Additional Info button to show all information stored with an event. Score layout information is also included in the list when additional info is shown. You can edit this in the Event List, but it is more efficient to perform such operations in the Score Editor. View events outside the Event List display area in Logic Pro Often the number of events shown in the list exceeds the amount of screen space.
Change Event List column position and width in Logic Pro If the length of data exceeds the width of the column, you may want to arrange the columns in a particular order or adjust their width. Change the position of columns in the Event List • In Logic Pro, click and hold the name of the column you want to move, then drag the column left or right to the desired position. Change the width of columns in the Event List 1. In Logic Pro, move the pointer over the line separating the names of the columns. 2.
Refine your event selection Use the event type buttons to filter the list of displayed events and speed up your workflow. • In Logic Pro, click any of the event type buttons alone, or in conjunction with, specific selection commands available in the Edit > Select menu or as key commands. These include: • All (or press Command-A): Selects all visible events. • All Following (or press Shift-F): Selects all events after (below) the currently selected event.
Create events in the Logic Pro Event List The Event List accepts real-time and step recording of MIDI events, as described in Overview of recording in Logic Pro. Similar to the other MIDI editors, you can also create events directly in the Event List. You can also perform advanced Copy and Move operations within the Event List. These commands allow you to directly swap events, or to merge a group of notes from one section of a region to the same, or another, region.
Edit events in the Event List Edit Event List events in Logic Pro The Event List L(ock), M(ute), Position, Status, Ch(annel), Num(ber), Val(ue), and Length/ Info columns display all details of all event types. In most cases, you can directly edit the data displayed (except for the Status column, which indicates the event type). Not all columns are used for every type of event. For example, system exclusive messages are not MIDI-channel specific, so the Channel column is unused.
Change event position and length in Logic Pro The units shown in the Event List Position and Length/Info columns represent bars, beats, divisions, and ticks (or SMPTE time, when View > Show Event Position and Length as Time is active). Counting begins at 1 for each unit (first bar, first beat, first division, first tick: 1 1 1 1), and continues until it is carried over to the next largest unit.
Protect the position of events in Logic Pro There are situations when you want to prevent certain events from being moved. For example, several note events may be used to trigger footstep samples that match an actor walking down a corridor in a movie soundtrack. You have already created the music for this scene, but have been asked to increase the tempo to match several cuts of different camera angles in the corridor. A change in the project tempo moves the events, resulting in out-of-sync footsteps.
Override the maximum or minimum value limitation If a parameter of one of several selected events is altered, it affects the same parameter in all events within the selection group. When you alter parameter values in a group of selected events, the relative differences between parameter values remain unchanged. Parameter values can only be altered until the (same) parameter value of one of the selected events has reached its maximum or minimum value. • In Logic Pro, Option-drag the value.
Edit articulation IDs in the Event List • In Logic Pro, if the track containing the region has an Articulation Set chosen, click the name of the articulation for a note event and choose a different articulation. As you change the value for the articulation ID parameter, the articulation for that value plays. When there is no articulation for the selected value, you hear silence. You can also work with articulation IDs in the Piano Roll Editor, the Score Editor, and the .
Event Types Note events in Logic Pro Note events are used to trigger (play) software instruments and external MIDI sound modules or keyboards. • Ch(annel): MIDI channel of a note from 1 to 16. • Num(ber): MIDI note number (or pitch). The range is from C −2 (note #0) to G8 (note #127). Middle C is note #60. It’s known as C3 in MIDI terminology. On some keyboards and synthesizer modules (notably those made by Korg and Roland), the note range is from C −1 (note #0) to G9 (#127).
View and change note release velocity data You can edit the release velocity of a note event when the Additional Info button is on. • In Logic Pro, click the Additional Info button (only available in Filter mode). Control change events in Logic Pro Control change events are used to transfer MIDI controller information (modulation, sustain, volume, and pan, for example) to software instruments or external MIDI keyboards and modules. • Ch(annel): MIDI channel of an event from 1 to 16.
Program change events in Logic Pro Program change events transmitted to connected MIDI devices are used for patch (preset or setting) selection. These may be sounds in a synthesizer, programs in an effects unit, or snapshots in an automated mixing desk, for example. • Ch(annel): MIDI channel of an event from 1 to 16. • Num(ber): Bank select. Normally you see this symbol (-), which indicates no bank select messages are sent.
• Val(ue): Displays the amount of pressure on the keyboard (0 to 127). Poly aftertouch events in Logic Pro Poly(phonic) aftertouch events are generated by mechanical pressure sensors beneath each individual key on some MIDI keyboards. The resulting sound modulation only affects the particular note that is pressed harder (after the initial keystrike). Only a few keyboards offer this capability. • Ch(annel): MIDI channel of an event from 1 to 16.
3. Click in either the Status column or the Length/Info column to open a text field. 4. When you’re done editing the data, press Return. For more information on manually programming a SysEx message, see SysEx faders in the Environment. Meta events in Logic Pro Meta events are control messages that are specific to Logic Pro. They are used to automate certain functions, and to organize and arrange Score Editor elements (particular notation symbols and formatting) that can’t be represented by MIDI events.
Use the Event Float window in Logic Pro The Event Float window provides information on the currently selected event (or region), and can be compared with a single line of the Event List. You can edit the following parameters in this window.
Step Editor Logic Pro Step Editor Overview The Step Editor is a graphical editor that can be used to create or edit MIDI note and controller data. You can use the Step Editor to view and edit different MIDI event types, shown as vertical beams—or steps—along a timeline within a region. • Step: Each beam, called a step, represents a MIDI event. The value of the event is denoted by the beam height, providing an at-a-glance view of one or more different events and their values.
Create and edit steps in the Step Editor Change the Step Editor grid and step display in Logic Pro The Grid parameter in the Lane inspector is important when creating event steps. When you create new events, they’re automatically added at grid positions set by the Grid parameter. This makes it easy to create a drum pattern with 4 divisions on one lane, 8 divisions on another lane, and 16 divisions on another lane—assigned to kick, snare, and hi-hat sounds, for example.
When you set the Pen Width parameter to Note Length, note event steps are displayed at their actual length. The Status parameter must be set to Note for this to work. Change the style of step beams • In Logic Pro, choose a setting from the Style pop-up menu. • No Frames: Shows the value of the event as a colored beam. • Framed Values: Shows a hollow frame that is the full height of the lane. The value of the event is displayed as a colored beam within the frame.
Add a step 1. In Logic Pro, using the Pencil tool, click a time position in the appropriate lane. 2. Drag up or down to alter the event value before you release the mouse button. Add multiple steps • In Logic Pro, using the Pencil tool, drag horizontally over the time position on the appropriate lane. This action results in a freehand curve of new events that follows the (vertical and horizontal) Pencil tool movements in the lane. Edit multiple steps in a linear fashion 1.
3. Drag the Line tool over the steps you want to edit. This can be to the right or left. As you move the Line tool, a line trails behind it with the exact position and event value shown in a help tag. 4. Release the Line tool to change the values of several event beams, aligned along the line. Note: You can use the Line tool to alter values for all MIDI events in the Step Editor. However, it is not possible to create MIDI note events with the Line tool.
Create new events when other events already exist in a lane 1. In Logic Pro, select the Line tool. 2. Click a position on the appropriate lane. A help tag appears, showing the exact position and event value in the top line. 3. Move the pointer to the end point of the line (to the right or left). As you move the pointer, a line trails behind the Line tool, with the exact position and event value shown in a help tag. 4. Press and hold Option when releasing the Line tool.
Select steps in the Step Editor in Logic Pro You can use any of the usual selection techniques in the Step Editor, with the following variations. Select individual steps • In Logic Pro, press and hold Shift, then click the steps in a lane. Select several contiguous steps • In Logic Pro, press and hold Shift, then drag to select the steps in a lane. Take care to avoid clicking any steps.
Restore deleted steps in the Step Editor in Logic Pro Accidental deletions of one or more events, a change of mind, or an editing mistake are inevitable parts of song creation. Fortunately, you can backtrack your edits easily in Logic Pro. You also have the option of re-creating an event with the Pencil tool. Undo the last edit or deletion • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Undo (or press Command-Z) immediately after making the edit or deletion. Undo or redo multiple steps 1.
Alter several contiguous step values • In Logic Pro, drag across the steps with the Pointer tool. Vertical movements affect the value of each step. The current value is shown in a help tag as you drag across each event. Alter the values of multiple steps 1. In Logic Pro, select the steps you want to edit using any selection technique. 2. Grab one of the grouped (and highlighted) steps, then drag vertically. The values of all steps are adjusted.
• Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Nudge Value • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Nudge Value • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Sample • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Sample • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by 1 ms • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by 1 ms • Nudge Region/Event Position Right by 10 ms • Nudge Region/Event Position Left by 10 ms Copy selected steps • In Logic Pro, press and hold Option and Shift, then drag the selected steps to the new position and lane.
Lane parameters Logic Pro lane parameters overview The Lane parameters determine the event type shown on each lane. Events are shown as vertical beams (steps) on each lane, aligned with a particular time position in the ruler. You can use the Lane parameters to change the way beams are displayed (see Change the Step Editor grid and step display in Logic Pro). You can also alter the grid resolution for each lane in a Lane Set, which is useful when creating drum patterns.
If the Lane Set already contains a matching lane type (for a particular note pitch, as an example), Logic Pro does not create a superfluous lane. The existing lane is moved into the visible area of the Step Editor in this situation. Note: Make sure that you deselect Auto Define immediately after completing your input. Create lanes for all event types in a region 1. In Logic Pro, select the region. 2. Choose Lanes > Create Multiple Lanes (or use the corresponding key command). 3.
Rearrange the order of lanes • In Logic Pro, grab the name of the lane that you want to move, then drag it (vertically) to the new position. Convert all events on a lane to another event type You can redefine a lane (along with all event steps on the lane). The values of the events are retained, but the event type is changed. 1. In Logic Pro, click the name of the lane you want to convert. All steps on the lane are selected. 2.
Use the Lane inspector in Logic Pro You use the Lane inspector to change the parameters of the selected lane. The most important parameters are Status and First Data Byte. The Status parameter sets the event type for the selected lane. The First Data Byte parameter (shown as “Number” in the image) sets the value for the chosen event type. The appearance of the First Data Byte parameter changes when different event types are chosen.
Change the length of new steps • In Logic Pro, drag the Length parameter values vertically to change the length of events (this primarily applies to note events) to be added, measured in divisions (the left number), and ticks (the right number). You should avoid the use of small tick values because many MIDI devices do not respond quickly enough when note on/note off messages are sent in quick succession, resulting in no note being heard. Set the MIDI channel number for a lane 1.
• Program Change: Defines a lane that is used to create and send MIDI program change events, allowing you to switch between sounds (electric piano and clavinet, for example) midway through a region. • Pitch Bend: Defines a lane for pitch bend information. Important: The chosen Status parameter value (event type) directly affects the behavior (and appearance) of the First Data Byte parameter.
Use Lane Sets in the Step Editor in Logic Pro You can store a combination of lanes as a Lane Set. When a Lane Set is saved, the vertical zoom setting of the Step Editor is stored. You can save as many Lane Sets as required in each project. The Lane Set functions let you limit the Step Editor display to only the required MIDI event types. For example, imagine you have recorded a synthesizer lead MIDI region. You could create a Lane Set that contains individual lanes for each note pitch in the region.
• Choose Lanes > New Lane Set for Current Events (or use the Lane Set pop-up menu, or corresponding key command) to create a new Lane Set, consisting of the currently selected event types. Create a Lane Set for a GM drum kit General MIDI has an established keyboard assignment pattern (a MIDI note map) for drum and percussion sounds. This mapping standard is often followed in non-GM, GS, or XG compliant sound modules, samplers, and synthesizers. In some cases, however, you need to make a few changes.
Rename a Lane Set • In Logic Pro, choose Rename Lane Set from the Lane Set pop-up menu. Enter a new name, then press Return. Clear the current Lane Set Clearing a Lane Set resets a Lane Set to its default, containing a single lane for the Volume controller. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Lanes > Clear Lane Set from the Step Editor menu bar (or use the corresponding key command). • Choose Clear Lane Set from the Lane Set pop-up menu in the inspector.
Open the Audio File Editor Do one of the following: • Click an audio track header, click the Editors button in the control bar, then click File. • Select an audio region in the main window, then choose Open Audio File Editor from the Window menu. • Option-double-click an audio region in the Project Audio Browser. Audio File Editor interface Logic Pro Audio File Editor interface overview The Audio File Editor contains the following elements.
• Ruler: Shows the position of the region in the project. If you have not yet added the audio file to your song, the position marker lines are dotted, indicating no time connection exists. • Region marker: Indicates the length of the region. Edit this beam to adjust the region length. • Anchor: Indicates the absolute start point of the audio file. • Amplitude scale: Indicates the amplitude of the audio waveform as a percentage or in sample units.
Change the Audio File Editor waveform amplitude scale in the Logic Pro You can customize the waveform’s amplitude scale (plotted along the vertical axis), so that it’s displayed in percentage units or sample units. Display the amplitude scale in percentage units • In Logic Pro, choose View > Amplitude Percentage from the Audio File Editor menu bar. Display the amplitude scale in sample units • In Logic Pro, choose View > Amplitude Sample Value from the Audio File Editor menu bar.
• Choose Content from the Audio File Editor’s View > Link submenu, then select a region in the Project Audio Browser. The start position of the section is automatically assigned to the 0 value, or a value of 1 1 1 1 if set to Bars/Beats. The scale unit lines are dotted. Use absolute display mode In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Open the Audio File Editor in the Logic Pro main window. • Choose Content from the Audio File Editor’s View > Link submenu, then select a region in the main window.
Play audio files in the Audio File Editor in Logic Pro There are a number of playback options in the Audio File Editor. Playback of audio files in the Audio File Editor occurs independently of the project playhead position. To hear the audio file in the context of your arrangement, you should use the control bar buttons. The Mixer’s Preview channel strip is used for monitoring in the Audio File Editor. You can access the Preview channel strip by clicking the All button in the Mixer menu bar.
Control playback with the waveform overview In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click and hold at the point where you want playback to begin. The pointer turns into a Preview icon. Release the mouse button to stop playback. • Double-click at the point where you want playback to begin. Scrub audio • In Logic Pro, click and hold the ruler and move the pointer. Audio playback follows the speed and direction of your pointer.
Navigate audio files in the Audio File Editor in Logic Pro You can use the Audio File Editor navigation features in Logic Pro to move to specific parts of an audio file, making selection and editing simpler, faster, and more accurate. Clicking the waveform overview displays the selected area (surrounding the playhead position) in the waveform display. The scroll bars and zoom controls are used in the same way as in other windows.
Make selections in the Audio File Editor Select audio in the Audio File Editor in Logic Pro Editing and processing audio in the Audio File Editor are possible only after you select an area within the waveform display. Any editing or processing you perform only affects the selected area. The start point and length of the currently selected area are shown in the info display— above the waveform overview. The format of the information is based on the setting chosen in the View menu.
Select a section of an audio file • In Logic Pro, click and hold the start or end of the area you want to select in the waveform display, then drag to the right or left. The start point and length are displayed (as sample words) in a help tag while you make your selection. Extend an existing selection area In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Select All Previous (or use the corresponding key command). • Choose Edit > Select All Following (or use the corresponding key command).
Change the start or end point of an existing selection In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Shift-click in the waveform display to move the start or end point. • Press and hold Shift as you drag the start or end point of the selected area in the waveform display. Using either method, the proximity of your click—to the start or end of the selected area— determines whether you change the start or end point boundary. The closest one wins.
Select audio with transient markers in Logic Pro You can use transient markers to select part of an audio file for editing purposes. Note: To do this, you first need to turn on Transient Editing mode in the Audio File Editor. For more information, see Edit audio files with transient markers in Logic Pro. Select a section of an audio file between two transient markers • In Logic Pro, double-click the area of the waveform display between the two transient markers.
• Region Anchor to Previous Transient: The region anchor is moved to the left, up to the preceding transient marker. • Region Anchor to Next Transient: The region anchor is moved to the right, up to the following transient marker. Set project tempo with selected audio in Logic Pro Just like automatic tempo matching functions in the main window, you can set the project tempo to match the current locator positions and selected area in the Audio File Editor.
• Delete and Move: Erases the selection, without placing it in the Clipboard. All data beyond the deleted passage is moved forward—toward the start point of the audio file— to fill the gap. Most audio editing and processing activities in the Audio File Editor are destructive. Destructive activities modify the data of the original audio file, rather than make changes to playback parameters. You can, however, use the Undo feature (see Undo Audio File Editor edits in Logic Pro).
When you turn on Transient Editing mode, the audio file is analyzed for transient events, and all detected transients are marked in the audio file. The level of transient detection confidence is based on the clarity of the transients. If an audio file does not have clear, sharp transients, transients are detected with a lower level of confidence. You can display more or fewer transients by using the Plus and Minus (+/−) buttons.
Create a transient marker in an audio file • In Logic Pro, click the waveform display with the Pencil tool. A transient detection process is started for the audio material around the clicked position, and the transient with the highest energy becomes valid and is marked. If no transient is found in the catch area, a transient marker is created at the clicked position. Move a transient marker in an audio file • In Logic Pro, drag an existing transient marker to another position.
Detect transient markers in an audio file • In the Audio File Editor, choose Audio File > Detect Transients (or use the Detect Transients of Audio File key command). Transients are detected across the audio file, overwriting (after you confirm the action) any manually added or edited transients. Note: You can also detect transients in factory audio Apple Loops. A copy of the loop is saved in the project’s Audio Files folder.
Trim or silence audio files in Logic Pro You use the Trim function to edit areas of the audio file that are not selected. It’s useful for removing unimportant passages—generally silence—from the start and end of your audio files. Trim can also be used to remove portions of audio files that are not used by regions. You can use the Silence command to set all amplitude values to 0, rather than removing (with Cut, Delete, or Trim) all data from the selected area of an audio file.
Normalize audio files in Logic Pro Normalization is a process that raises the maximum level of a digital signal to a specified amount—typically to its highest possible level without introducing distortion. In the Audio File Editor, you can set the maximum level (as a percentage or in decibels) in one of the “Peak at” fields in the Function Settings window (choose Functions > Function Settings or click the Settings button in the Normalize dialog).
Create a fade in or fade out 1. In Logic Pro, select a section of the audio file to determine the length of the fade in or fade out area. 2. Do one of the following: • To create a fade in: Choose Functions > Fade In from the Audio File Editor menu bar (or press Control-I). • To fade passages out automatically: Choose Functions > Fade Out from the Audio File Editor menu bar (or press Control-O).
3. Select the S Curve checkboxes if you want to create S-shaped curves. These settings are automatically stored in Logic Pro preferences when the app is closed, and they apply to all projects. Tip: The Fade tool in the main window offers a flexible, non-destructive fade option. For more information, see Create fades in Logic Pro. Reverse audio in the Audio File Editor in Logic Pro The Reverse command is most commonly used on an entire audio file—to reverse a cymbal sound, for example.
Create Loops in the Audio File Editor in Logic Pro The Audio File Editor Loop commands, available from the Edit menu, are ideal for use with Sampler. You can also use these functions to generate audio files that contain the loop settings in the file header. This allows you to make full use of these files in any app that can read the loop information in the file header. Use the Audio File Editor Loop commands 1.
Revert to a backup file • In Logic Pro, choose Audio File > Revert to Backup from the Audio File Editor menu bar (or press Control-Option-Command-B). This function completely replaces the current audio file with the backup (provided one exists). Important: You cannot reverse this function with Undo. Save a copy with a different name to a specific location 1. In Logic Pro, choose Audio File > Save A Copy of Audio File As from the Audio File Editor menu bar. 2.
Use an external sample editor with Logic Pro You can configure Logic Pro to open an audio region or file in an external sample editing app. Use an external sample editing app 1. In Logic Pro, open Audio preferences by doing one of the following: • Choose Preferences > Audio (or use the Open Audio Preferences key command). • Click the Preferences button in the control bar, then choose Audio from the pop-up menu. 2. Click File Editor, then click the field beside External Sample Editor.
MIDI Transform window Logic Pro MIDI Transform window overview The MIDI Transform window is so-named because it transforms MIDI events—based on conditions, operations, and values you choose—into different types of events, or events with different values. The MIDI Transform window is a powerful tool for edits that would otherwise be impossible (or tedious). For example, imagine an orchestral project that has been sent to you for editing.
Open the MIDI Transform window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Window > Open MIDI Transform (or use the Open Transform key command, default assignment: Command-9). • If you want to transform events that you have selected in one of the MIDI editors, choose a preset from the Functions > MIDI Transform submenu. Note: You can choose the Window > Open MIDI Transform command while you are in a MIDI editor, but you need to manually select a preset.
6. Do one of the following: • To select all events that meet the selection conditions: Click Select Only. The events are not transformed. You can use this option to refine your selection, and make sure that your conditions only affect the events that you truly want to transform. • To transform all selected events, in accordance with the operations settings: Click Operate Only. (The selection conditions have no effect.) This is useful if you want to edit events that you’ve already selected manually.
4. Click the Import Project Settings button at the bottom of the All Files Browser, then select the Transform Sets checkbox. 5. Click the Import button. The names of imported transform sets are retained and added to the bottom of the Presets list. Logic Pro MIDI Transform presets overview The table below describes the operations performed by the MIDI Transform window presets in Logic Pro. Preset Operation Fixed Velocity Sets a fixed velocity for note events.
Preset Operation Reverse Position Reverses the positions of events (usually notes) within a section. Change the Position condition values to alter your selection range. Reverse Pitch Inverts the pitch of all note events. Change the Flip operation value to set a pivot point note number, around which note event pitches are reversed. Transposition Transposes all note events. • Change the Add operation value to the required amount (in semitone steps).
MIDI Transform window parameters Logic Pro MIDI Transform parameters overview The MIDI Transform window in Logic Pro includes the following parameters and elements that can be used to process your MIDI data. See MIDI Transform window examples in Logic Pro. These parameters globally affect the MIDI Transform window appearance and operating mode. Global parameters Logic Pro User Guide • Presets pop-up menu: Choose one of the transform presets or one of your own transform sets.
• • Delete selected events: Deletes all events that match the conditions, leaving all other remaining events unchanged. This mode allows you to use the MIDI Transform window as a programmable erase function. The operation settings are irrelevant in this mode. • Copy selected events, then apply operations: Retains the selected events in their original form, copies them, and applies the operations. Options pop-up menu: Choose additional options from this menu.
Set all other selection conditions • In Logic Pro, open the pop-up menus in the MIDI Transform window (in each column that is needed) to define the selection criteria for events. One or two value fields appear below the pop-up menu, unless Map is chosen. You can assign one of the following value conditions for each of the parameter columns: • “=”: The event must be equal to the value in the field, for the condition to be fulfilled. For example, only note C#3 events meet the condition.
• MapSet: Choosing this setting means that events that match the Status condition (note events, for example) are used to control the map of a subsequent operation—in the Channel, Data Byte 1, Data Byte 2, and Length columns. • The Data Byte 1 value selects the position in the map. • The Data Byte 2 value determines the value at this map position. Internally, Logic Pro sends a meta event pair: #123 for the position, and #122 for the value at this position.
• Range: Parameter values outside the set value range are replaced by the values of the (range) limits (combination of Min and Max). • Random: Random values are generated within the set limits. • +-Rand.: A random value between zero and the set value (positive or negative) is added. • Reverse: The parameter value is reversed within its value range (no value can be set here). • Quantize: The parameter value is quantized to a multiple of the set value.
• The map is visible only when chosen in one of the Operations pop-up menus. Appropriate selection conditions must also be set, or the map does not appear. • The map is universal, which means that it remaps one MIDI value to another. • The map does not know what type of MIDI data is sent to it. It only affects the value of the data. This means that one map can be used to simultaneously alter the pitch, velocity, and length values of incoming note events, for example.
MIDI Transform window examples in Logic Pro This section provides several usage examples for the MIDI Transform window in Logic Pro. Add a mod wheel controller event (#1) with a value that matches the note’s velocity 1. In Logic Pro, choose the following settings in the MIDI Transform window: • Mode pop-up menu: Copy selected events, then apply operations. • Selection Conditions area: Set Status to Note. • Operations area: • Set Position to Add, then enter a value of 1 in the field below it.
Create a transform set that fixes all note velocities to a defined amount 1. In Logic Pro, choose Create Initialized User Set from the Presets pop-up menu in the MIDI Transform window. 2. Set the Status pop-up menu in the Selection Conditions area to “=.” 3. Choose Note from the pop-up menu below. 4. Choose the Fix setting from the Velocity pop-up menu in the Operations area. 5. Change the amount to 127 in the field below the Velocity pop-up menu. Convert MIDI note events to MIDI controller 1 events 1.
Randomly change the pitch of MIDI note events 1. In Logic Pro, choose the following settings in the MIDI Transform window: • Mode pop-up menu: Apply operations to selected events. • Selection Conditions area: Set Status to Note. • Operations area: Set Pitch to +-Random, and set the max deviation from the root note in the field below. If you set a value of 12, you’ll achieve a deviation of one octave up and one down (two octaves, around the root note, in other words). 2. Click Select and Operate.
• Set Position to Inside, then choose the range. 2. Click the Select Only button. All notes in the defined range are selected for you to cut, move, or otherwise modify. Delete volume events (MIDI CC#7) from a MIDI region 1. In Logic Pro, choose the following settings in the MIDI Transform window: • Mode pop-up menu: Delete Selected Events. • Selection Conditions area: • Set Status to Control. • Set Data Byte 1 to a value of 7. 2. Click Select and Operate.
Delete all controller events from a region 1. In Logic Pro, choose the following settings in the MIDI Transform window: • Mode pop-up menu: Delete selected events. • Selection Conditions area: Set Status to Control. 2. Select the MIDI region you want to transform, then click Select and Operate. Create an ascending pitch pattern from notes of one pitch 1. In Logic Pro, choose the following settings in the MIDI Transform window: • Mode pop-up menu: Apply operations to selected events.
Mix a project Overview of mixing in Logic Pro When you mix a project, you balance the different parts and blend them into a cohesive whole. You can also add effects to alter the sound, use routing and grouping to control the signal flow, and use automation to create dynamic changes in your project over time. You do this in the Mixer, which opens below the Tracks area or as a separate window.
Open the Mixer as a separate window • In Logic Pro, choose Window > Open Mixer (or press Command-2). Choose a different Mixer view In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • Click the Single button to show the signal flow of the channel strip that corresponds to the selected track in the Tracks area. • Click the Tracks button to show the signal flow of all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Tracks area.
You can also add Auxiliary and VCA tracks from the Mixer > Options menu, as described in the use aux channel strips and use VCA groups groups sections. You can filter channel strips by type when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, displaying only those channel strips that you need for the task at hand. Logic Pro User Guide • Audio channel strips: Used to control the playback and recording of audio signals on audio tracks.
• VCA channel strips: Represent a VCA group, used to control the volume, or automate a submix, of tracks that are assigned to the VCA fader. • Master channel strip: Used as a global volume control for all output channel strips. The master channel strip changes the gain of all output channel strips without affecting the level relationships between them.
Scroll to specific channel strip types When you have more channel strips than can be viewed in the Mixer at once, scroll the mixer in Logic Pro by doing one of the following: • Select Autoscroll to Selection in the Mixer > View menu. When you select a channel strip, the mixer scrolls to include the selected channel strip. • Choose a channel strip type in the Scroll To submenu in the Mixer > View menu. The Mixer scrolls to the first channel strip of the type selected.
Channel strip controls in Logic Pro Each channel strip has a set of controls (also called components), which varies according to channel strip type. You can adjust the channel strip volume and pan position, mute and solo channel strips, add and adjust effects, and send the output to auxiliary or output channel strips. • Logic Pro User Guide Audio Device controls: The following audio channel strip controls are only visible when you are using a compatible audio interface.
Logic Pro User Guide • Filter button: Activates a low-cut filter across the input. This can reduce the amount of low-frequency rumble recorded, if present in the source signal. • Phase reverse button: Use this button to reverse the phase of the audio signal. This can be useful when recording the same signal with multiple microphones. When the button is lit, the phase is reversed. • Input gain field: Displays the amount of input gain added to the audio signal.
When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, the following additional controls become available: • Gain Reduction meter: Displays the gain reduction of the first Compressor plug-in in the channel strip. If no compressor is inserted, the meter should display the gain reduction of an inserted Limiter or Adaptive Limiter plug-in. • EQ display: Click to insert a Channel EQ into the first unused Insert slot, or to open the topmost inserted Channel or Linear Phase EQ.
Logic Pro User Guide • Control-click a portion of a channel strip not containing a channel strip control and in the Channel Strip Components submenu of the pop-up menu choose a control to display, or deselect a control to remove it from channel strips. • Choose Configure Channel Strip Components from the Mixer > View menu, the channel strip pop-up menu, or press the Configure Channel Strip Components key command and choose which controls you wish to display.
Save a configuration of channel strip controls as default 1. In Logic Pro, choose Configure Channel Strip Components from the Mixer > View menu or Control-click a channel strip and choose Configure Channel Strip Components from the pop-up menu. 2. Choose Store as User Defaults from the Actions menu. Apply a saved configuration of channel strip controls to the Mixer 1.
Set channel strip volume and check levels Peak level display and signal clipping in Logic Pro The peak level display is a numerical display located above the level meter. It updates during playback to show the peak level reached, after the entire signal has been played through to the end, and provides a guide that should be used to set the Volume fader.
In the figure, 1.7 dB is shown in the peak level display when the Volume fader is set to 2.2 dB. 2. Drag the Volume fader down to a value of 0.5 or so. Tip: You may find, however, that a Volume fader value of −1.2 sounds best in the context of the overall mix, and clips only once (by 0.3 dB) during playback. If this is the case, it’s nothing to worry about. Use your ears rather than your eyes as a guide.
Switch between two different volume levels 1. In Logic Pro, select a non-instrument channel strip. 2. Drag the Volume fader to the level you want. 3. Use one of the Toggle Level of Channel Strips key commands listed below. Note that the channel strip’s Volume fader is all the way down. 4. Drag the Volume fader to a different level. The chosen Toggle Level of Channel Strips key command now toggles between the two volume levels.
Change the level meter scale You can customize the level meter using two different scales, when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. 1. Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Display. 2. Click Mixer, then choose a value from the Scale pop-up menu. • Exponential: Provides higher display resolution in the upper level meter range. • Sectional dB-linear: Provides the best possible display resolution across the entire level meter range.
Set the channel strip input format In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Format button to switch between mono and stereo input format. • Click-hold the Format button, then choose an input format from the pop-up menu. Set channel strip pan or balance positions in Logic Pro Instead of having instruments compete with one another in a mix, you can separate elements by positioning audio and instruments in the stereo mix from left to right.
Mono channel strips have a Pan knob by default. Stereo channel strips have a Balance knob by default. Signals at the center of the stereo panorama might sound louder than those panned hard right or hard left. To compensate for this perceived increase in volume at the center position, Logic Pro offers numerous options for pan laws, or amounts of volume reduction for signals panned to the center. The Pan Law pop-up menu is in the General Audio Settings.
Adjust the Stereo Pan knob for a channel strip In Logic Pro, do the following: • To adjust the stereo spread of one channel without affecting the other channel, drag the white handle. For example, if you want to narrow the stereo field of the left channel only, drag the white handle of the left channel vertically closer to the center position. • To invert the right and left channels, Command-click anywhere inside the Stereo Pan knob or ring.
Mute multiple channel strips • In Logic Pro, click-hold a Mute button, then drag the pointer horizontally. The Mute buttons of all swiped channel strips switch to the same state. Solo a channel strip In Logic Pro, click the channel strip’s Solo button. The Solo button turns yellow. The Mute buttons of all unsoloed channel strips flash blue, with the exception of external MIDI channel strips. Solo multiple channel strips • In Logic Pro, click-hold a Solo button, then drag the pointer horizontally.
Work with plug-ins Overview of plug-ins in Logic Pro Logic Pro includes a large collection of built-in effects and instrument plug-ins. It also supports third-party plug-ins in the Audio Units format. Logic Pro also includes a Plug-in Manager that can be used to activate, deactivate, and organize both the built-in plug-ins and Audio Units plug-ins. Plug-ins can be broken down into the following categories: • Audio effects: Can be inserted in audio, instrument, aux, and output channel strips.
Add, remove, move, and copy plug-ins in Logic Pro You can add plug-ins, replace a plug-in with a different one, and remove plug-ins from a channel strip. You can also move, copy, and bypass plug-ins. If you’re unhappy with any of your plug-in adjustments, you can undo them. Add a MIDI effect plug-in In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • Click the MIDI Effect slot, then choose a plug-in from the pop-up menu.
Add an audio effect plug-in In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click an Audio Effect slot, then choose a plug-in from the pop-up menu. The last visible empty Audio Effect slot in a channel strip is shown at half its height; use it in the same way. • Option-click an Audio Effect slot. You can now choose legacy plug-ins from the pop-up menu.
Add an instrument plug-in In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Instrument slot, then choose a plug-in from the pop-up menu. • Option-click an Instrument slot. You can now choose legacy plug-ins from the pop-up menu. Replace a plug-in • Logic Pro User Guide In Logic Pro, place the pointer over the plug-in slot, click the arrows that appear to the right, then choose a plug-in to replace the existing one.
Remove a plug-in • In Logic Pro, place the pointer over the plug-in slot, click the arrows that appear to the right, then choose No Plug-in from the pop-up menu. Move a plug-in • In Logic Pro, drag the plug-in up or down in the channel strip, or to another channel strip. For guidance, use the colored line that appears when moving the plug-in. Copy a plug-in • Logic Pro User Guide In Logic Pro, press and hold Option and drag the plug-in to an unused slot.
Bypass a plug-in If you want to deactivate a plug-in, but don’t want to remove it from the channel strip, you can bypass it. Bypassed plug-ins don’t drain system resources. • • In Logic Pro, to bypass a single plug-in, do one of the following: • Place the pointer over the plug-in slot, then click the Bypass button that appears to the left. • Option-click the plug-in slot.
Insert an Alchemy plug-in (single files only) Dragging content to one of the available Alchemy zones inserts an Alchemy instrument plug-in using the type of synthesis you choose: Additive, Granular, or Spectral. See the Alchemy chapter in Logic Pro Instruments. Insert a Drum Machine Designer plug-in (single or multiple files) Dragging content to the Drum Machine Designer zone inserts a Drum Machine Designer instrument plug-in using the sliced audio content, and a MIDI region to trigger the slices.
• Click a plug-in slot on an inactive channel strip and select “Activate Plug-ins” from the pop-up menu. For more information on the “Only load plug-ins needed for project playback” setting, see General Project Settings. Use the Channel EQ in Logic Pro The Channel EQ is an audio effect, like any other.
Note: Shift-Option-click the EQ area to insert the Linear Phase EQ in the first Audio Effect slot, and move all existing plug-ins one slot down. Any existing automation data is redirected. • If Audio Effect slot 1 is used: Double-click the EQ area. The Channel EQ is inserted in the next available (unused) slot. Note: Shift–double-click the EQ area to insert the Linear Phase EQ in the next available (unused) slot.
Undo a plug-in parameter change In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Undo button in the plug-in window header. • Choose Edit > Undo (or press Command-Z). Redo a plug-in parameter change In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Redo button in the plug-in window header. • Choose Edit > Undo (or press Shift-Command-Z). Hide or show the plug-in window header • In Logic Pro, click the icon at the top-right corner of the plug-in window.
Switch the plug-in parameter view • In Logic Pro, choose Editor or Controls from the plug-in window’s View pop-up menu. Editor view shows the plug-in’s graphical interface, if it offers one. Controls view displays all plug-in functions as a set of horizontal sliders, with numerical fields to the left of each parameter. These fields are used for both the display and entry of data.
The Link mode affects the entire project—it is not possible to have the Link mode set differently in different plug-in windows of the same project. The Link mode can either be set to Single for the entire project or for Multi mode for one or more rows of plug-ins.
Choose the next or previous plug-in setting In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • • In the plug-in window, do one of the following: • Click the left arrow to choose the previous setting, or the right arrow to choose the next setting. • Open the Settings pop-up menu, then choose Next Setting or Previous Setting.
Reset a plug-in setting • In the Logic Pro plug-in window, open the Settings pop-up menu, then choose Reset Setting. Save a plug-in setting In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • • In the plug-in window, do one of the following: • Open the Settings pop-up menu, then choose Save Setting. This command overwrites the existing plug-in setting. • Open the Settings pop-up menu, then choose Save Setting As. Name and save the new setting.
Logic Pro offers two types of plug-in latency compensation. If you insert latency-causing plug-ins only on audio and instrument channel strips, you can choose plug-in latency compensation for only audio and instrument tracks. Logic Pro achieves this by predelaying audio and MIDI regions on audio and instrument tracks. This results in snappy playback response.
Work with Audio Units plug-ins In addition to the audio effect and instrument plug-ins included with Logic Pro, you can use third-party plug-ins in the Audio Units format. Unlike the included plug-ins, Audio Units need to first be installed onto your computer for you to use them. Some Audio Units may already be installed on your computer, and many more are available from other sources.
What to do if an Audio Units plug-in isn’t working Apple works with third-party developers to ensure that their Audio Units plug-ins are fully compatible with Logic Pro. Most Audio Units you install on your computer should not require anything other than installation—and if they are copy protected, authorization—to function properly. However, you may install Audio Units that do not appear in the plug-in submenus or work as expected.
Use the Plug-in Manager in Logic Pro Logic Pro uses a validation tool to ensure that only plug-ins that fully comply with the Audio Units plug-in specification are used in Logic Pro. This minimizes problems that may be caused by plug-ins not built into Logic Pro. The validation process takes place automatically when Logic Pro is first opened, when an updated version of Logic Pro is installed, and when you install new plug-ins or update existing ones.
Search for plug-ins by name • In Logic Pro, enter a search term in the search field, then press Return. Any plug-ins that match your search term are displayed in the results list. Manually enable Audio Units plug-ins that fail the validation test 1. In Logic Pro, select Show All in the upper-left part of the Plug-in Manager window. 2. Select the checkbox by the plug-in name in the Use column. You should be aware that plug-ins that fail the validation test can cause problems.
Work with channel strip settings in Logic Pro Channel strip settings (CST files) are specific to each channel strip type. Instrument channel strips feature a number of instrument settings, separated into instrument, GarageBand, and Jam Pack categories. Audio channel strips offer effect routings optimized for particular instrument, vocal, and other processing tasks. Similarly, output and auxiliary channel strips provide channel strip settings for particular mastering or sweetening processes.
Paste only the plug-ins from a channel strip • In Logic Pro, click the Setting button at the top of the channel strip, then choose Paste Plug-ins Only from the pop-up menu. Paste only the sends from a channel strip • In Logic Pro, click the Setting button at the top of the channel strip, then choose Paste Sends Only from the pop-up menu.
3. In the dialog that appears, enter a performance name, choose a program change number, then click OK. 4. Send the program change number from your MIDI controller. When a channel strip receives a program change message that corresponds to an assigned performance number, it loads this performance. All saved performances are shown in the Performance folder of the Settings pop-up menu.
Route audio via send effects in Logic Pro You use send effects when you want to isolate effect plug-ins from a channel strip’s signal flow, or when you want to use the same effect on more than one channel strip. By creating a send, you split the channel strip’s signal. The channel strip’s main signal continues its route to the chosen output. The other part of the signal is routed down a parallel path, via a bus to an aux channel strip.
The channel strip signal is split and routed to three separate effects, one on each aux channel strip. These three independent signals are then sent back from the respective aux channel strips and combined into an output stream from the original channel strip. You can create up to eight sends on each audio, instrument, or aux channel strip. You use the Send pop-up menu to configure where in the channel strip signal the send occurs, and to set the destination for the parallel routing of the send.
Choose a destination for a send • In Logic Pro, choose a Bus from the submenu of the Send pop-up menu. If you have named the aux channel strip that a bus is sending to, the name appears beside the bus number. Highlight the destination of a send • In Logic Pro, Shift-click the send. Any aux channel strips to which the send is routing flash three times. Note: Double-clicking a send doesn’t affect the current selection.
• Pre Fader: The signal is sent before the fader and Pan knob; the send signal is not affected by volume or pan adjustments. When a send is Pre Fader the Send knob moves to the left of the Send pop-up menu, and the Send knob ring is blue. Adjust panning for sends independently in Logic Pro Sometimes you may want to adjust the stereo pan that a send is routing to an aux separately from the panning of the channel strip.
Note: Copy Pan to Send is only available in Independent Pan mode. Set Sends on Faders mode for a send In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • From the Send pop-up menu, choose Sends on Faders. • Control-click an aux track, then choose Sends on Faders from the shortcut menu. • Use the Sends on Faders key command.
Copy the current channel strip fader volume to the send level You can copy fader volume from a channel strip directly to a send using the Copy Fader to Send command. Using this command, you can quickly set the level for a send without having to first enter Sends on Faders mode and make adjustments. • In Logic Pro, from the Send pop-up menu, choose Copy Fader to Send.
Note: There are some similarities between using aux channel strips as subgroups and working with Mixer groups. You can control the group/subgroup properties from one set of channel strip controls. However, Mixer groups are used to control channel strip group properties, and not the signal flow. Create a subgroup using an aux channel strip 1. In Logic Pro, select multiple channel strips by doing one of the following: • Shift-click the channel strips you want to group.
Use multi-output instruments in Logic Pro There are two reasons to use multi-output instruments in your mix: • To process each sound individually in a drum kit, for example, with different effects • To route the different software instrument outputs to different outputs on your audio interface Logic Pro supports the multiple outputs of Drum Kit Designer, Sampler, Ultrabeat, and all Audio Unit instruments.
3. In the Mixer, click the Add button (+) of the instrument channel strip that you inserted the multi-output instrument into. Note: The Add button (+) appears only on multi-output instrument channel strips. An aux channel strip is created to the right of the multi-output instrument channel strip. Use this new channel strip to isolate and route a sound for independent mixing and processing. 4.
Use output channel strips in Logic Pro By default, a project contains one output channel strip that takes the signal from all the individual tracks in the project. You add additional output channel strips to assign submixes, or to prevent them from being controlled by the master channel strip. When using output channel strips in this way, you can’t apply any further send effects to the signal flow, as you would using aux channel strips.
Define a channel strip’s stereo output in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, you can choose the physical output pair on which the stereo output is played. By default, it’s played on Stereo Output (Output 1-2). However, you can easily change the stereo output preference—if you’re exchanging projects with another studio that uses a different output pair, for example. You can also define the output pair for individual channel strips in the Mixer. Define the stereo output for a channel strip 1.
Create tracks for signal flow channel strips in Logic Pro Signal flow channel strips, which include aux and output channel strips, do not contain regions, but serve to route the signals from other channel strips. Signal flow channel strips do not normally appear in the Tracks area. However, you can add signal flow channel strips to the Tracks area if, for example, you want to automate parameters on them.
Groups inspector in Logic Pro You use the Groups inspector to define the behavior of each Mixer group. The Groups inspector appears in the Track inspector when one or more groups have been created, and it can be opened as a floating window as well. It contains the following settings: Logic Pro User Guide • “Groups active” checkbox: Enables or disables all groups and group controls. Turn off this setting to edit track parameters outside of all groups.
• Pan checkbox: When selected, changing the Pan knob of one track changes the Pan knob of all tracks in the group. The channel strips continue to maintain their relative pan positions. • Solo checkbox: When selected, changing the solo state of one track changes the solo state of all tracks in the group. • Record checkbox: When selected, changing the record-enabled state of one track changes the record-enabled state of all tracks in the group.
Add a channel strip to multiple groups • In Logic Pro, click the channel strip’s Group slot, then press and hold Shift while choosing a group from the pop-up menu. Quickly add the most recent group setting to another channel strip • In Logic Pro, press and hold Option and click the channel strip’s Group slot. The most recently accessed group setting—including the setting for overlapping groups—is applied to the current channel strip.
Automate groups in Logic Pro When you automate your mix functions (volume, pan, mute, sends, and so on), any channel strip group member can act as the mix automation master for that group. When you use that group member to write an automation parameter value, it’s also written for the other group members, depending on their automation mode. The data is written individually for each channel strip.
Use VCA groups in the Logic Pro Mixer Hardware mixing desks sometimes contain separate channels designed specifically to enable the engineer to submix—in other words, to route and control the signal flow of multiple channels at once using a single channel strip. Analog mixing desks often utilize Voltage Controlled Amplifiers (VCAs) in their circuitry for these submix channels, hence the name “VCA groups” for this kind of channel strip.
Surround panning in the Mixer in Logic Pro You can mixdown in several surround formats, even if your audio hardware offers only two outputs. Because it would be difficult to mix or record in surround format without being able to hear the result, it’s best not to select this option if you’re monitoring or mixing through stereo speakers. All audio, instrument, and aux channel strips can be individually set to different surround formats.
In theory, the spatial positioning of any sonic experience can be reproduced during playback, so no special techniques need to be employed during recording. There is, however, one drawback to this approach: every person has differently shaped ears and different body and head proportions, all of which influence the way sound signals arrive at the eardrum—not to mention aspects such as hearing loss, subjective responses to the sounds being heard, and so on.
You can control the panning effect directly on the channel strip by using the Binaural Pan knob to position the panning pucks on the panning plane. You can also access the Binaural panning pucks and even more Binaural panning parameters in the Binaural window. These are the window’s main elements: Logic Pro User Guide • Angle, Elevation, Distance: Information fields that adjust automatically when changes are made to the puck positions.
Adjust a channel strip’s Binaural Pan knob You can make basic adjustments to the binaural pan field using the channel strip Binaural knob. In Logic Pro, do the following: • Drag the center puck in the panning plane to adjust the position of the signal. • Option-click in the panning plane to reset the center puck to center front position and the spread to 90˚. • Drag the spread in the panning field to adjust its pan position. Open the Binaural Panner window 1.
Control the binaural pan position 1. In Logic Pro, drag the left or right puck (panning pucks) to make the stereo image wider or narrower. The pucks also work on a second axis—up and down—relative to the third puck. 2. Drag the third puck (the direction puck) to determine the forward and backward direction. As you adjust the direction puck, the two panning pucks move accordingly. The Angle, Elevation, Distance, and Spread values also change. 3.
• If set to Spherical, the results are placed on a virtual sphere. If it helps, imagine the sphere as a virtual head. When the direction puck is placed in the top half of the circular plane, the sound is in front of the listener. As the direction puck is moved toward the lower half of the plane, the sound passes up, and over your head, and ends up behind the listener. 4. Set the size of the plane or sphere by doing one of the following: • Drag the Size slider.
Work with MIDI channel strips Overview of MIDI channel strips in Logic Pro MIDI channel strips in the Mixer work as remote controls for the mixing parameters of your MIDI-controlled sound modules and synthesizers, such as volume and pan. Logic Pro User Guide • Program buttons: Use to select a sound by name. Click one to open a pop-up menu that contains either GM sound names (the default setting) or sound names created or imported by the user.
View the MIDI channel strip controls (if hidden) • In Logic Pro, choose View > MIDI Channel Strip Components from the Mixer menu bar, then choose a component. The basic channel strip controls, such as volume, pan, and mute, are always shown on MIDI channel strips. Adjust MIDI channel strips in Logic Pro On MIDI channel strips, you can adjust the volume level and pan position, control MIDI data transmission, and assign controller data.
Save and restore MIDI channel strip settings in Logic Pro MIDI channel strip settings in the Mixer directly affect the Track inspector. The current settings of all channel strips are saved with the project. If the active settings of your sound module are not maintained when you switch it off (some devices reset to default values), any Logic Pro Mixer settings that affect the unit are lost.
Switch between narrow and wide channel strips In Logic Pro, do either of the following: • Click the Narrow Channel Strips button to reduce the width of channel strips. • Click the Wide Channel Strips button to increase the width of channel strips. Hide or show the Mixer legend • In Logic Pro, choose View > Hide Legend from the Mixer menu bar. Choose View > Show Legend to show it again.
Enter a folder In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Double-click the folder track in the Mixer. • Double-click the folder region in the Tracks area. • Select the folder, then use the Go Into Folder or Region key command. The Mixer now displays only those channel strips that are in the folder track. Exit the folder In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the Display Level button at the left side of the Mixer or Tracks area. • Double-click the Tracks area background.
View control surface bars in the Logic Pro Mixer You can see which tracks are accessed by control surfaces connected to your system. View control surface bars in the Mixer Do one of the following: • In Logic Pro, choose View > Channel Strip Components > Control Surface Bars from the Mixer menu bar. • Control-click the Mixer, then choose Control Surface Bars from the shortcut menu.
Open the I/O Labels window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Mix > I/O Labels. • Choose Options > I/O Labels from the Mixer menu bar. Choose a device from the Device pop-up menu, if you have multiple audio interfaces. I/O labels can be individually defined for each hardware driver type, but are valid for all projects. Edit the labels for Input, Output, and Send slots 1. In Logic Pro, select the button in the User column. 2.
Undo and redo Mixer and plug-in adjustments in Logic Pro Using the Mixer Undo and Redo commands and the Undo History, you can undo and redo adjustments that you make to channel strips and plug-ins in the Mixer. Undoing or Redoing Mixer and plug-in adjustments is exactly like undoing adjustments in other areas of Logic Pro. The main difference is in the Undo History, where you can choose to include or remove changes from the Mixer and plug-ins from the Undo History action list.
Automate mix and effects settings Overview of automation in Logic Pro Automation refers to recording, editing, and playing back the movements of faders, knobs, and switches. Using automation, you can create changes over time to volume, pan, and other settings. You can add automation to all track types. Each track in your project has automation curves for volume and pan, and you can add curves to automate plug-in settings.
Convert between types of automation In Logic Pro, choose one of the following commands from the Mix > Convert Automation submenu: • Convert Visible Track Automation to Region Automation: Converts displayed trackbased automation to region-based automation. • Convert Visible Region Automation to Track Automation: Converts displayed regionbased automation to track-based automation.
For Read mode, however, the button and text color display the current state of automation and if there is automation data present: • Green text on a gray background = automation is on but there is no existing automation data to display • White text on a green background = automation is on and there is existing automation data to display Any existing automation is displayed on the track or within the regions.
Choose the parameter to automate In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose a parameter from the Automation Parameter pop-up menu in the track header. • Control-click the track lane, then choose an automation parameter from the Automation Parameter pop-up menu in the shortcut menu that appears. The parameter currently shown in the automation lane is shown at the top of the Automation Parameter pop-up menu. Volume, Pan, Solo, and Mute appear in the “Main” submenu.
Note: Logic Pro offers more than two dozen unassigned key commands that you can use to select the automation curves of various region-based automation parameters directly. You can assign these key commands to keys, controllers, or a Touch Pad using the Key Commands window. When you select one or more regions and then use one of these key commands, the chosen automation curve will be shown on all tracks with regions selected.
2. Choose the parameter that you want to automate from the Automation Parameter popup menu in the track header. 3. To add additional subtracks, click the Plus button (+) that appears when you place the pointer over the track header. All additional automation subtracks are revealed. Each additional subtrack is set to an automation parameter type that’s already recorded but not currently shown. The active automation parameter remains on the main track.
Choose automation modes in Logic Pro Automation modes determine how automation tracks are treated. Automation is either being read or being written. You can independently set the automation mode for each track. You can also trim automation values and record relative automation data. • Read: Plays back all automation that exists on the track. If volume data exists, for example, the Volume fader moves during playback, following the prerecorded automation on the track.
Set the automation modes using key commands In Logic Pro, you can set the automation mode using the following key commands: • Toggle Current Track Automation Off/Read • Set Current Track to Automation Read • Toggle Current Track Automation Touch/Read • Toggle Current Track Automation Latch/Read • Toggle Current Track Automation Write/Read • Set All Tracks to Automation Off • Set All Tracks to Automation Read • Set All Tracks to Automation Touch • Set All Tracks to Automation Latch • Set A
Use Relative Automation mode 1. In Logic Pro, choose Touch, Latch, or Write from the Automation Mode pop-up menu in the track header or the track’s channel strip. 2. Choose Relative from the Automation Mode pop-up menu in the track header or the track’s channel strip. Either R-Touch, R-Latch, or R-Write appears in the Automation Mode display. The Volume fader moves to a center position and the fader becomes transparent.
Add automation to tracks Add and adjust automation points in Logic Pro To create changes over time to volume, pan, and effects settings, you add automation points to a track’s automation curve at different places, and then adjust the automation points so the value of the setting changes. You can adjust automation points by moving them up or down to a new value or by moving them left or right to a new point in the timeline. Numerical values are displayed alongside each automation point.
Add a series of automation points using the Pencil Tool You can use the Pencil Tool to draw multiple automation points on an automation curve. • In Logic Pro, click-drag or Option-click-drag the Pencil Tool across the automation curve. The organization of automation points depends upon the Pencil Tool setting in the Automation preferences.
Adjust MIDI values in region-based automation 1. In Logic Pro, with a MIDI data parameter showing in the Automation Parameter pop-up menu, select one more more MIDI values. 2. Drag up or down to change its value. Adjust an automation point range in Logic Pro You can adjust the automation data for an entire track in one go. If the track is part of a group, and if the relevant settings are selected in the Groups inspector, the track automation data across all tracks in the group adjusts accordingly.
Record live automation in Logic Pro When either Touch, Latch, or Write mode is active, you can record automation in record or playback mode. When you touch or move a parameter, the automation lane displays the chosen parameter and automation is recorded at the current point in the project as the playhead moves, based on the chosen mode. When not recording or playing, the modes are ignored, and no data is written if a control is moved.
Select, copy, move, and delete automation Select, copy, and move automation in Logic Pro After you create automation points and curves, you can easily change things to meet your needs. You can copy automation within a track or between tracks and can move automation within a track. When moving regions, you can choose whether or not to move any existing automation with it.
Copy automation between tracks 1. In Logic Pro, hold down Shift while dragging a selection within the automation area. 2. Choose Edit > Copy (or use the corresponding key command). 3. Select the track you want to copy the automation to. 4. Choose Edit > Paste (or use the corresponding key command). Move automation • In Logic Pro, select the points or curves you want to move, then drag them horizontally or vertically. Any existing points in the target location are deleted.
Move regions with or without automation • • In Logic Pro, choose one of the following Move Automation with Regions options in the Preferences > Automation pane: • Never: Does not move automation when you move regions. • Always: Always moves automation when you move regions. The automation area encompassed by the region boundaries is moved. • Ask: A dialog prompts you to move the automation—or leave it where it is—whenever you move a region.
Change an automation curve into stepped automation Normally, an automation curve between two automation points represents continuously changing parameter values. Using the Automation Curve tool, you can change any automation curve into stepped automation. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Option-click an automation curve with the Automation Curve tool. Option-click the automation curve with the Automation Curve tool again to return the automation curve to its previous state.
• Delete Redundant Automation Points: Removes all redundant automation points on all regions and tracks. • Delete All Track Automation: Removes all automation from all tracks. Note: You can also use key commands for all the delete commands in the Mix menu except Delete All Track Automation. Snap automation to grid position in Logic Pro You can snap track automation to grid positions.
Offset automation when Snap Automation is active 1. In Logic Pro, choose Automation Snap Offset from the Snap pop-up menu. 2. Adjust the Snap Offset parameter in tick values (can be positive or negative). All automation on all tracks is offset by the chosen number of ticks. Edit in the Automation Event List in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can edit automation in a dedicated Automation Event List window.
Write automation with controllers in Logic Pro Logic Pro provides support for a number of dedicated control surfaces that make writing and editing track automation fast, efficient, and easy. Depending on the facilities available, you can simultaneously write automation for several channels, or multiple plug-in parameters. Any MIDI controller—such as the modulation wheel, or a front panel slider or knob on your MIDI keyboard—can be used to write automation.
Use Smart Controls Logic Pro Smart Controls overview With Smart Controls, you can control the sound of the selected track using a set of onscreen controls. Smart Controls can control both channel strip and plug-in parameters, including software instruments (on software instrument tracks) and effects (on audio, software instrument, and Drummer tracks). Smart Controls provide a quicker alternative to opening plug-in windows and adjusting individual parameters.
Open the Smart Controls pane in the main window • If your Mac has a Touch Bar, select a track in the Logic Pro Tracks area, then click the Smart Controls button . Open the Smart Controls as a separate window • In Logic Pro, choose Window > Open Smart Controls. Adjust screen controls using the Touch Bar 1. In Logic Pro, tap the Mode button on the left side of the Touch Bar, then tap the Smart Controls button . 2.
Choose a Smart Control layout in Logic Pro Each Smart Control features a layout, with a background graphic and a set of screen controls in a defined order. Each layout is designed for a particular type of instrument or track. If the selected track doesn’t contain plug-ins, an empty layout is displayed. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can choose a different layout for the current Smart Control to change the number or arrangement of screen controls.
Automatic MIDI controller assignment in Logic Pro Logic Pro supports automatic assignment of hardware controls for a variety of USB MIDI controllers. When a supported USB MIDI controller is connected, the knobs, sliders, and other hardware controls on the controller are automatically assigned to Smart Controls and other functions in Logic Pro. • Buttons are assigned to button screen controls.
Map screen controls in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can map screen controls to channel strip and plug-in parameters for the selected track. Each screen control can be mapped to one or more channel strip or plug-in parameters for the selected track. Parameter mappings are saved with the patch. You can map screen controls using either the Learn process, or the Parameter pop-up menu in the Smart Control inspector.
Map a screen control using the Parameter Mapping pop-up menu 1. In Logic Pro, in the Smart Controls pane, click the the Inspector button Controls menu bar. in the Smart 2. Select a screen control. 3. In the Smart Control inspector, click the Parameter Mapping disclosure triangle. 4. In the Parameter Mapping area, click the parameter name (if the screen control is already mapped) or the word Unmapped, then choose a channel strip or plug-in parameter from the Parameter Mapping pop-up menu.
Copy a mapping 1. In Logic Pro, in the Smart Controls pane, click the Inspector button Controls menu bar. in the Smart 2. Select the screen control. 3. In the Smart Control inspector, click a mapping, then choose Copy Mapping from the Parameter Mapping pop-up menu. 4. Click a different parameter name, then choose Paste Mapping. The copied parameter replaces the selected one. Copy all mappings for a screen control 1. In Logic Pro, in the Smart Controls pane, click the Inspector button Controls menu bar.
Delete a mapping 1. In Logic Pro, in the Smart Controls pane, click the Inspector button Controls menu bar. in the Smart 2. Select the screen control. 3. In the Smart Control inspector, click a mapping, then choose Delete Mapping from the Parameter Mapping pop-up menu. After you map a screen control, you can edit mapping parameters, and scale parameter values using parameter mapping graphs. You can also map screen controls automatically.
The Parameter graph window opens. The title of the graph window shows the parameter name. The graph shows the range of input values on the horizontal (x) axis, moving from left to right, and the range of output values on the vertical (y) axis, moving from bottom to top. In the graph window, you have several ways of working: you can edit the graph curve directly, set the graph to use one of the predefined curves, or change the minimum and maximum range values for the graph. Edit the graph 1.
Copy the graph • In Logic Pro, click the Copy button on the right side of the graph window. Paste a copied graph • In Logic Pro, click the Paste button on the right side of the graph window. Open the plug-in window for a screen control in Logic Pro For screen controls that are mapped to a plug-in, you can open the plug-in window used by the screen control from within the Smart Controls pane.
Use articulation IDs to change articulations in Logic Pro Some software instruments that use the Sampler software instrument, including drummers, strings, and other orchestral instruments, provide multiple articulations for MIDI notes using articulation IDs. For patches containing these software instruments, you can map a screen control to the Articulation ID parameter and use it to change note articulations in real time while you play the patch. Map a screen control to the Articulation ID parameter 1.
The External Assignment area opens. If the selected screen control currently has no assignment, the Name field shows Unassigned. If the selected screen control has an assignment, the Name field shows the name of the assignment. 4. Click the Learn button. 5. On your MIDI device, move the control you want to assign. 6. While the Learn process is active, you can learn additional controller assignments by selecting another screen control and moving the hardware control you want to assign to it. 7.
Turn on the Arpeggiator • In Logic Pro, click the Arpeggiator button in the Smart Controls menu bar. The Arpeggiator pop-up menu appears in the menu bar. Turning on the Arpeggiator inserts the Arpeggiator plug-in on the channel strip, after which you can use the Arpeggiator button to bypass the Arpeggiator. You can also open the Arpeggiator plug-in from the channel strip. Choose an Arpeggiator preset • In Logic Pro, choose a preset from the Arpeggiator pop-up menu in the Smart Controls menu bar.
Automate screen control movements in Logic Pro You can automate the movements of screen controls, just as you can automate plug-in parameters. When you automate a screen control, the actual screen control movements, rather than underlying parameter values, are written. Automation for multi-mapped screen controls is retained even when the underlying plugin is changed or removed. However, if all of the plug-ins to which the screen control is mapped are removed, the automation is deleted.
Use Live Loops Logic Pro Live Loops overview Live Loops lets you arrange and play with musical ideas in real time in a grid of cells, each containing a musical phrase or loop. You can start and stop cells freely while keeping everything in sync with the beat and the project tempo. Each grid row uses the same signal routing and channel strip settings as the adjacent track in the Tracks area. Cells in grid columns, called scenes, can be triggered together to act as musical sections.
You can record to both audio and software instrument cells, add regions or Apple Loops to the Live Loops grid, and record a Live Loops performance as regions to the Tracks area. Logic Pro provides several starter grids containing instruments and prerecorded cells to help you get started. Show the Live Loops grid You can view either the Live Loops grid or Tracks view, or both at the same time.
Create a Live Loops project 1. Choose File > New from Template (or press Command-N). 2. In the Project Chooser, select an option from the list on the left: • To create a new, empty Live Loops project: Click New Project, then select Live Loops. • To open a Live Loops starter grid: Click Starter Grids, select the project you want to open, then click Choose.
Start and stop Live Loops cells in Logic Pro You can start and stop cells individually, or start and stop all the cells in a scene (a column in the grid) simultaneously. Only one cell can play on a track at any time. You can select one or more cells in different scenes and queue them to play together. While a cell is playing, a circular indicator in the middle of the cell shows the current playback position. If cell looping is turned off, a rectangular indicator shows the current playback position.
Play cells In Logic Pro, do either of the following: • Start a cell: Click the Play button in the center of a cell. • Start all the cells in a scene: Click the trigger • Start all selected cells: Use the Play Live Loops key command (Return). below a scene. When cells are playing, the Play buttons in the cells become Stop buttons. Stop cell playback In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • • • • Logic Pro User Guide Stop playback of a cell: • Click the Stop button of the playing cell.
Queue cells and scenes You can queue cells and scenes to start playing when project playback starts or when you want cells in different scenes to start at the same time. Playing cells are automatically queued when you stop a project. You can then move the playhead and restart the queued cells at a different project position. In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • Queue a cell: Option-click the center of the cell you want to queue.
Set the Quantize Start value You can set the Quantize Start value for the entire Live Loops grid, for a scene, or for individual cells, and change it while cells are playing. When you trigger a scene, all cells in the scene use the Quantize Start value for that scene. When you start or stop individual cells, each cell uses its own Quantize Start value.
In addition to bar and beat values, you can also choose the following Quantize Start options: • Cell End: If another cell in the same row is playing, the triggered cell starts when the playing cell reaches the end of the loop. • Off: Cells start and stop when you click them, regardless of the Quantize Start value. Note that this can lead to cells playing out of sync. • Global: The cell or scene follows the Quantize Start value of the grid.
Change the start behavior of a cell The Play From setting determines the start behavior of a cell. By default, cells start playing from the Start position. However, depending on the content and timing of your music, you can choose other start behavior settings to create interesting transitions between cells.
If you plan to record audio without a constant tempo to a cell, it is recommended that you record the audio to an audio track in the Tracks area using the Smart Tempo functions in Logic Pro. Once the audio region is tagged with correct tempo information, you can add the region to an audio cell and have it play at a constant tempo.
Copy regions to Live Loops based on selection Using the Copy to Live Loops key command in Logic Pro, you can copy various combinations of regions to new scenes, depending on what you have selected in the Tracks area. This is especially useful for populating a Live Loops grid in an existing project containing many different regions, sections, or markers.
Extract loops from audio cells Logic Pro can analyze the musical and sonic characteristics of a longer audio file in an audio cell and extract the best sounding loops to empty cells (up to 10) on the same track. You can choose the length of loops you want to extract, or let Logic Pro extract the best loops of any size. By default, Logic Pro examines only the detected downbeat positions for potential loop start points.
Create cells You can create new cells and then edit them in the Cell Editor or record audio and MIDI. Software instrument tracks can contain MIDI and pattern cells. • In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • To create an audio cell: Control-click an empty cell on an audio track, then choose Create Cell. • To create a MIDI cell: Control-click an empty cell on a software instrument track, then choose Create MIDI Cell.
Create an Apple Loop from a cell You can create Apple Loops from your own audio and software instrument cell recordings. When you create an Apple Loop from a cell, it’s added to the Apple Loops library and appears in the Loop Browser, so that you can use it in other projects. • In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Control-click a cell, then choose Export > Add to Loop Library from the shortcut menu. • Select a cell, then choose File > Export > Region to Loop Library.
Set the recording mode The recording mode determines what happens to existing cell content when you record to a cell. You can replace a previous recording or create multiple takes. With software instruments, you can also record continuously in a loop, merging each pass in a single cell. This can be useful for creating drum patterns or melodies on the fly. You can choose one of three recording modes: • Takes: Each new recording is added to a take folder in the cell.
• Select the cell you want to record to, then choose a setting from the Rec-Length pop-up menu in the Cell inspector. • Control-click the cell you want to record to, choose Recording > Rec-Length, then choose a setting from the submenu. Set the At Rec-End action The At Rec-End action determines what happens at the end of a recording pass.
Record to a cell 1. In Logic Pro, click the Record Enable button in the track header of the track containing the cell you want to record to. 2. Set the metronome and count-in for recording if desired. 3. Select a cell and set the parameters for Recording, Rec-Length, and At Rec-End in the Cell inspector if necessary. 4. Do any of the following: • Move the pointer over an empty cell and click the Cell Record button in the center of the cell.
4. In the Cell inspector, set the default values, including default cell length, recording settings, or quantize value for MIDI recordings. Note: Some default settings you make in the Cell inspector apply to both newly recorded cells and regions of the specified type. Set recording defaults for an individual cell You can also set defaults for individual cells.
Rename takes 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to rename from the Take Folder pop-up menu. 2. Choose Rename Take from the Take Folder pop-up menu. 3. Enter the new name in the dialog that appears, then click OK. Delete takes 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to delete from the Take Folder pop-up menu. 2. Choose Delete Take from the Take Folder pop-up menu. Delete all but the currently active take 1. In Logic Pro, choose the take you want to keep from the Take Folder pop-up menu. 2.
Change loop settings for cells in Live Loops for Logic Pro When you select a cell, you can change the loop settings in the Cell inspector. You can create interesting variations by changing the following settings: • Start: Determines the initial starting position of the cell. By default, this is the same as the Loop Start setting, but you can change it so the cell starts at a different place initially than when it loops.
Change the loop start position of a cell 1. In Logic Pro, select a cell. 2. In the Cell inspector, click the disclosure triangle next to Play From to view the loop start position, then do one of the following: • Double-click the loop start position, then enter a new value. Press Return to exit the field. • Drag the specific position unit vertically. Release the mouse button when you’re finished.
Set the Quantize Loop Start position If the start and loop start positions are different, you can choose which position should hit an upcoming quantize start point when you trigger a cell. This can be useful if the start position is set to an upbeat position, for example.
Change the resolution of the position and length values You can change the resolution shown for position and length values from the View menu, or from the shortcut menu in the Cell inspector. 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose View > Live Loops: Position and Length Resolution from the Tracks area menu bar. • Control-click anywhere inside the Cell inspector. 2. Choose one of the following from the menu: • Bars Only: View the position and length value for cells as bars.
When you play cells while the project is stopped, the playhead starts. If the playhead starts from a quantize start point, the cells start playing immediately; otherwise, they start when the playhead reaches the next quantize start point. If the playhead reaches the project end marker while cells are playing, the playhead stops and the cells continue playing. If you are only using Live Loops in your project, it is recommended to turn on Cycle mode.
Edit Live Loops cells in Logic Pro You can arrange and edit cells in the Live Loops grid much as you do when working with regions. Basic functions to cut, copy, paste, move, or delete cells are similar to the equivalent functions for regions in the Tracks area. Parameters for selected cells appear in the Cell inspector, which replaces the Region inspector when cells are selected.
Cut a cell • In Logic Pro, select the cell, then choose Edit > Cut (or press Command-X). Copy a cell • In Logic Pro, do either of the following: • Select the cell, then choose Edit > Copy (or press Command-C). • Option-drag the cell. Paste a cell • In Logic Pro, select a cell, then choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). Move a cell You can move cells to an empty or filled cell in the same row, or to another row of the same type.
Delete a cell • In Logic Pro, select one or more cells, then do either of the following: • Choose Edit > Delete. • Press the Delete key. • Control-click one of the selected cells and choose Edit > Delete from the shortcut menu. Mute a cell When you mute a cell, it stops playing. To hear the cell again, you must first unmute, then restart the cell.
Reverse cell playback • In Logic Pro, select one or more cells, then do one of the following: • Click the disclosure triangle in the Cell inspector next to Play Mode, then select the Reverse checkbox in the Cell inspector. • Control-click one of the selected cells, then choose Playback > Reverse from the submenu. • Use the Reverse key command (Control-Shift-R). The Reverse parameter is not available for audio cells that have Flex & Follow turned on in the Cell inspector.
Select scenes • In Logic Pro, do the following: • Select single scene: Click the scene name directly under the Scene trigger. • Select the previous or next scene: • When a scene is selected: Press the the Left Arrow or Right Arrow keys. • When no scenes are selected: Press the Option-Left Arrow or Option-Right Arrow keys. • Select multiple scenes: Shift-click the area under the Scene trigger to add that scene to the selection.
Duplicate scenes • In Logic Pro, select one or more scenes, Control-click the Scene trigger the selected scenes and choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu. for any of Insert an empty scene • In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Control-click the Scene trigger and choose Insert Empty Scene. • Select a scene and use the Insert Empty Scene key command. A new empty scene is created and the following scenes move to the right. Add multiple empty scenes to the end of the grid 1.
Change the Quantize Start value or play mode for all scenes You can change the Quantize Start value or play mode for all scenes at the same time. • In Logic Pro, control-click the Scene trigger , choose Set All Scene Triggers, then choose a Quantize Start value or play mode from the relevant submenu. Any previous changes you made to the Quantize Start value or play mode of an individual scene are updated with the new setting.
• • • Move the loop start position: • Drag the loop start to the desired position. • Control-click the ruler where you want the loop start to be and choose Set Loop Start Here from the shortcut menu. Move the loop end position: • Drag the loop end to the desired position. • Control-click the ruler where you want the loop end to be and choose Set Loop End Here from the shortcut menu. Move the end position: Drag the end marker to the desired position.
Bounce Live Loops cells in Logic Pro You can bounce audio or MIDI cells into a new audio cell, similar to the way you bounce regions in place in the Tracks area. If you bounce a cell that has different start and loop start positions, the resulting bounce cell consists of a pass from the start position to the loop end position, and a pass from the loop start position to the loop end position (loop range).
• Source: Define what happens to the source cells after bouncing. You have three options: • Leave: Leaves the source cells unaltered after processing the bounce cell. • Mute: Mutes the source cells after processing the bounce cell. • Delete: Deletes the source cells from the original tracks after processing the bounce cell. • Include Instrument Multi-Outputs: Select to include aux channel strips with multioutput signals of the instrument in the bounce process.
Record a Live Loops performance in Logic Pro You can record a Live Loops performance to the Tracks area. After you are done recording your Live Loops performance, you can play it back in the Tracks area, edit the regions, and finalize the mix. Record a Live Loops performance 1. In Logic Pro, click the Enable Performance Recording button at the upper-left corner of the Live Loops grid. 2.
Zoom a section of the Live Loops grid 1. In Logic Pro, select the Zoom tool from the Tool menu (or press and hold ControlOption). 2. Drag to select the area you want to view in detail with the Zoom tool. The selected area fills the window. You can repeat the process to zoom in further. 3. Click an empty part of the Live Loops grid with the Zoom tool to zoom out again. Zoom cells horizontally You can zoom cells horizontally in and out.
Change the size of the Live Loops grid If you view the Live Loops grid and the Tracks area at the same time, you can change the size of the Live Loops grid in relation to the Tracks area. 1. Move the pointer over the Divider column between the Live Loops grid and Tracks area. 2. When the pointer becomes a resize icon, drag it left or right. Control Live Loops in Logic Pro with other devices You can assign a MIDI control surface to Live Loops functions and key commands.
Assign a controller to Live Loops key commands You can use Live Loops key commands and assign them to controllers on a MIDI control surface to optimize your workflow. 1. Choose Logic Pro > Key Commands to open the Key Commands window, or press Option-K. 2. Scroll down to the key commands grouped under Live Loops Grid. You can also search for the key command in the Search field. 3. Select the key command you want to assign to your control surface. 4.
Use Step Sequencer Logic Pro Step Sequencer overview Step Sequencer is inspired by classic hardware step sequencers that have rows of configurable switches or knobs used to generate repeating musical patterns. In Step Sequencer, you create patterns by editing multifunctional steps in the step grid. Each row controls either a sound (which can be a drum kit piece, a note on an instrument, or a range of notes) or an automation parameter (letting you create automation changes over time in the pattern).
• Step Sequencer inspector: Contains tabbed sets of controls providing a central location to view and edit pattern, row, and step settings. See Edit Step Sequencer pattern, row, and step settings. • Row headers: Each header contains a row icon, a disclosure triangle to show subrows, and a set of controls for the row, including Mute and Solo buttons, a Row Assignment pop-up menu, Rotate buttons, and Increment/Decrement Value buttons. See Modify Step Sequencer pattern playback and Edit Step Sequencer rows.
Edit modes Using edit modes, you can control different attributes of the note or event triggered by a step. Some edit modes apply to only one row type, while others are common to both types. For note rows, you can change the velocity, pitch, gate time, number of note repetitions in a step, and other attributes. For automation rows, you can change the value of the automated parameter.
Create an empty pattern cell in the Live Loops grid • In Logic Pro, select an empty software instrument cell, click the Step Sequencer tab in the Editors area, then click a step in the step grid. • Control-click an empty software instrument cell in the Live Loops grid, then choose Create Pattern Cell from the shortcut menu. Note: When you select a MIDI region or MIDI cell, the editor that appears in the Editors area is the editor last used for a MIDI region or MIDI cell.
Add rows using Learn mode You can add rows by playing MIDI notes or manipulating automatable parameters using Learn mode. When Learn mode is active, Step Sequencer creates a new note row for any played MIDI note for which a row does not already exist. Similarly, it creates a new automation row for any received parameter controller event for which a row does not exist.
When row lengths are evenly divisible with one another, the overall length is equal to the longest row. For example, if you shorten several rows in a 16-step pattern to four or eight steps (which both divide evenly into 16), the pattern remains a one-bar pattern. When row lengths are not evenly divisible, however, the musical length is increased (sometimes substantially) because the pattern doesn’t repeat until all rows start at the same time again.
Change the step rate for the pattern The step rate sets the duration of steps in the step grid as a note value. You can set the step rate for the overall pattern, and set a different step rate for individual rows and steps. • In Logic Pro, choose a new step rate from the Step Rate pop-up menu in the Step Sequencer menu bar. You can also change the step rate for the pattern in the Step Sequencer inspector.
• Loop Start/End: When this mode is active, a frame appears around the row. Drag the left edge of the frame to set the start of the row relative to the overall pattern. Drag the right edge of the frame to set the end of the row relative to the overall pattern. You can also click a step to set the start or end point (whichever is closest) to that step, and drag vertically to other rows to set their start or end positions. • Chance: Drag vertically in the step to set the Chance percentage.
Choose the edit mode for the pattern The Edit Mode selector consists of three parts: Step On/Off can always be selected directly using the left-side button. The right-side button shows the edit mode currently selected in the Edit Mode pop-up menu, which is accessed using the arrows on the right side of the selector. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • To choose Step On/Off, click the button on the left side of the Edit Mode selector.
Show subrows for a row You can view and edit multiple edit modes for a row at the same time using subrows. • In Logic Pro, click the disclosure triangle on the left of the row header. By default, several subrows appear below the row, depending on the row type. You can Add subrows and change the edit mode for a subrow. Change the edit mode for a subrow • IIn Logic Pro, choose a new edit mode from the Edit Mode pop-up menu, located in the upper-right area of the subrow header.
Delete a subrow • In Logic Pro, hold the pointer over the left edge of the subrow header, then click the Delete Subrow icon that appears. Pattern creation examples The following examples provide steps to follow as well as general guidelines for working with different types of patterns. Drum pattern example For drum and percussion (rhythm-based) patterns, edit modes such as Velocity and Note Repeat can be effective for creating interesting-sounding patterns.
Instrumental pattern example Edit modes such as Velocity, Note, Octave, and Tie can be useful for creating interesting instrument and melodic patterns. 1. Choose a synthesizer patch featuring a relatively fast note attack from the Library (The Analog Poly Synth, Luminous Tines, or Short Pulse Waves patches in the Synthesizer > Classic subdirectory of the Library are suitable examples). 2. Create an empty pattern region in the Tracks area, or an empty pattern cell in the Live Loops grid. 3.
Load and save patterns in the Logic Pro Step Sequencer Step Sequencer includes a Pattern Browser where you can choose and save patterns and templates. The Pattern Browser contains a variety of premade patterns for drums, bass, keys, and other instrument categories that you can use in your projects. The Pattern Browser also features templates, which include pattern, row, and step settings but with an empty step grid, that you can use as as a starting point for creating patterns.
Save a pattern to the Pattern Browser • In Logic Pro, with the pattern open in Step Sequencer, choose Save Pattern from the Action pop-up menu in the Pattern Browser. Save a pattern as a template • In Logic Pro, with the pattern open in the Step Sequencer, choose Save Template from the Action pop-up menu in the Pattern Browser. Create folders for patterns and templates 1. In Logic Pro, with the pattern open in the Step Sequencer, click User in the Pattern Browser, then click either Pattern or Template.
Modify Step Sequencer pattern playback in Logic Pro Some options in Step Sequencer control how and when steps play back, and can be fun to manipulate while the pattern is playing. For example, you can mute and solo rows, rotate rows (moving all steps in a row left or right, including their step values and other edit mode settings), and change the playback mode for the pattern or for a row, and perform other actions while the pattern is playing.
Change the playback mode for the pattern By default, steps in a pattern sound from left to right, similar to how the playhead moves from left to right in the Tracks area. You can change the playback mode for the overall pattern, and choose a different playback mode for individual rows. • In Logic Pro, choose a playback mode from the Playback Mode pop-up menu in the Step Sequencer menu bar. The choices are: • Forward: Steps play from left to right. • Backward: Steps play from right to left.
Edit Step Sequencer steps in Logic Pro You can edit individual steps in several ways, including cutting, copying, and pasting steps. You can also repeat a step, decrement or increment the values of all steps in a row, transpose all steps in a pattern by semitones or octaves, randomize values for all steps in a row or all steps in the pattern, and reset steps to default values. Pattern regions can be edited only in the Step Sequencer, not in the other MIDI editors.
Raise or lower the values of all steps in a row In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • To lower the value of all steps in a row: Click the Decrement Value button header. • To raise the value of all steps in a row: Click the Increment Value button header. in the row in the row You can also continuously change the value for all steps in a row by clicking either button and dragging vertically.
Edit Step Sequencer rows in Logic Pro You can edit Step Sequencer rows in a variety of ways, including copying and pasting rows or row settings, duplicating a row with the next row assignment, changing the row assignment, resetting row values to a default setting, and deleting a row. Copy and paste rows 1. In Logic Pro, click the row icon to select the row, then choose Edit > Copy Row from the Step Sequencer menu bar. 2. Select a row that you want to replace with the pasted row. 3.
Change the row assignment You can change the row assignment for a row, including changing the row type. • In Logic Pro, click and hold the Row Assignment menu in the row header, then do one of the following: • For a note row: Choose Notes, then choose a different note value from the submenu, or else choose Melodic (if you plan to assign different pitches to different steps).
Open the Step Sequencer inspector • In Logic Pro, click the Inspector button choose View > Show Local Inspector). to show the Step Sequencer inspector (or Edit pattern settings 1. In Logic Pro, click the Pattern tab in the Step Sequencer inspector to show the Pattern inspector. 2. Do any of the following: • To change the pattern length: Choose the number of steps in the pattern from the Pattern Length pop-up menu.
• To quantize unquantized notes to the scale: Click the Quantize (Q) button next to the Scale Quantize pop-up menu. After you choose the scale from the Scale Quantize pop-up menu, notes are quantized and the Quantize (Q) button is inactive. The Quantize button becomes active when you change the row assignment or Note value for a step to a note outside the chosen scale. Click the Quantize button to reapply scale quantization to those nonconforming notes.
• Ping-Pong: Playback alternates between left to right and right to left. • Random: Steps play in an undetermined order. • To change the loop start: Set the value in steps using the Loop Start value slider. • To change the loop end: Set the value in steps using the Loop End value slider. • To change the MIDI channel for the row: Set the channel number from the MIDI Channel value slider. • To set the automation mode for the row: Choose a mode from the Automation Mode pop-up menu.
• To change the offset value for the step: Set the percentage using the Start Offset value slider. • To change the step rate for the step: Choose a note value for the step from the Step Rate pop-up menu. • To skip the step during playback: Select the Skip checkbox. • To tie the step during playback: Select the Tie checkbox.
Change row colors 1. In Logic Pro, click a row header to select the row. 2. Choose View > Show Row Colors from the Step Sequencer menu bar. 3. Select a color from the Color palette. 4. When you are finished, choose View > Hide Row Colors to close the Color palette. Reorder rows • In Logic Pro, click and hold a row header, then drag the row up or down.
Edit global project settings Logic Pro global changes overview In addition to working with individual tracks, regions, and channel strips, you can manipulate different aspects of an overall project. • You can control the overall project volume using the Master Volume slider, the master track, or the master channel strip. • You can tag different parts of a project, then select and edit those parts, using markers.
Use the global tracks Logic Pro global tracks overview Logic Pro includes a set of global tracks that you can use to control different aspects of the overall project. You can show global tracks in the Tracks area and in the time-based editors (including the Audio Track Editor, Piano Roll Editor, and Step Editor). When you show the global tracks, they appear below the ruler for that particular area.
Show or hide the global tracks In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Track > Global Tracks > Show Global Tracks, or use the Show/Hide Global Tracks key command (G). • Click the Global Tracks button . In the Tracks area, the Global Tracks button appears above the track headers. In the editors, it appears on the left side of the editor. Show or hide individual global tracks In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Track > Global Tracks, then choose specific tracks from the submenu.
Resize and reorder global tracks in Logic Pro You can resize the entire global tracks area, and resize global tracks individually. You can also change the order of global tracks. Resize the overall global tracks area • In Logic Pro, position the pointer over the line separating the global tracks from the Tracks area (or editor) workspace, then drag up or down. Resize individual global tracks • In Logic Pro, position the pointer over the lower dividing line for the global track, then drag up or down.
Work with markers Logic Pro markers overview When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can use markers to tag different parts of a project, and quickly select the parts for playback, arranging, and editing. Markers can help you organize your project, and also act as storage areas for locator positions. There are several ways to create and edit markers in Logic Pro.
• Marker List: Displays marker names, bar position, and length information in a scrollable, editable list. • Marker Text area and Marker Text window: Display marker text. You can type and edit comments or other text that is saved with the marker. For supported USB MIDI controllers, button controls on the device may be automatically assigned to marker key commands. For more information, see Automatic MIDI controller assignment in Logic Pro.
Add markers in Logic Pro You can add a marker at any position in your project. When you create a marker, it can be rounded to the nearest quarter note, to the nearest bar, or not rounded. You can use the Create Marker key commands to add markers during playback. Add a marker rounded to the nearest quarter note In the Logic Pro Marker track, do one of the following: • Place the playhead at the position where you want to create a marker, then click the Add Marker button .
Add markers at the positions of all selected regions In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • In the Marker track: Click and hold the word Marker, then choose Create Markers From Regions from the shortcut menu. • In any working area: Use the Create Marker by Regions key command. Markers created in these ways are automatically assigned the names, bar position, length, and color of the regions they are derived from.
Edit markers in Logic Pro You can copy and move markers, adjust their lengths, and color them. You can also change the appearance of marker text in the Marker Text window (or area). Copy a marker In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • In the Marker track: Option-drag the marker. You can also copy a marker, move the playhead to the position where you want to paste the copy, and then paste it. • In the Marker List: Use the Copy (Command-C) and Paste (Command-V) commands.
This command locks (fixes) the time position of markers, and a lock symbol is displayed at the beginning of the marker name. These markers always retain their absolute time position: if the project tempo is changed, the bar positions will change to keep the markers at the same time positions. Tip: You can also lock and unlock the time positions of markers from the Region menu in the Tracks area, and the Functions menu in the Piano Roll Editor and Step Editor, if you turn on the display of global tracks.
Trim the start or end point of a marker • To trim the end point: In the Logic Pro Marker track, press and hold Command and click the pointer click the marker at the point you want to trim the end point. • To trim the start point: In the Logic Pro Marker track, press and hold Shift–Command and click the pointer click the marker at the point you want to trim the start point. Adjust a marker to fit the cycle area • In Logic Pro, drag the cycle area onto a marker in the Marker track.
3. Choose settings in the Font window. The text in the Marker Text window changes to match the settings. The text in the Marker track is not affected. Rename markers in Logic Pro Newly created markers (except markers derived from regions) are named “Marker ,” where “” reflects the order in which the marker appears along the ruler (resulting in “Marker 1,” “Marker 2,” and so on). This numbering depends on the order of all markers in the project, including markers that have been renamed.
Edit a marker name in the Marker List 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select the marker name and click the Marker Text Edit button. • Select the marker name and double-click in the Marker Text area. • Double-click the marker in the Marker Name column. 2. Enter the new marker name in the Marker Text area. Rename a marker in the ruler If the Marker track is hidden, you can rename markers directly in the ruler.
Edit a marker name in the Marker Text window 1. In Logic Pro, select the marker in the Marker List. 2. Do one of the following: • Click the Marker Text Edit button. • Double-click in the Marker Text area. 3. Enter the new marker name in the Marker Text area. The first portion of text in the window is used as the marker name. All text below the first paragraph is also displayed in the Marker track, if space allows. (You can resize the Marker track to view all text.
Move to the next or previous marker • In Logic Pro, use the Go to Previous Marker and Go to Next Marker key commands. The locators are set to the beginning and end points of the selected marker. Create a cycle from a marker In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Drag the marker into the upper part of the ruler. This action sets the cycle area to the position and length of the marker.
Choose a marker set • In the Logic Pro Marker List, choose a set from the Marker Set pop-up menu. When you choose a marker set, only markers that are part of the set appear in the Marker track and Marker List. Delete a marker set • In Logic Pro, select the marker set, then choose Delete Set from the Marker Set pop-up menu. Set marker display in the Logic Pro Marker List There are two display options for marker position and length in the Marker List.
Delete markers in Logic Pro You can delete markers at any time. After you delete a marker, it no longer appears in the Marker track, Marker List, or Marker Text window. Delete markers In the Logic Pro Marker track or Marker List, do one of the following: Select the markers, then choose Edit > Delete (or press Delete). Control-click the marker, then choose Delete Marker. Click the markers with the Eraser tool.
Add an arrangement marker • In Logic Pro, click the Add Marker button (+) in the arrangement track. The arrangement marker appears at the start of the project, or at the end of the last existing arrangement marker. Resize an arrangement marker • In Logic Pro, drag the right edge of the arrangement marker left or right. Rename an arrangement marker In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the name of the selected arrangement marker, then choose a name from the shortcut menu.
Copy an arrangement marker • In Logic Pro, Cption-drag the arrangement marker to the position where you want to place the copy. When you place the copy between two existing arrangement markers, the marker to the right moves right to make room for the copied marker. Replace an arrangement marker • In Logic Pro, Command-drag an arrangement marker directly over another one.
In addition to the ruler, time signatures affect the score display. All functions that rely on the chosen time signature and bar positions (such as MIDI metronome click or Transform window functions) are affected if bar positions are used to restrict a function to a certain part of the project. Key signatures When you create a project, the key signature defaults to C major, unless you choose a different key signature. The initial key signature affects the playback of Apple Loops in the project.
Create time signature changes in Logic Pro When you create a new project, by default it has one time signature that lasts for the entire project. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can add time signature changes to a project in the Signature List, Signature track, or Score Editor. Create a time signature change In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • Click the Add Signature button Signature dialog.
Create key signature changes in Logic Pro When you create a new project, by default it has one key signature that lasts for the entire project. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can add key signature changes to a project in the Signature List, Signature track, or Score Editor. Create a key signature change In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the word Time in the Signature List and choose Key from the pop-up menu, then click the Add Signature button .
Edit the time signature In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • In the Signature track (or the Score Editor), double-click a time or key signature, then edit the signature in the (Time or Key) Signature dialog. • For projects with a single time signature, choose a new signature from the LCD. • For projects with multiple time signatures, move the playhead onto or to the right of the time signature you want to change, then choose a new signature from the LCD.
Delete signatures in Logic Pro You can delete time and key signature changes in a project, but you can’t delete the initial time and key signature. Delete a signature In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Select the signature in the Signature track, Signature List, or Score Editor, then choose Edit > Delete (or press Delete). Tip: To erase all time signature events, select a signature, choose Edit > Select Similar Objects, then press Delete.
Work with tempo Logic Pro tempo overview Every project has a tempo, which is expressed in beats per minute ( bpm). You can set the tempo in the Project Chooser when you create a project, and change it later while you are working. You can set the project tempo in the LCD in the control bar. By default, the tempo for new projects is 120 bpm.
Show the Tempo track In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Track > Global Tracks > Show Global Tracks, or use the Show/Hide Global Tracks key command (G). • Click the Global Tracks button . If the Tempo track is not visible, Control-click anywhere in the global tracks header area, then select Tempo in the dialog than appears. For more information, see Show and hide global tracks in Logic Pro.
• Click the target time position with the Pencil tool. When using the Pencil tool, watch the help tag, and don’t release the mouse button until it shows the intended tempo and position. No help tag appears when you double-click with the Pointer tool. • To set the tempo numerically, press and hold Control-Option-Command and click the target time position, enter the bpm value in the field that appears, then press Return. Change the value of a tempo point • In Logic Pro, drag the tempo point up or down.
Replace selected tempo points by the average tempo Using this function, the selected tempo points are replaced by their average value (the weighted average) so that the length (duration) of the performance is maintained. • In Logic Pro, select the tempo points, then choose Tempo > Replace Selected Points by Average Tempo from the pop-up menu in the Tempo Track header.
Copy tempo changes from a passage 1. In Logic Pro, set the locators to the passage containing the correct tempo change. 2. Choose Edit > Select Inside Locators. Note: When a marquee selection is active, using this key command sets the marquee selection to match the locators. 3. Copy the tempo points to the Clipboard (Command-C). 4. Deselect all tempo points (by clicking the background). 5. Paste the tempo points from the Clipboard (Command-V). 6.
Use the Tempo List Logic Pro Tempo List overview When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can view and edit tempo changes in the Tempo List. You can open the Tempo List in the main window, or as a separate window. Open the Tempo List in the main window In Logic Pro, click the List Editors button in the control bar, then click Tempo. Open the Tempo List as a separate window • In Logic Pro, drag the Tempo List out from the main window.
Change the position of a tempo change • In Logic Pro, drag any of the position numbers up or down, or double-click in the Position or SMPTE column and enter a new position. Move the selected tempo change event to the current playhead position • In Logic Pro, use the Move Region/Event to Playhead Position (Pickup Clock) key command. Display additional events in the Tempo List • In theLogic Pro Tempo List, click the Additional Info button.
Use Smart Tempo Logic Pro Smart Tempo overview Smart Tempo brings powerful new tempo analysis and editing capabilities to Logic Pro. With Smart Tempo you can record a performance without the metronome and have Logic Proadapt the project tempo to match the tempo of the recording, or keep the project tempo and flex the recording to match it.
The Project Tempo mode The Project Tempo mode determines whether the project tempo is maintained, or adapts to the tempo of audio recordings, imported audio files, and MIDI regions. You choose the Project Tempo mode in the LCD Tempo display. The Project Tempo modes are: • Keep Project Tempo: Maintains the project tempo when you record audio or MIDI, or when you import audio files. Audio regions for which the Flex & Follow parameter is not set to Off conform to the project tempo.
There is no Flex & Follow setting for MIDI regions. MIDI regions always follow the project tempo, similarly to flexed audio regions with Flex & Follow set to on. For information about choosing Flex & Follow settings, see Choose the Flex & Follow setting in Logic Pro. You can change the default settings for the Flex & Follow region parameter for new recordings and imported audio files in the Smart Tempo project settings, and set whether they are trimmed to the downbeat.
Use Smart Tempo with remixes When creating a remix, you often work by combining files recorded at different tempos, and that may contain tempo changes. With the Project Tempo mode set to Keep, imported files do not affect the project tempo. Imported audio files conform to the project tempo, as long as their Flex & Follow parameter is not set to Off.
Adapt Project Tempo mode In Adapt Project Tempo mode, Logic Pro adapts the project tempo to a recording or an imported audio or MIDI file. When you choose Adapt mode in the Tempo display, the Tempo track opens so you can see how the project tempo changes after recording, importing files, or moving regions in the Tracks area. When you make a recording in an empty project with the metronome off, the project tempo adapts to the recording.
Choose the Project Tempo mode In the Logic Pro LCD, click the middle of the Tempo display, then do one of the following: • To maintain the project tempo: Choose Keep Project Tempo from the pop-up menu. • To adapt the project tempo to the tempo of a recording or imported audio file: Choose Adapt Project Tempo from the pop-up menu. • To have Logic Pro choose the project tempo behavior: Choose Automatic Mode from the pop-up menu.
Choose the Flex & Follow setting in Logic Pro On Flex enabled audio tracks, the Flex & Follow pop-up menu replaces the Flex checkbox for audio regions in the Region inspector. You use the Flex & Follow setting to enable Flex Time for a region, to set whether it follows the project tempo, and to set whether it additionally uses Smart Tempo beat markers at the bar or beat level. You can edit Smart Tempo beat markers in the Smart Tempo Editor.
Use Smart Tempo with mulitrack audio files in Logic Pro You can use Smart Tempo analysis with multitrack audio recordings, both with recordings you make in Logic Pro and when you add a set of multitrack audio files to a project. For multitrack audio recordings, Smart Tempo analyzes the multitrack audio files together and applies the analysis results to all of them.
Create a multitrack audio recording in Logic Pro 1. Before recording in Logic Pro, make sure that at least one of the following conditions is true: • The Project Tempo mode is set to Adapt. • The Flex & Follow region parameter is set to either On + Align Bars or On + Align Beats. 2. Record to multiple audio tracks following the steps described in Record to multiple audio tracks simultaneously.
The Smart Tempo Multitrack window opens, showing the files currently used in the Smart Tempo multitrack set. 3. Do any of the following: • To add an audio file to the multitrack set: Close the Smart Tempo Multitrack Set window, select the files you want to include, then open the window again. • To delete an audio file from the multitrack set: Select the row for the audio file and press the Delete or Backspace key.
Each beat marker has several handles, each with a different function. Holding the pointer over a handle displays a tag showing the handle’s function. You can make a selection before clicking a handle; if there is no selection, Logic Pro makes a default selection of the beats affected by the edit. Depending on the selection, not all editing functions may be available. You can view any of the audio files in a Smart Tempo multitrack set, including the downmix, in the Smart Tempo Editor.
• Cycle button: Turn Cycle mode on or off. If a selection exists, the Cycle region matches the selection. If no selection exists, Cycle mode extends the length of the audio file. • Horizontal Zoom slider: Drag left or right to show a smaller part of the file or region in more detail, or show a larger part of the file or region in less detail. Click left or right on the arrows to change the zoom level. • Overview: Shows the entire audio file or MIDI region.
Double or halve the file or region tempo In Logic Pro, you can change the tempo of the audio file (if there is no selection) or the current selection: • To double the tempo: Click the X2 button in the Tempo display. • To halve the tempo: Click the /2 button in the Tempo display. Edit beat markers When you place the pointer over a beat marker, a set of circular handles appears along the length of the beat marker.
Select sections of the file or region • To select the section from the start of the file or region to the pointer, press Shift-Left Arrow. • To select the section from the pointer to the end of the file or region, press Shift-Right Arrow. Apply tempo actions to the file or region You can choose the following tempo actions from the Edit menu in the Smart Tempo Editor control bar: • Apply Region Tempo to Project Tempo: Applies the tempo of the selected region to the project tempo.
• Set Average Tempo for Selection: Sets a single average tempo for the selected area of the file or region. • Set Average Tempo within each Bar: Sets an average tempo within each bar of the selected area of the file or region. • Extend First Tempo in Selection to Beginning: Sets the part of the region preceding the selection to use the first (leftmost) tempo in the selection.
Audio files that follow the project tempo (and first key signature) are flagged with the Follow Tempo symbol, in both the Tracks area and the Project Audio Browser. All other imported audio files require adjustment of either the region or the project tempo. You can set an audio region to follow the project tempo, or add the region to the Apple Loop library as an Apple Loop. For information about creating Apple Loops, see Create your own Apple Loops in Logic Pro.
The locator range should closely match the length of the region—usually to the nearest bar. 4. Choose Edit > Tempo > Adjust Tempo using Region Length and Locators. A dialog asks if you want to change the tempo of the entire project, or create a tempo change for the section of the project occupied by the selected region. 5. Do one of the following: • To adjust the tempo of the complete project to the audio region: Click Globally.
Remove tempo information from an audio file • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Tempo > Remove Tempo Information from Audio File. You can then export the current tempo information to the audio file. Export tempo information to an audio file • In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Tempo > Write Project Tempo to Audio File. Record tempo changes in Logic Pro All tempo changes made when Logic Pro is in record mode are stored as tempo change events on the Tempo track.
Use Tempo Operations Logic Pro Tempo Operations overview When Advanced Editing Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can use the Tempo Operations window for greater control of the project tempo. You use Tempo Operations to create tempo changes, and edit existing tempo changes. The window automatically displays the area you’ve selected for editing. Changes are displayed graphically in real time, as the tempo curve is processed, so you can see the results of your edits.
• Randomize Tempo: Adds random tempo changes based on the parameters you specify. • Round Existing Tempo Changes: Rounds existing tempo changes in the specified range to whole BPM or 1/10 BPM units. Create a tempo change in the Tempo Operations window 1. In the Logic Pro Tempo Operations window, choose Operation > Create Tempo Curve. 2.
Stretch tempo curves 1. In the Logic Pro Tempo Operations window, choose Operation > Stretch Existing Tempo Changes. 2. Define the start point for tempo changes using the Position or Time parameter. 3. Do one of the following: • Enter the new end point of the tempo curve as a bar position or SMPTE value. • Set a Stretch value for the tempo curve (as a percentage). Thin out (reduce) tempo changes In the Logic Pro Tempo Operations window, choose Operation > Thin Out Existing Tempo Changes.
Set the tempo values in the Tempo Interpreter window 1. In Logic Pro, choose Edit > Tempo > Tempo Interpreter (or use the Open Tempo Interpreter key command). 2. In the Tempo Interpreter window, adjust any of the following: • Tap Step: Sets the note value that Logic Pro assigns to manual taps. You achieve the best results with larger, rather than smaller, values. 1/4 note usually works well.
Use the tempo fader in Logic Pro When Advanced MIDI Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can create a real-time tempo fader in the Environment window by choosing New > Fader > Specials > Tempo Control. This fader can control the project tempo (using Meta event #100). There is no need to connect this fader to anything, unless you want to record its output. A tempo fader has a range of possible values from 50 to 177 bpm.
Work with transposition Logic Pro transposition overview When Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can you can transpose (change the playback pitch of) MIDI regions and Apple Loops in a project over time using the Transposition track. The Transposition track contains transposition points for pitch changes (transposition events). The project transposes at the position of the transposition point, and remains at the new value until the next transposition point.
If the No Transpose checkbox is selected in the Track inspector, MIDI events (including instrument Apple Loops) are not transposed for that track. Show the Transposition track 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Track > Global Tracks > Show Global Tracks, or use the Show/Hide Global Tracks key command (G). • Click the Global Tracks button . In the Tracks area, the Global Tracks button appears above the track headers; in the editors, it appears on the left side of the editor. 2.
A transposition point is added, set to the value you entered. Change the value of a transposition point • In Logic Pro, drag the transposition point up or down to a new value. As you move the transposition point, a help tag appears, showing the current transposition value. Delete a transposition point In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the transposition point with the Pointer tool, then press the Delete key. • Click the transposition point with the Eraser tool.
Beat mapping involves two steps: first, you graphically connect notes to ruler positions in the Beat Mapping track. A tempo change event is inserted at each of these ruler positions, so that the notes align with musically meaningful time positions in the ruler, although their absolute time position is unchanged. A beat-mapped project contains the same tempo variations as the original recording.
Use beat mapping on MIDI regions in Logic Pro You can beat map MIDI regions to adjust the project tempo so that freely recorded notes in the regions align with beats in the ruler. Apply beat mapping to MIDI regions 1. In Logic Pro, select the regions that you want to use for beat mapping. A representation of the selected regions appears in the Beat Mapping track. Tip: You may want to zoom in to work more precisely. 2.
Use beat mapping on audio regions in Logic Pro Beat mapping audio regions works similarly to beat mapping MIDI regions. If the audio regions don’t contain tempo information, they must be analyzed to find transients (short amplitude peaks, usually at rhythmically prominent positions), which can be mapped to a ruler position, before you can use them for beat mapping. Transients appear as blue vertical lines in the lower part of the Beat Mapping track, aligned to peaks in the audio waveform.
Increasing the number of transients can be useful when beat mapping regions with less distinct accents—such as soft drums in a loud mix. However, a high setting can result in extraneous transients, with no real meaning for the rhythmic structure, being displayed. In general, it’s better to begin with a lower setting, and move to a higher setting only if transients are missing for obvious rhythmic elements in the music.
Automatically beat map regions in Logic Pro Logic Pro can automatically beat map audio or MIDI regions using the Beats from Region command. You can select the note value to use for automatic mapping, and select the beat-mapping algorithm. Apply automatic beat mapping 1. In Logic Pro, select the region you want to beat map. 2. Click the title “Beat Mapping” in the Beat Mapping track, and choose Beats from Region from the shortcut menu. 3.
Apply beat mapping to audio material containing tempo changes 1. In Logic Pro, cut the audio material at the precise position of each tempo change. 2. Lock the SMPTE position of each audio region. 3. Select the first region and perform the automatic beat-mapping process as already described. 4. Continue with the remaining audio regions.
View and edit music notation Logic Pro music notation overview You can view MIDI regions in software instrument (and external MIDI instrument) tracks as music notation in the Score Editor. Notes and other musical events are displayed as standard notation, along with common symbols such as time and key signature, bar lines, and clef signs. You can add and edit notes, add sustain pedal markings and other symbols, and print the score.
• Define different instrument groups using score sets to create full scores, parts, and lead sheets • Edit the overall score layout, including numbers, names, and spacing • Share the score by printing it or exporting it to a PDF file When Additional Score Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can access the following options for more specialized notation projects.
The Score Editor menu bar includes Layout, Edit, Functions, and View pop-up menus; Display Level, View, MIDI In, MIDI Out, and Catch buttons; Tool menus; and a zoom slider. The Score inspector, located to the left of the score display, includes the following areas that you use to control various aspects of the score: • Region inspector: Control visual quantization and other display settings for regions in the score.
View tracks as music notation in Logic Pro The Score Editor displays MIDI regions on software instrument (and external MIDI instrument) tracks as music notation, including notes, rests, key and time signature, and clef signs. Bar lines show the division between measures. Gaps between regions are filled in to display a continuous staff. If the track contains software instrument Apple Loops, notation is displayed for each loop iteration, but only the original region of the loop can be edited.
You can also change the view using the View > View Mode menu commands in the Score Editor menu bar. Set the Link mode for the Score Editor To set the Link mode to Same Level: Click the Link button in the Score Editor menu bar. The Link button appears purple. To set the Link mode to Content: Double-click the Link button in the Score Editor menu bar. The Link button appears yellow. For more information about using Link modes, see Link windows in a Logic Pro project.
Import MusicXML files to a Logic Pro project MusicXML is an XML-based music notation file format, supported by many notation and music OCR apps and some music production apps. MusicXML files contain MIDI data, as well as additional notation data that is mapped to Logic Pro notation features including score symbols, staff styles, and more. You can import a MusicXML file to a new or existing project, play the resulting regions in the project, and view the regions as music notation.
Position items using the Event inspector 1. Select the item or items you want to position graphically. 2. Enter the value for the vertical position in the Vertical Pos.: field. A value of 0 means a position exactly on the top line of the staff, in most cases. Positive values are above, negative values below it. In staff styles with more than one staff, the Staff parameter determines the staff that the Vertical Position parameter refers to. 3.
When you paste (or paste multiple) items from the Clipboard, the position of the first inserted event is automatically quantized, in accordance with the current division value (set in the LCD). For example, if the current bar position is 4.1.1.37, and the division value is set to 1/16, the pasted object is inserted at position 4.1.1.1. If you want to preserve the unquantized timing, use another method to copy and paste the items.
Copy an entire musical passage to the same time position in another region You can use the Paste at Original Position and Paste Multiple at Original Position commands to quickly copy passages from one MIDI region to another, at the same time position. No insert position is required, and no automatic insert quantization takes place. 1. Select the notes and symbols of the passage. 2. Select the staff you want to paste the passage to. 3.
Adjust display headroom in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can adjust the vertical headroom, or the amount of blank space at the top of the score display. This can be helpful when there are notes with ledger lines extending above the staff, or chords, symbols, or text above the staff. Adjust the vertical headroom at the top of the score 1. Place the pointer at the top edge of the score display. The pointer changes to a pair of up-and-down pointing arrows. 2. Drag up or down to adjust the vertical headroom.
Edit multiple items in the Logic Pro Score Editor When multiple items are selected in the Score Editor, the title of the Event inspector indicates the number of selected items. If the selection is limited to only notes, chords, or text objects, the title also indicates the type of item selected. If parameter fields are visible while multiple events are selected, their values can be edited simultaneously. The “*” value in a parameter field indicates that the selected items have different values.
Note: The instrument name column is displayed only if View > Instrument Names is selected. Hide regions in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can hide regions so that they are not displayed in the Score Editor, or when you print the score. This is useful for hiding regions that only contain MIDI events that can’t be displayed in the score, such as controller or SysEx data, or for alternate versions that you wish to not display. Hide regions in the Score Editor 1. Select the MIDI regions you want to hide. 2.
Add notes using the pointer Do one of the following: Choose a note value from the Insert pop-up menu in the local Score Editor inspector, then Command-click at the point where you want to add a note. The Insert pop-up menu is available when Show Advanced Tools is not selected in the Advanced preferences pane. Click a note in the Part box, then Command-click at the point where you want to add the note.
• Phrasing marks • Trills and other ornaments, tremolo symbols • Sustain pedal markings • Bar lines, repeat signs, and Segno and Coda markings • Lyrics and text • Chord symbols • Chord grids and tablature symbols • Page and line break symbols Open the Part box 1. With the Score Editor open, click the Inspector button in the control bar. 2. If the Part box is closed, click its disclosure triangle in the inspector to open it.
View Part box symbol groups • Click a symbol group’s button at the top of the Part box to view the symbols for that group. Click a button again to deselect its group. The corresponding group appears in the Part box, below other selected symbol groups. Reorder symbol groups in the Part box Drag a symbol group up or down by the handle on its left side. Display all symbol groups Click the All button. View symbol groups in a floating window 1. Drag the Part box out by its title bar. 2.
Rename a score symbol set 1. Click and hold the name of the current score symbol set in the Part box title, then choose Rename Set from the Part Box Sets pop-up menu. 2. Enter a new name for the score symbol set. Delete the current score symbol set Click and hold the name of the current score symbol set in the Part box title, then choose Delete Set from the Part Box Sets pop-up menu.
Select adjacent symbols or groups using key commands Use any of the following key commands: To select the object to the left of the currently selected symbol: Use Previous Partbox Symbol. To select the symbol to the right of the currently selected symbol: Use Next Partbox Symbol. To select the group above the currently selected one: Use Previous Partbox Group. To select the group below the currently selected one: Use Next Partbox Group.
3. Double-click the multiple bar rest (with the Pointer tool). 4. In the dialog, deselect Auto Length, then enter the number of bars you want the rest to show. 5. To change the type of multiple bar rest, select one of the Type buttons in the dialog. Add notes and symbols to multiple regions in Logic Pro You can add notes and other score symbols to multiple selected regions at the same time position.
The display of key signatures and key signature changes depends on: • The Score project settings in the Clefs & Signatures pane (see Clefs & Signatures settings in Logic Pro). • The Key parameter in the Staff Style window (see Work in the Logic Pro Staff Style window). Time signature changes The time signature determines the number of beats in a bar, so changing the time signature affects how barlines appear in the score.
Add a time signature change in the Score Editor 1. If the Time Signatures section of the Part box isn’t visible, click the Time Signature button in the Part box. 2. Do one of the following: • Drag one of the defined time signatures from the Part box to the place in the score where you want to add it.
Add dynamic marks, slurs, and crescendi to a score in Logic Pro Dynamic marks indicate the dynamic level at which a performer should play a musical phrase or section. You can add dynamic marks such as p (piano), ff (fortissimo), and sfz (sforzando). Dynamic marks are visual symbols only, and don’t affect the volume of notes during playback. You can add slurs to indicate notes that should be played legato, and add dynamic crescendo and decrescendo symbols (sometimes called hairpins).
An automatic slur cannot extend across region boundaries. If you want to add an automatic slur extending between two regions, first merge the regions. Add automatic slurs using a key command You can add a series of automatic slurs to a line, a part, or a full score. By selecting the start and end notes for each individual slur, then applying the relevant key command, you can add multiple automatic slurs in one operation. Each pair defined by the start and end note receives an automatic slur.
To position a selected automatic slur above selected notes: Use the Auto Slur Above key command. To position a selected automatic slur below selected notes: Use the Auto Slur Below key command. To return a selected automatic slur to the automatic position: Use the Slur Auto Direction key command. To set the selected note as the final note of an automatic slur: Use the Slur Last Note key command.
In Linear Score view, you can extend a slur to a position not visible in the Score Editor by dragging its rightmost handle to the right border of the Score Editor. The score scrolls automatically. When the end position for the slur appears in the window, move the pointer back to the left slightly to stop scrolling, then position the end of the slur. It is important that you do not release the mouse button during the entire process.
Add accents and other symbols to notes in a score in Logic Pro The Part box includes symbols such as accents, fermatas, phrasing marks, bow markings, and others that apply to a single note, over which the symbol appears. (Trills are in a separate section). The Part box is available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Logic Pro Advanced preferences. Add an accent or other symbol to a note 1. If the Accents section of the Part box isn’t visible, click the Accents button in the Part box. 2.
Add sustain pedal markers to a score in Logic Pro Piano parts can display sustain pedal down and up markings in the Score Editor. When you open a MIDI region with Sustain data (MIDI controller #64, sustain pedal on and off) in the Score Editor, the Sustain data appears as pedal markings. Adding pedal markings to the score makes the affected notes sustain (that is, the MIDI playback is affected). These pedal markings are the only score symbols apart from notes that directly represent MIDI events.
3. Enter the text for the chord symbol: • Enter the root note and the chord quality, then any extensions. • To add a bass note, type a slash, then the bass note. • After you enter a number, everything following it is placed in the upper extension line. If you write “G7(b9/b13),” the whole “7(b9/b13)” is placed in the upper line, and the lower line remains blank.
Add a tablature symbol 1. If the Chord & Tablature section of the Part box isn’t visible, click the Chord button in the Part box. 2. Do one of the following: • Drag a symbol from the Part box into the score. • Choose a symbol in the Part box, then click a position in the score with the Pencil tool. You can also display regions as tablature using the appropriate staff style. For information about choosing staff styles, see Logic Pro staff styles overview.
Add a first or second ending symbol 1. Drag the symbol from the Part box to the place in the score where you want to add it. After you add a repeat ending symbol, you can edit the ending number. The default text is “1.” and “2.” To accept the defaults, press Return. Alternatively, enter any text into these brackets. The bracket that defaults to “2.” is open—without a vertical end line, like the “1.” ending. 2. If necessary, move the symbol to the correct position by dragging its upper-left corner. 3.
Edit notes in the Score Editor Select notes in the Logic Pro Score Editor Before you can perform some edits to notes in the Score Editor, you need to select them. Select a note Do one of the following: • Click the note head. • Select multiple notes by Shift-clicking or by dragging around the notes to enclose them. Select all notes Choose Edit > Select All (or press Command-A). All visible notes are selected. Select all notes following the currently selected note Choose Edit > Select All Following.
Change note pitch, duration, and velocity in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can change the pitch and duration (length) of selected notes in the Score Editor, as well as their MIDI velocity. The Velocity value signifies how hard the key was struck when the note was recorded. It often corresponds to the volume of the note when played back, but can control other parameters as well. Change a note’s pitch Select one or more notes, then do one of the following: • Drag the notes up or down.
Change note articulations in the Logic Pro Score Editor For patches supporting note articulations, you can change the articulations for notes in the Score Editor. For more information about using articulations, see Logic Pro articulation editing overview. Change the articulation of selected notes 1. Select one or more notes in the Score Editor. 2. Control-click a selected note. 3. Choose Articulation from the shortcut menu, then choose an articulation from the submenu.
When Additional Score Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, additional note attributes, including accidental type, note heads, stem position, and syncopation are available in the Note Attributes dialog and the Note Attributes shortcut menu. Change note attributes Do one of the following: • Select one or more notes, then choose an option from the Score Editor’s Functions > Attributes submenu.
Change note size and position in a score in Logic Pro The default note size is set with the Size parameter in the Staff Style window. You can change the size of individual notes, and also change their horizontal position in the score. Change a note’s size Do one of the following: • Drag the note upward (increase) or downward (decrease) with the Resize tool. • Double-click a note, then choose a size from the Size pop-up menu in the Note Attributes window.
• Control-click a note head, choose Attributes > Accidentals from the shortcut menu, then choose an option from the submenu. • Use one of the following key commands: • Default Accidentals • Enharmonic Shift: # • Enharmonic Shift: b • Flats To Sharps • Sharps To Flats • Force Accidental • Hide Accidental • Guide Accidental Change the distance between the accidental and the note Double-click a note, then choose a value from the Accidental Position pop-up menu in the Note Attributes window.
• Stem Position: Automatic: Moves the stem to the side. • Stem End: Default Length: Uses the default setting. • Stem End: Move Up: Moves the stem end upward. Depending on the direction, this shortens or lengthens the stem. • Stem End: Move Down: As above, but moves the stem end downward. • Control-click a note head, choose Attributes > Stems from the shortcut menu, then choose an option from the submenu.
• Staff Above Voice: Moves the selected notes to the staff above the assigned voice. • Staff Below Voice: Moves the selected notes to the staff below the assigned voice. Control-click a note head, choose Attributes > Voice/Staff Assignment from the shortcut menu, then choose an option from the submenu. Change the direction of ties in the Logic Pro Score Editor By default, the tie direction is set as part of the staff style for the track (or region).
Change a note’s Interpretation setting Do one of the following: Choose a setting from the Score Editor’s Note Attributes > Interpretation submenu. Double-click a note, then choose a setting from the Interpretation pop-up menu in the Note Attributes window. Control-click a note head, choose Attributes > Interpretation from the shortcut menu, then choose an entry from the submenu.
Change note color in the Logic Pro Score Editor When Additional Score Options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane, you can assign different colors to individual notes, using the available colors in the three color palettes. Assign a color to a note Do one of the following: Select the note, then choose Functions > Note Attributes > Colors from the Score Editor menu bar, and choose a color.
Restrict note input to the current key in the Logic Pro Score Editor If you’re working in a diatonic key (major, minor, or modal), using the Diatonic Input feature can help you quickly add notes. This feature restricts note input to the notes of the current key. Turn on Diatonic Input Choose Edit > Diatonic Insert from the Score Editor menu bar. Notes can be altered chromatically, after they have been inserted. Note: If you protect (lock) your screensets, this function’s setting is also locked.
Add and edit tuplets in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can add and edit tuplets—groups of notes evenly divided over a specific rhythmic value—in the Score Editor. The most common tuplet is the triplet (a group of three notes that typically occupies the space of two or four notes). The symbol for tuplets is grouped together with the symbols for triplets in the Notes group in the Part box. In some cases, you need to choose an appropriate display Quantize value in the Region inspector.
• Hide numbers: When selected, the tuplet number will not be printed. It will be displayed in parentheses, to allow further edits to the N-tuplet. • Show note value: Select to have the N-tuplet display also contain the note value (the lower number). • Direction: Choose the direction of the bracket and number, or choose Auto to have the tuplet use the staff style for the track or region.
Delete a tuplet Do one of the following: Click the tuplet number with the Eraser tool. Double-click the N-tuplet number, then click the Delete button in the Tuplet window. Override display quantization in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can override the display quantization value by using hidden tuplets.
Convert notes to grace notes Select the notes, then choose Functions > Note Attributes > Independent > Independent Grace from the Score Editor menu bar, or use the corresponding key command. Choose Functions > Note Attributes > Independent > Not Independent to convert independent notes back to regular notes. Insert an independent note directly Press and hold Option while selecting a note in the Part box, then drag it to the desired position. Grace notes cannot be inserted directly.
Use automation in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can create and edit automation data directly in the Score Editor. This is especially useful with region-based automation, because you can see the notes that are affected. For information about using Automation, see Overview of automation in Logic Pro. Show automation in the Score Editor Do one of the following: • Click the Show/Hide Automation button • Press A. in the Piano Roll Editor menu bar.
Add lyrics to a score 1. Do one of the following: • Drag the lyric object below the first note of the melody. • Select the lyric object in the Part box, then click the position of the first note with the Text tool. Note: Watch the help tag. Each lyric object must be at the same bar position as the note it belongs to (taking display quantization into account). 2. Enter the text for the first note, then press Tab (not Return) to automatically move the insertion point to the next note.
Add and edit text Add text to a score in Logic Pro You can use text objects in the Part box to add standard text (text other than lyrics, automatic text, or global text). The basic functions for moving the pointer, deleting parts of the text, and so on, are the same as they are for most text-editing apps. You can also use text objects (with a music symbol font) to add and position music symbols anywhere in the score, free of the rhythmic constraints of MIDI notes. Add text to the score 1.
Each text object (except text in the header, or at or outside the page margins) is saved as a meta event in a particular MIDI region, at a specific bar position. This position is displayed in the help tag as you insert the text object. Text events are also displayed in the Event List, allowing you to change their position, but not the text itself. Tip: You can simultaneously add text to several staffs. This is handy if you want to insert the text “accelerando al fine,” for example, into all instruments.
Edit text event parameters 1. Select the text you want to change. 2. In the Event inspector, do any of the following: • To change the staff for the text object: Drag the Staff number up or down. (This is only relevant for multiple staff styles.) • To convert the text to lyric text: Select the Lyric checkbox. • To change the text style: Choose a different text style from the Staff Style pop-up menu. • To change the text alignment: Choose a different text alignment from the Align popup menu.
• Note Heads: Used for the display of note heads. • Guitar Grid Fingerings: Used for the display of guitar grid fingerings. • Guitar Markings: Used for the display of guitar markings. • Fingerings: Used for the display of fingering markings. Open the Text Styles window Choose Layout > Text Styles from the Score Editor menu bar. Apply a text style to a text object Select the text object, then choose a text style from the Style pop-up menu in the Event inspector.
Automatic text objects can be inserted as both global text (in the margin areas), or as text objects related to a bar position (in one of the staffs or regions). For example, you can insert the INSTR object as a global object to display the name of the current score set on all pages. The appearance, and exact positioning, of these objects can be set in the Event inspector. Add an automatic text object Drag a REGION, INST, SONG, or DATE text object from the Part box to the score.
Position global text Do one of the following: To move global text objects vertically only: Use the Pointer tool. To move global text objects both vertically and horizontally: Press and hold Shift, then use the Pointer tool; or use the Layout tool. When a global text object is selected, the Event inspector contains the following additional parameters: • Align pop-up menu: Although alignments relating to bar positions are shown in the popup menu, you can’t choose them here.
Drag a chord grid symbol from the Part box into the score. Double-click an existing chord grid symbol in the score. Logic Pro Instrument Editor for chord grids You use the Instrument Editor pane to view, create, and edit instrument tunings and chord grid libraries. You can also import and export chord grid libraries. The Instrument Editor pane includes the following parameters: • Name column: Displays the instrument tuning name. Double-click to edit.
Logic Pro Chord Grid Selector You can select and filter individual chord grids from your instrument tunings and chord grid libraries in the Chord Grid Selector. The Chord Grid Selector includes the following parameters: Instrument parameters • Name pop-up menu: Choose the name of the instrument tuning you want to use. • Tuning field: Displays the default tuning for the chosen instrument. • Number of Strings field: Displays the default number of strings for the chosen instrument.
View parameters • Number of Frets pop-up menu: Choose the number of frets (four, five, or six) to be shown in the chord grids. • Left-Handed checkbox: Change the chord grid display to suit left-handed users. Other parameters • Playback button: Click to listen to a selected chord grid. • Action pop-up menu: Choose how the chord grid strings are played back and at what tempo. • Chord: All strings are played back simultaneously.
The Chord Grid Editor includes the following parameters: Instrument parameters • Name pop-up menu: Choose the instrument tuning in which to add or replace the chord grid. • Tuning field: Displays the default tuning for the chosen instrument. • Number of Strings field: Displays the default number of strings for the chosen instrument. • Capo pop-up menu: Choose the fret on which to place the Capo. Choose 0 for no Capo, 1 to place a Capo on the first fret, and so on.
Open the Chord Grid Editor Do one of the following: Drag a chord grid symbol from the Part box into the score display. Choose a chord grid symbol in the Part box, then click within the Score Editor with the Pencil tool. Choose Layout > Chord Grid Library from the Score Editor menu bar, then click Chord Grid Editor. For information about creating and editing custom chord grids, see Create and edit chord grids in Logic Pro.
Either technique opens the Chord Grid Selector pane in the Chord Grid Library. 2. Select a chord grid, then click OK. Change the scale of a chord grid After inserting chord grids in your score, you can edit their size and position accordingly.
The scaling values are based on the Grid scaling and Chord scaling settings in the File > Project Settings > Score > Chords & Grids pane. Align selected chord grids vertically Select multiple chord grids, Control-click any one of them, then choose Align Object Positions Vertically. The selected chord grid symbols are aligned vertically. Align all chord grids vertically 1. Control-click a chord grid, then choose Align Object Positions Vertically. 2.
Copy an existing chord grid Press and hold Option while dragging an existing chord grid, then release it when you reach the desired position. Hide the chord name You have the option to hide or show the chord name on a chord grid. Control-click a chord grid, then choose Hide Chord Name from the shortcut menu. Modify the chord of an existing chord grid Double-click the chord grid, choose another in the Chord Grid Selector, then click OK.
Edit an existing chord grid in the Chord Grid Editor 1. Double-click a chord grid in the Chord Grid Selector pane. The chord grid opens in the Chord Grid Editor pane. 2. Set the Chord and View parameters to suit your needs. 3. Click the Add or Replace button. The Chord Grid Selector pane opens, with the edited chord grid added or replaced in your chosen library. Display higher positions (frets) in the chord grid Click 1st to open a pop-up menu, then choose another fret number.
Move an existing fingering dot Do one of the following: Click another fret on the same string. Drag the dot to a new fret position. Set the finger number for a fingering dot Control-click a dot, then choose a number from the shortcut menu.
Add an optional fingering dot Do one of the following: Option-click a string to create an optional dot. If another real dot exists on the same string, the real dot remains. Option-click an existing dot to change it to an optional dot. An empty string is shown as a result. Delete a fingering dot Do one of the following: Select a dot so that it turns green, then press the Delete key.
Click the area at the top of the string. The result is the same using either approach: the string is open. Add barres to a chord grid in Logic Pro A barre shows where the performer places his or her finger over several strings at the same fret. You can add, edit, and delete barres on a chord grid. Add a barre Do one of the following: Drag the left or right edge of an existing dot to the right or left.
Place the pointer over a string, then drag to the left or right. Move a barre Drag the barre to a new fret position. Delete a barre Select a barre so that it turns green, then press the Delete key. Mute strings in a chord grid in Logic Pro You can show muted and unmuted open strings on a chord grid. Mute a string Click the area at the top of the string.
The string is muted. Unmute a string Click the area at the top of the string. The string is open.
Add and edit chord grid libraries in Logic Pro You can create a new chord grid library for an existing instrument tuning, or for a new instrument tuning. You do this from the Instrument Editor pane in the Chord Grid Library. Create a new chord grid library for an existing instrument tuning 1. Open the Instrument Editor pane by doing one of the following: • Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Chord Grid Library, then click Instrument Editor.
• Library Name field: Enter a name for the chord grid library. • Tuning pop-up menu: Choose the instrument tuning in which you want to add the library. • Number of Strings pop-up menu: Leave this at the default setting. 4. Click Create to add the new chord grid library to the chosen instrument tuning. Create a new chord grid library for a new instrument tuning 1.
Delete an instrument tuning or chord grid library Select the instrument tuning or chord grid library that you want to delete, then click the Delete button. If you select an instrument tuning, the entire tuning and its chord grid libraries are deleted. If you select a chord grid library, only that library is deleted (unless it’s the only library within a tuning; then the instrument tuning is also deleted).
4. Enter a name for the library, and browse to the location in which to save it. 5. Click Save. Edit score region parameters Logic Pro score region parameters overview Score region parameters let you control different aspects of how regions appear in the score. They affect the display of notes and other events, but have no effect on the sound or playback of the project.
Logic Pro Style region parameter You choose the staff style for the selected track (and when Additional Score Options is selected, for selected regions) from the Staff Style pop-up menu. For information about using staff styles, see Logic Pro staff styles overview. Logic Pro Quantize region parameter The Quantize parameter applies visual quantization to notes, setting the shortest note value that can be displayed.
Quantize setting Corresponding note value 96 1/64-note triplets 192 1/128-note triplets 384 1/256-note triplets When a single-value setting is used, automatic triplets are not displayed at all (except for triplets inserted with the pointer, using an N-tuplet object). Important: The Quantize parameter must be set to a triple quantization value to enable the automatic display of triplets.
Logic Pro Interpretation region parameter Music notation is meant as a guide to performance, and rhythmic values are often not notated with metronomic precision. The Interpretation setting helps you produce a more readable score from real-time recordings. You should usually turn it off when adding notes via step input or with the pointer. If Interpretation is turned on, notes are generally displayed with longer length values than their actual length, to avoid having many short rests.
Syncopation can also be turned on and off for individual notes, independent of the Region inspector setting, using note attributes. For more information, see Change note syncopation and interpretation in the Logic Pro Score Editor. If the Syncopation setting produces unwanted results, you can change the graphic display of notes connected with ties by adding a short user rest from the Part box at the bar position where you want the tie subdivided.
Although you can’t see that all notes continue to sound here, the result looks like this if No Overlap is turned off: The solution typically involves turning on No Overlap and using sustain pedal markings. Pedal markings are automatically displayed if notes are recorded in real time with a MIDI keyboard and sustain pedal. Show or hide overlapping notes Select or deselect the No Overlap checkbox in the Region inspector.
Edit default score parameters for new regions in Logic Pro New MIDI regions created by recording, or with the Pencil tool, include a default set of region parameters (and event parameters). You can view and edit these defaults when no staff (no region) is selected in the Score Editor. The defaults remain as set until you quit Logic Pro, but can be changed at any time.
Assign staff styles to tracks in Logic Pro You can assign a different staff style to each track in the score. Changing staff styles allows you to control the display of individual staffs in the score, and quickly create parts for transposing instruments. Each track has a default staff style, which appears in the Staff Style pop-up menu in the Region inspector.
You can select multiple tracks, and assign the same staff style to all selected tracks. In Linear view, click the clef on the staff, then choose a staff style from the shortcut menu. Set the track to determine the staff style automatically 1. In the Tracks area, select one or more tracks. 2. In the Region inspector, choose Staff Style > Auto Style.
• Assign parameters: Shows the parameters for assigning notes to different voices. Every staff can contain up to 16 independent voices, but each voice can be displayed on only one staff. (Consequently, a staff style must contain at least as many voices as staffs.) You can show the entire Staff Style window, or only part of the window, using the View buttons on the right side of the menu bar.
Edit staff styles in the Logic Pro Staff Style window In the Staff Style window, you can edit various staff style parameters. In the style overview, you can edit the style type, size, transpose, and range parameters. Edit staff style parameters In the style overview, do any of the following: To rename a staff style: Double-click the name and enter a new name. To choose a different staff style type: Click and hold the type, then choose a different type from the pop-up menu.
To set the appearance of brackets and bar lines: You can only edit this parameter for styles with multiple staffs: it lets you determine which staffs are bracketed (two bracket types are available) or connected by bar lines (only at the beginning of each staff line, or at every bar line). If a staff style consists of more than two staffs, the brackets and bar lines can be set to connect only certain parts of the overall staff style—they can be interrupted in between staffs.
Edit Staff parameters for the selected staff style In the Staff section of the Staff Style window, do any of the following: • • Change the clef: Choose a clef from the Clef pop-up menu. In addition to the standard clefs, there are some additional options: • Drum.0 to Drum.8: Staffs with 0 to 8 lines and a neutral percussion clef. The relationship of MIDI note pitches to the top line of all staffs corresponds to the top line in a regular bass clef (A2). No accidentals are displayed in these drum staffs.
Edit voice parameters for the selected staff style In the Voice section of the Staff Style window, do any of the following: Change how rests are displayed: Choose a value from the Rest pop-up menu. Automatic display of rests can be turned off (by choosing Hide), or set to display beat slashes instead of rests (by choosing Slash). This is useful for rhythm section parts, and improvised solos.
Edit assign parameters for the selected staff style In the Assign section of the Staff Style window, do any of the following: Set the MIDI channel assignment for a voice: Drag the channel value up or down. Set the split point between voices: Drag the split value up or down.
Copy staffs or voices in the Logic Pro Staff Style window In the Staff Style window, you can copy and paste staffs in a staff style, and also copy and paste voices in a staff. Copy and paste staffs in a staff style 1. In the Staff section of the Staff Style window, select the staff. 2. Choose Edit > Copy from the Staff Style window menu bar (or press Command-C). 3. Choose Edit > Paste from the Staff Style window menu bar (or press Command-V). The copied staff is pasted above the selected staff.
4. Open the Staff Style window in the target project, then choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). Note: If you copy a MIDI region from one project to another, and the staff style used by the original MIDI region doesn’t exist in the target project file, it is automatically copied, along with the MIDI region. Delete staff styles in Logic Pro You can delete staff styles in the Staff Style window in both Single view and List view. In List view you can select and delete several staff styles simultaneously.
Using the Voice Separation tool, you can draw a separation line between notes on a staff to assign them to the predefined MIDI channels of the voices. Separate voices by split point Choose a note pitch for the voice in the Staff Style window’s Split column. Separate voices by MIDI channel Assign a MIDI channel to each voice in the Staff Style window’s Chan column.
Display polyphonic parts on separate staffs in Logic Pro You can “explode” polyphonic parts, displaying all voices on separate staffs, regardless of staff style settings. (Other voice parameters remain valid.) This makes it easier to add notes using the pointer. If you add a note to a staff style that uses MIDI channels for voice separation, it’s automatically assigned the corresponding MIDI channel (of the staff that you add the note to).
For example, the following image depicts a piano passage using the Piano staff style featuring two MIDI channels (1 and 2). The notes in the upper staff belong to voice one (MIDI channel 1). The notes in the lower staff belong to voice two (MIDI channel 2). Using the Voice/Staff Assignment commands in the Score Editor’s Functions menu, you can place the right-hand notes falling below middle C in the bass staff, but maintain the beaming.
Note: By default, rests are displayed according to the Rest settings for the staff style. In the cross staff beaming example described above, however, most (or all) notes belong to the voice of the top staff, and the lower staff will contain rests—some even at positions occupied by notes. To avoid this situation, choose a staff style where the automatic display of rests is turned off for the bottom staff’s voice, then add rests manually from the Part box.
2. In the Head pop-up menu, choose the shape of the note head for notes triggered by this particular pitch. A note must be assigned to a drum group to be displayed in a mapped staff style. If it’s not, it won’t be visible. 3. In the Group pop-up menu, choose a drum group. Some of the groups are predefined for the most commonly used drum sounds (Kick, Snare, Hi-Hat, Toms, Cymbals, and so on).
• Voice section: Below Voice (in the top header line), is a separate Voice column, where the different voices are numbered automatically. The staff style shown above contains one staff with five independent voices. • Horizontal lines: Display the Staffs-Voices-Drum Groups hierarchy, indicating the borders between these elements. Each drum group belongs to the voice at the same horizontal position. • Pos parameter: Affects the vertical positioning of all notes in the corresponding drum group.
Staff style Clef Transposition Organ 1/3+4/5 (3 staffs) Treble/Bass/Bass clef - Organ 1+2/3/5 (3 staffs) Treble/Bass/Bass clef - Organ 1+2/3+4/5 (3 staffs) Treble/Bass/Bass clef - Piano 1/3 (2 staffs) Treble/Bass clef - Piano 1/3+4 (2 staffs) Treble/Bass clef - Piano 1+2/3 (2 staffs) Treble/Bass clef - Piano 1+2/3+4 (2 staffs) Treble/Bass clef - Piccolo Treble clef −1 octave Soprano Sax Treble clef Bb (+2) Tenor Sax Treble clef Bb (+14) Trumpet in A Treble clef A (+3) Tru
Open the Score Sets window Choose Layout > Score Sets from the Score Editor menu bar (or use the Show/Hide Score Sets Window key command). If the All Instruments score set is chosen when you open the Score Editor, a warning indicates that this score set cannot be edited. Choose a score set in the Logic Pro Region inspector You can view available score sets and instruments in the Filter pop-up menu in the inspector.
Create and delete score sets in Logic Pro When you open a Score Editor window while several regions are selected in the Tracks area, Logic Pro automatically creates a score set containing the instruments of the selected regions. You can also create a score set in the Score Sets window. Score sets you create are saved with the project. Create an empty score set Choose New > New Empty Set in the Score Sets window. You can insert instruments into the empty score set, one at a time.
• Instrument: This column shows which instruments are included in the score set, and their (vertical) order of appearance in the score. Track instrument icons are also displayed in this column, at the highest zoom level. • To set the full name: Click the Full Name column to open a name field. By default, the name of the track instrument is used for the instrument name in the score. To change the name, select the default “@(reference)” text, and enter a new name.
Brackets and bar lines can also be interrupted between staffs, allowing you to form groups of connected instruments in a score. If you want to delete a line or bracket, grab the corresponding symbol at its end point (bottom), and drag it upward, until it disappears. You can use the same method to shorten lines. Bar line connections can also be edited directly in the score. Click the upper end of a bar line to connect it to the next (higher) staff. Repeating the procedure disconnects the bar lines.
Scale a score set Select the score set in the Score Sets window, then set the Scale parameter to a new value. Note: Because the All Instruments score set can’t be edited (and therefore, can’t be scaled), you must create a dedicated score set for the full score, in most cases. Create layouts for a score and its parts in Logic Pro You can define separate layout parameters for a full score and its parts, then choose which parameters a score set uses.
Extract parts from a score in Logic Pro You can quickly extract a single instrument from the score, instead of creating a score set for every instrument in order to produce parts. Using this method, only the track instrument names are used as instrument names in the score. So, if you use this method to print your parts, you see the real instrument names of the instruments as displayed in the Tracks area.
• Show Page Rulers: Displays horizontal and vertical rulers that make precise layout tasks easier. Switch to Page view Do one of the following: • Choose View > Page View from the Score Editor menu bar. • Click the Page View button in the Score Editor menu bar. Change page display options Choose View > Page Display Options from the Score Editor menu bar, then choose display options. To choose page display options, you must be in Page view. Jump to a specific page of the score 1.
Move a bar up or down to the previous or next staff In Page view, grab the bar (or bars) with the Layout tool and drag it down (the pointer changes to a hand with a downward-pointing thumb), then release the mouse button. The bar is moved to the next staff system, and the remaining bars in the line are distributed evenly over the entire width of the page. You can also move the first bars of a staff upward into the preceding staff, by dragging them up with the Layout tool.
Edit local margins in a Logic Pro score You can move the left and right margins of each individual staff system with the Layout tool, so they don’t align horizontally with the page margins. Local margins are saved as part of the current score set, allowing different settings for each score set. Move the left or right margin of a staff system 1.
Share a Logic Pro score When you’re ready, you can print the score, save it as a PDF file, or export as an image using the Camera tool. The last method is most helpful if you want to export only a section of the score.
2. Make sure you’re viewing the score in Page view, then select the Camera tool. 3. Drag across the part of the score section you want to export. A selection rectangle appears as you drag. As soon as you release the mouse button, a PDF file of the selected area is created (or the selection is copied to the Clipboard, depending on the Camera Tool setting you chose).
Show folder contents in the score Choose View > Explode Folders from the Score Editor menu bar. Display global tracks in the Logic Pro Score Editor In Linear view, you can display global tracks in the Score Editor. You choose which global track types are shown in the Score Editor, independent of those shown in the Tracks area. Show global tracks in the Score Editor Choose View > Global Tracks from the Score Editor menu bar.
Edit the length of duration bars in the Logic Pro Score Editor When duration bars are displayed in the Score Editor, you can change their length. Change the length of a duration bar Place the pointer over the end point of the duration bar, then drag horizontally when the pointer turns into the length change icon. Display guide lines in the Logic Pro Score Editor You can show an object’s exact time position by displaying guide lines in the Score Editor.
Share projects Overview of sharing in Logic Pro Logic Pro provides a variety of options you can use to distribute your projects and songs.
Bounce projects Bounce a project to an audio file in Logic Pro You can render, or bounce, a project to a single audio file or to multiple audio files. A project can be bounced to several different file formats simultaneously, and a surround project can be bounced to a set of surround audio files. Projects can be bounced either in real time or offline (which is typically faster). All parameters, effects, and automation on the unmuted tracks in the project are recorded as part of the bounce file.
6. Set the bounce mode by selecting one of the two Mode buttons: • Realtime: Performs the bounce in real time. Use this setting when you want to bounce audio and software instrument tracks, or external MIDI sound sources that are routed to the Mixer via aux channels. • Offline: Bouncing offline can be faster than real time for more complex projects, and can perform bounces not possible in real time (because they might exceed the processing power of your computer).
Set the bounce filename and location By default, the name of the bounce file matches the selected output channel strip (Output 1-2, if the project was bounced using the File > Bounce command). Bounce files are saved by default to the ~/Music/Logic/Bounces folder, but you can specify a new location. The new location is used for subsequent bounces. When you bounce a project, you can change the name and choose a different location to save the bounce file (or files). 1.
Burn a project to a CD or DVD in Logic Pro In addition to bouncing a project to an audio file, if your computer has disc-burning capability you can burn the project to a CD or DVD (in DVD-Audio format). Logic Pro can directly burn Red Book audio to blank CDs or burn DVD-Audio to blank DVDs. You can bounce to one or more audio formats and burn the project to disc at the same time. Burn the current project to a CD or DVD 1.
6. Set burn options by selecting either of the following Mode checkboxes: • Simulate write only: This option simulates a CD/DVD burn, but doesn’t write data to the blank media. This option can be used either alone or in conjunction with the “Write as multi-session” option (if burning a CD). • Write as multi-session: This option is only available when CDDA is chosen in the Mode pop-up menu. This option lets you add a data session to the same CD at a later date—to add the project folder, for example. 7.
Set the disk filename By default, the name of the burned disk matches the selected output channel strip (Output 1-2, if the project was bounced using the File > Bounce > Project command.) When you burn a project, you can change the filename for the disk. • In Logic Pro, to change the filename, enter a new name in the Save As field, then click Save. When you bounce to multiple destination files, all the resulting files are saved in the chosen folder.
Set bounce options PCM bounce options in Logic Pro When you select PCM in the Destination area of the Bounce dialog, the following options are available: • File format pop-up menu: Choose the PCM file format (AIFF, Broadcast Wave, or CAF). PCM files can be automatically added to the Project Audio Browser by selecting the Add to Project checkbox. • Resolution pop-up menu: Define the resolution of the bounce file.
The Logic Pro > Preferences > Audio > I/O Assignments pane gives you access to the surround settings. • You set the stereo and surround output formats in the Output pane. • The Bounce Extensions pane displays the extensions that are added to the filenames resulting from a stereo or surround bounce. Select the various fields to edit the extensions. • You set the stereo and surround input formats in the Input pane.
When you click MP3 in the Destination area, the following options are available: • Bit Rate (Mono/Stereo) pop-up menus: MP3 bit rates are available between 32 kbps and 320 kbps, but default to 80 kbps mono, and 160 kbps stereo. These rates offer acceptable quality and good file compression. For enhanced audio quality, you can choose: • 96 kbps for mono streams • 192 kbps for stereo streams You can choose higher rates, but the quality improvement afforded by bit rates above 96/192 kbps is nominal.
• “Write ID3 tags” checkbox: Writes ID3 tags to the file. • ID3 Settings button: Opens a dialog where you can edit and configure ID3 tags. To edit an ID3 tag, double-click any of the Content column fields to the right of the corresponding ID3 Frame column entry, and enter your text. Select the “Use default values” checkbox to display default settings for certain Content columns, such as the Project Title and Tempo (Beats Per Minute) columns.
• Encoding pop-up menu: Choose Advanced Audio Codec (AAC) or Apple Lossless to set the encoding for your .m4a (commonly referred to as MP4) file. While both encoding algorithms provide high-quality audio, the AAC format uses a higher compression ratio, resulting in smaller file sizes. Choosing the M4A: AAC option in the Destination area disables PCM > Surround. Split Stereo is still available.
The dithering algorithm that sounds best depends on the audio material, and also your personal taste. Audition the audio material to be dithered with each of the algorithms to determine the best setting. In some cases, you may find that the best results are achieved by using no dithering at all. Important: Avoid dithering the same audio signal multiple times. Share songs to the Music app from Logic Pro You can share a song to the Music app to play, add to a playlist, or sync to your iPhone or iPad.
Share songs from Logic Pro using AirDrop AirDrop lets you quickly send songs to anyone near you—wirelessly. Share a song to another Mac nearby 1. To see other Mac computers nearby, turn on Wi-Fi and click the AirDrop icon in the sidebar of a Finder window. The recipients must also turn on Wi-Fi and click the AirDrop icon on their Mac computers. The user pictures and computer names of those near you appear in the AirDrop window. 2. In Logic Pro, choose File > Share > AirDrop. 3.
Share songs from Logic Pro using MailDrop MailDrop lets you quickly send songs to anyone via Mail. Share a song via Mail 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Share > Mail. 2. In the Mail dialog, do the following: • Select Project, if you want to share a project that recipients can open and edit in Logic Pro on another Mac. If working with a project package, all project assets are shared. If working with a project folder, only the project file and not the assets are shared.
3. In the Share to SoundCloud dialog, do the following: • To sign in to a different SoundCloud account, click Change, then enter the login information for the account. • To share an audio file, select File, click Browse, then browse to the location of the file. • To share the current song, select Bounce. • Enter title, artist, composer, and album information for the song in the respective text fields. Songs must have a title in the Title field. The remaining information is optional.
Share a project to GarageBand for iOS 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Share > Project to GarageBand for iOS. 2. In the Export to GarageBand for iOS dialog Save As field, Logic Pro defaults to naming your shared GarageBand project with the same name as your project. If you wish to change the name, type the new name here. Warning: If you change the folder from GarageBand for iOS—iCloud, your shared project does not appear in the GarageBand for iOS My Songs browser. 3. Click Save.
Export a Logic Pro project as a Final Cut Pro XML file The Final Cut Pro XML format is used to import and export audio data between Final Cut Pro and Logic Pro. The Final Cut Pro XML format supports volume and stereo pan automation data. Export the current project as a Final Cut Pro XML file 1. In Logic Pro, choose File > Export > Project to Final Cut Pro XML. 2. In the Export dialog, type a name for the exported file and browse to a location to save it. 3.
Work in surround Using Surround in Logic Pro Logic Pro offers extensive surround processing and mixing functions for all major surround formats. Surround features are available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. All audio signals can be positionally mixed, allowing you to place them anywhere in the surround field. See Logic Pro Surround Panner overview and Surround master channel strip in Logic Pro.
Set up for surround Surround preferences in Logic Pro Before you can create a Logic Pro project in surround, you need to specify which outputs of your interface are connected to which speaker. If you’re recording in surround, you also need to specify the inputs of your audio interface. These configurations are made in the Output and Input panes of the Audio > I/O Assignment preferences. The I/O Assignments pane features three subpanes: Output, Bounce Extensions, and Input.
Set the output or input surround channel assignment 1. In the Logic Pro I/O Assignment preferences, click either Output or Input. 2. Choose the surround format you want to work in from the “Show as” pop-up menu. This action automatically sets the input and output channel pop-up menus in both the Output and Input panes. Note: The surround format chosen here only alters the layout/routing of channels to speakers in the I/O Assignments pane.
• Default: Activates the default setup of Logic Pro. For example, for the 5.1 format, output 1 is routed to the left speaker, output 2 to the right one, output 3 is assigned to left surround, output 4 to right surround, output 5 to the center speaker, and output 6 to the LFE channel. • ITU: Assigns the International Telecommunications Union standard, used by many professionals. • WG 4: Uses the WG4 standard, set by the DVD Forum for DVD-Audio.
Change the bounce extensions 1. Click Bounce Extensions. 2. Enter a new extension name in any of the active fields. For example, the default left extension “.L” could be renamed “.Left,” or the left surround extension “.Ls” could be changed to “.LSurr.” Don’t forget the period before the extension. If you change your mind, click the Reset Extensions button to revert to default entries. Note: Changing the extension has no impact on the files—it simply makes them easier to identify.
Set the surround format for a Logic Pro project You choose the surround format you want to use for a project in the Audio project settings. By default, a new project is set to 5.1. Choose the project surround format 1. Choose File > Project Settings > Audio (or use the Open Audio Project Settings key command, default assignment: Option-U). 2. Choose a format from the Surround Format pop-up menu. Tip: Save a project that has been set up for surround format work as a template.
Choose the channel strip input format • Click and hold the button directly below the EQ graphic on the channel strip, then choose an input format from the pop-up menu. Set the channel strip output format in Logic Pro Logic Pro can automatically determine the output format of specific channel strip types.
Set a channel strip output format to surround • In Logic Pro, click and hold the Output slot of the channel strip, then choose Output > Surround from the pop-up menu. The Pan control of the channel strip is replaced by a two-dimensional Surround control. The loudspeakers are represented by colored dots and the pan position is indicated by a white dot that can be moved. See Logic Pro Surround Panner overview. Set the output format of multiple channel strips to surround 1.
Change the multichannel level meter order 1. Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Display (or use the Open Display Preferences key command). 2. Click Mixer, then choose an option from the Channel Order pop-up menu in the Level Meters area. Note: The setting you choose here does not apply to metering plug-ins, such as Level Meter or Multimeter.
The Surround Panner has three operation modes, depending on the channel strip input format. It provides different parameters when used in mono to surround and stereo to surround channels. When used on surround to surround channels, it acts as a Surround Balancer control. See Surround Panner parameters in Logic Pro. Open the Surround Panner window • In Logic Pro, double-click the Surround Panner control of a channel strip.
• In Logic Pro, use the parameters of the Surround Panner to change the diversity and angle, to change the output format, or to change channel separation values. Use the Surround Panner on stereo input channel strips If the source input is set to stereo, the Stereo-to-Surround Panner appears. See Set the channel strip input format in Logic Pro.
In Logic Pro, do any of the following: • Move the L or R puck in the surround field to move the second puck in a symmetrical fashion. • Drag the third puck to move both the L and R pucks, while maintaining a given spread. • Left/right movement changes the angle of both. • Up/down movement changes the diversity.
Surround Panner parameters in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, the Surround Panner features a set of common parameters, regardless of the channel strip input format. Click the disclosure triangle at the lower-left corner of the Surround Panner window to display the extended parameters. Note: The extended parameters are not available in the Surround Balancer.
• Center Level slider: Drag the Center Level slider or field to set the volume relationship of the (front) center channel—typically used for dialogue in film and TV productions. • LFE Level slider: Drag the LFE Level slider or field to control the volume of the LFE output. The abbreviation stands for Low Frequency Enhancement or Low Frequency Effects, as the LFE output is most commonly sent to a subwoofer channel. The use of a subwoofer speaker is not mandatory.
• Unity gain at mid-point: This was the default setting used for Logic Pro versions 9.1.4 to 9.1.6. Projects imported from these Logic Pro versions will adopt the Legacy pan law. You can choose a different pan law from a dialog or this pop-up menu. • Legacy (Pre Logic 9.1.4): This was the default setting used for Logic Pro versions 8.x to 9.1.3. Projects imported from these Logic Pro versions will adopt the Legacy pan law. You can choose a different pan law from a dialog or this pop-up menu.
Logic Pro automatically performs surround downmixes and upmixes whenever the format of the input and output channels don’t match. For example, if you insert a quadraphonic plug-in into a 5.1 bus, a downmix from 5.1 to Quad, followed by an upmix back to 5.1 occurs automatically. Multichannel effects Logic Pro multichannel effects overview Effects that are not available as true surround effects can be inserted as multichannel effects in surround channels.
Configure multichannel effects in Logic Pro The Configuration tab determines how parameter changes affect the plug-in instances. In Logic Pro, when a multichannel plug-in is first inserted into a surround channel, it is automatically preconfigured to match the channel surround format, and to make the best use of the plug-in’s capabilities. For example, a plug-in with mono and stereo capabilities is inserted into a 5.1 bus.
Surround master channel strip in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, when you set the output of a channel strip to surround, a surround master channel strip is automatically created in the Mixer. The surround master channel strip processes signals routed to the outputs configured in the Surround preferences. For more information, see Surround preferences in Logic Pro. You can insert surround effect plug-ins into the master channel strip.
Bounce surround audio files in Logic Pro Bouncing a surround mix in Logic Pro, can create a single interleaved file, or it can create multiple audio files—one per channel—when Split is chosen as the file type. When multiple files are created, each file is identified by a unique extension. Note: Use the Bounce Extensions preferences pane to define filename extensions that will be added to the files resulting from a surround bounce. For more information, see Surround preferences in Logic Pro.
Additional surround information Logic Pro surround formats overview The following surround formats are supported n Logic Pro: Quadraphonic surround format The quadraphonic surround format consists of four full-bandwidth channels, arranged as front left and right and rear left and right (left surround and right surround). It is an old format used for music delivery. Mike Oldfield’s “Tubular Bells” is probably the most popular release in this format.
5.1 (ITU 775) surround format 5.1 (ITU 775) is used for a few surround standards. This is the most common of the surround formats, and is the one you are most likely to use. The 5.1 channels are left, center, right, left surround (left rear), right surround (right rear), and LFE. 6.1 (ES/EX) surround format The 6.1 (ES/EX) format is used for Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES. The 6.1 channels are left, center, right, left surround, surround (rear center), right surround, and LFE.
7.1 (3/4.1) surround format 7.1 (3/4.1) uses the same speaker configuration as 5.1, but adds two additional side channels (left mid and right mid), placed directly to the left and right of the listening position. It is designed for a big cinema, in other words. 7.1 (SDDS—Sony Dynamic Digital Sound) surround format 7.1 (SDDS—Sony Dynamic Digital Sound) adds two additional speakers to 5.1 (left center and right center). As with the other 7.
Table key • L = (Front) Left • Lc = Left Center • C = Center • Rc = Right Center • R = (Front) Right • Lm = Left Mid • Rm = Right Mid • Ls = Left Surround (Rear Left) • S = Surround (Rear Center) • Rs = Right Surround (Rear Right) • LFE = Low Frequency Effects Encode surround bounce files made in Logic Pro Surround mixes bounced in Logic Pro are not encoded.
Speaker placement, timing, and levels Set up surround speakers for use in Logic Pro The physical positioning of speakers is key to creating mixes in Logic Pro that translate well to other surround playback systems. Because the 5.1 format is the most widely used, this section covers 5.1 speaker placement. Much of this information can be applied to the other formats. Front speakers The International Telecommunications Union (ITU) 5.
This positioning creates a broad surround sound field throughout the listening area, approximating cinema speaker systems. If the speakers are placed too far forward, the rearward effect will be insufficient. If the speakers are too far back, the surround information won’t be integrated with the overall sound field. Experiment with placement and angles until the surround sound field seems to encompass you, rather than come from behind you.
The center speaker is typically used for dialogue and incidental music/effects tracks. Its level should be similar to the left and right speakers, but can be increased to enhance the intelligibility of dialogue. You should aim to have the sound from all front speakers arriving at the listening position at the same time. You should set the levels of surround speakers and the subwoofer (LFE) to be immersive, and part of the surround stage, rather than “additions” to the front speakers.
Work in the Environment Overview of the Environment in Logic Pro The Environment refers to the virtual environment of Logic Pro inside your computer. It provides a virtual view of your MIDI studio, giving you complete control over your MIDI setup, and includes the following objects. • Physical Input and Sequencer Input objects: Represent the physical MIDI inputs of your MIDI interface and the Logic Pro input.
Open the Environment window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Window > Open MIDI Environment (or press Command-0). Note: If you already have an Environment window open, this command opens another Environment window. • Use the Show/Hide Environment key command to do one of the following: • Open an Environment window. • Bring an open Environment window to the front. • Close an open Environment window.
Work with Environment layers Overview of Logic Pro Environment Layers The Environment can quickly fill up with a large number of objects. To keep things organized, you can assign objects to different display levels, referred to as layers. Think of layers as being different, partial views of the overall Environment. You can easily connect objects between different layers. The distribution of objects across different layers has no effect on their functionality—it’s simply a better way to organize objects.
Create, name, delete, and switch layers in Logic Pro You can create, name, delete, and switch layers in the Environment. Create a layer In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Options > Layer > Create Layer. • Choose Create Layer from the Layer pop-up menu. A new, empty layer called (unnamed) is inserted above the currently selected layer. Name a layer 1. In Logic Pro, choose Rename Layer from the Layer pop-up menu. 2. Enter a new name, then click OK. Delete a layer 1.
Work with Environment objects Tools in the Environment in Logic Pro You can use the Pointer, Pencil, and Eraser tools to select, create, and delete objects in the Environment. The following tools are also available: • Text tool: Click an object with the Text tool to rename it. • MIDI Thru tool: Click an object with the MIDI Thru tool to assign the object to the selected track in the main window.
Move and copy objects in the Logic Pro Environment You can move and copy objects within a layer or between layers, using a variety of techniques. Move an object by dragging In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Grab the icon, name, or positioning bar to the right of the object (in the case of keyboard and fader objects, for example), then drag it to a new position in the layer.
Copy objects between layers by dragging 1. In Logic Pro, open a second Environment window (Window > Open MIDI Environment) that displays the target layer. 2. Select the objects you want to copy in the first Environment window, hold down Option, then drag the objects into the second window. Copy objects between layers using the Clipboard 1. In Logic Pro, select the objects you want to copy and choose Edit > Copy from the Environment menu bar (or press Command-C). 2.
Align objects using key commands • In Logic Pro, use the following key commands to move selected objects one pixel in the relevant direction, even when the grid is turned on: • Object move left • Object move right • Object move up • Object move down Resize an object • In Logic Pro, drag the object’s bottom-right corner. Resize a selected object to its default value • In Logic Pro, choose Options > Clean up > Size by Default.
Create your MIDI signal path MIDI signal path overview in the Logic Pro Environment Before any MIDI events received at your computer’s MIDI inputs can be recorded by Logic Pro, there must be a connection between two Environment objects: • Physical Input object: Represents the MIDI In port or ports of your MIDI interface. • Sequencer Input object: Represents the door into Logic Pro for incoming MIDI events.
3. In the Environment, cable the mapped instrument to software instrument channel strip 1. Assign output connections in the Logic Pro Environment You can assign a direct output connection to a physical MIDI output from any of the following object types: • Instrument • Multi-instrument • Mapped instrument • Touch tracks • GM mixer • MIDI metronome click Any object with a direct output assignment is indicated by a white triangle to its right.
Assign a direct output connection • In Logic Pro, choose a MIDI output from the Port pop-up menu in the Object inspector. The Port pop-up menu lists all MIDI outputs, including the following options: • Off: Disables the connection to the MIDI interface port. • All: Routes the object’s output to all available MIDI ports—useful if the device is sending a pulse, for example.
A cable connection is created between the two objects. If the source object has already been directly assigned to a MIDI output port, a dialog asks if you want to replace the direct assignment. You have three options: • Cancel: The connection is not made, and the direct output assignment of the source object remains intact. • No: The connection is made, but the direct output assignment remains intact.
Remove a cable connection In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Click the cable with the Eraser tool. • Select the cable, then press Delete. • Drag the cable over the triangle of the source object. • Choose Edit > Clear Cables only to remove the selected cables, without clearing any objects that happen to be selected. This is useful when you want to clear all cables leading to, or from, one or more objects, due to the fact that selecting objects also selects all associated cable connections.
The monitor object allows you to view the MIDI events flowing through it. Connect several cables to a common destination 1. In Logic Pro, select the cables. Tip: If the cables are already connected to a common destination, the simplest way to do this is to select the destination object. 2. Drag one of the cables to a new destination object. You’re asked if you want to connect all selected cables to the new destination. 3. Click Connect, or press Return.
Exchange Environments Overview of Exchanging Environments in Logic Pro One of the main advantages of the Environment is that it lets you customize Logic Pro to fully control your MIDI studio. This can, however, present a problem when you share projects with other musicians, or use different studio setups. It also presents a problem when you return to older projects after you’ve changed your studio. Logic Pro offers several functions to make these transitions as easy as possible.
Import an Environment patch spread across several Environment layers In Logic Pro, choose Options > Import Environment > Merge. All Environment objects from the source project are added to the Environment of the destination project. Merged objects are placed in the same layer as their source, which can create a mess if objects already occupy that layer in the destination project.
Replace Environments in Logic Pro The most flexible (but also most time-consuming) method of exchanging Environments is to manually choose whether each Environment object is kept, deleted, or replaced. If you choose to replace an object, you must also define the replacement object. Replace an Environment using custom choices 1. In Logic Pro, choose Options > Import Environment > Custom from the Environment menu bar. 2. Choose the destination project.
Customize the Environment in Logic Pro You can customize the appearance of the Environment by creating more onscreen space, displaying objects graphically or as a list, hiding or coloring cables, or using a mini Environment window that floats on top of other windows. Hide or show the inspector • In Logic Pro, choose View > Hide/Show Inspector (or press I). This command hides the inspector—the Layer pop-up menu and Object inspector—making more room for the Environment’s workspace.
View a frameless Environment window There may be times when you want to have access to particular Environment objects while working in the main window—buttons that are used to control a tape machine, for example. Instead of opening an Environment window each time, you can create a mini window that floats on top of other windows. 1. In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Options > Layer > Create Layer. • Choose Create Layer from the Layer pop-up menu. 2.
Environment objects reference Standard instrument objects Standard instruments in the Logic Pro Environment Logic Pro provides standard instrument objects to handle MIDI devices that only use one MIDI channel—typically, older synthesizers, MIDI-controlled effect units, or drum machines. Standard instruments transmit MIDI data on a single MIDI channel. Create a standard instrument In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Choose New > Instrument. Click the Environment background with the Pencil tool.
Standard instrument parameters in the Logic Pro Environment Standard instruments have the following parameters: • Port pop-up menu: Use to set a direct connection to one of your MIDI output ports. Remember that you can also cable an instrument object directly to (or from) other Environment objects, allowing MIDI processing. • Channel pop-up menu: Sets the MIDI channel for the instrument’s output. If you set this parameter to All, all events are sent with their original channel settings.
• Key Limit field: The two note values of the Key Limit parameter define a pitch range. All notes outside this range are ignored by the instrument when it plays a MIDI region. In other words, this range of notes are not played. • Vel Limit field: The two values of the Vel Lim parameter define a velocity range. All notes with a velocity that falls outside this range are not played by the instrument.
You generally use multi-instrument objects to address multi-timbral hardware synthesizers or samplers. A multi-timbral sound module is one that can receive on several MIDI channels at once, playing back a different sound on each channel simultaneously. As most modern MIDI devices are multi-timbral, the multi-instrument probably is the most commonly used instrument object in your Environment.
• Program Names area: There are 128 program names in the Multi-Instrument window. A total of 15 banks of 128 program names is available. There are several ways to enter program names: • Double-click the name (via the text field). • Copy (via the Clipboard) from a different multi-instrument, or from a wordprocessing program. The Clipboard functions for a whole sound bank are available in the Options pop-up menu.
Subchannels in the Environment in Logic Pro Each of the 16 standard instruments in a multi-instrument provides a separate MIDI channel—mirroring the 16 MIDI channels—and is therefore called a subchannel. The multiinstrument’s interface includes a numbered square (button) for each subchannel. Clicking a numbered square selects the corresponding subchannel, and displays its parameters in the Object inspector.
Mapped instrument objects Mapped instruments in the Logic Pro Environment A mapped instrument is particularly useful for drum instruments or any drum-mode MIDI device. A drum-mode device has different sounds assigned to different MIDI notes, but only uses a single MIDI channel; for example, a drum kit loaded into the Sampler, or MIDI channel 10 of a GM-compliant sound module, or a drum machine.
Mapped Instrument window in the Logic Pro Environment The Mapped Instrument window opens when you double-click a mapped instrument icon or create a new mapped instrument. The rows correspond to input notes, and the columns contain the various parameters available for each note. • Keyboard (Selecting Notes): The keyboard on the left represents the input notes, which can be played by clicking them. You can also select individual notes or note ranges by dragging the mouse over the notes you want to use.
• Output Note: This column is used to set the output note. This is done by either: • Double-clicking the note description and editing the text • Dragging the beam to the right of the output note name MIDI notes are sent while the value is being changed, allowing you to hear what you’re doing. Use the Initialize > Output Notes command to match the output notes of the selected pitches to the input note pitches.
Custom bank selects in the Logic Pro Environment Logic Pro provides 16 bank numbers (0 to 15) for each standard instrument, multiinstrument (including subchannels), or mapped instrument object. You can create custom lists, consisting of as many events (of any kind, even SysEx) as you like, for each of these banks. Whenever you change the bank manually, or send a standard bank change message from Logic Pro, the entire list for that bank is transmitted to your sound module.
Touch track objects Touch tracks in the Logic Pro Environment You use a touch tracks object to trigger MIDI regions or folders with single notes. This function can be used to create a new arrangement in real time, ideal for live performances. You can’t use touch tracks to trigger audio. Any references to regions mean folders and MIDI regions, not audio regions. Despite this limitation, you could conceivably load your audio regions (as files) into the Sampler, and trigger it with a touch tracks object.
Touch Tracks window in the Logic Pro Environment Double-clicking a touch tracks object opens the Touch Tracks window. This window is similar to the Mapped Instrument window. The input note is selected via the keyboard on the left, and the output region assignment and parameters are set in the columns of the corresponding row. For details about mapped instruments, see Mapped instruments in the Logic Pro Environment. A vertical gray line means that the setting is the same as the line above.
• Trigger Modes: The Trigger column determines how region playback is handled: • Multi: Playing the trigger note starts the region. Playing it again restarts the region, without stopping playback of the originally triggered version. • Single: Playing the trigger note once starts the region. Playing it again stops playback, and restarts the region. • Gate: The region plays until the trigger note is released (or until the region ends). • Gate Loop: The region loops until the trigger note is released.
The auto style fader—the default style if you create a fader with a key command—changes styles as you alter its shape and size. The type of fader determines what events the fader sends out and responds to. In two cases, however, the fader doesn’t send out events at all: • The cable switcher routes events to its different outputs. Clicking a cable switcher object makes it step sequentially through the outputs. • The alias assigner changes the references (to an original, or parent object) of fader aliases.
Play back fader movements in the Logic Pro Environment As with the channel strips in the Mixer, you can record fader object movements to tracks, and play them back. You don’t need any special cabling to record the data generated by a fader. All data generated by faders is recorded on the selected track when Logic Pro is in record or record/pause mode. Any fader reacts to incoming events that match its Input definition. The fader must, of course, be in the MIDI signal path.
• Cabling Serially: The Options > “Cable serially” function connects all selected objects in series, beginning with the object at the top left. • Names with Numbers: If you name one object in a selected group of objects with a name that ends in a numeral, the remaining objects adopt the name, but with sequentially increasing numbers. For example, selecting several objects and naming one of them “Object 1” results in the ensuing objects being renamed “Object 2,” “Object 3,” “Object 4,” and so on.
• Text: Text faders function like numerical faders, but can display text for each of the 128 possible MIDI values (0 to 127). Double-clicking the surface of a text fader opens the Text Fader window. • Click a position in this window to send the corresponding fader value. (This is similar to selecting programs by name in the Multi-Instrument window.) • Double-click a position in the window to enter new text. By default, when you create a text style fader, the text positions contain numerical values.
Fader: MIDI events in the Logic Pro Environment Each fader has an Input definition and an Output definition. • Input definition: Determines the types of MIDI events that can remotely control the fader. • Output definition: Determines the types of MIDI events the fader sends out. A fader can, therefore, convert one type of MIDI event to another. Most MIDI events consist of three bytes: • The first byte indicates the type and channel of the MIDI event (a note on channel 3, for example).
• PitchBd: The -1- parameter sets the pitch bend LSB, and the fader position sets the MSB. Typically, you would set the -1- parameter to 0, and use the fader to control the coarse pitch bend amount. A -1- setting of 0, and a fader position of 64, results in no pitch bend. SysEx and Switcher/Meta are special functions of the faders.
• 14 Bit: The result of using this filter setting depends on how it’s used. • Used in conjunction with pitch bend, 2-byte (fine-tuning) pitch bend events are allowed. • Used with controller messages, the fader sends two MIDI controller messages: one for the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and one for the LSB (Least Significant Byte). Note: The fader’s Input and Output definitions must be the same or the 14 Bit setting do not work.
If you set a vector fader’s Vert and Horz definitions to the same MIDI event (the same MIDI controller and channel), the vector fader sends out the same MIDI event each time the crosshair is moved, but on four consecutive MIDI channels, starting with the channel set in the Vert definition.
Cable switchers in the Logic Pro Environment Cable switcher objects route events, rather than generate them. Any kind of MIDI or meta event can be routed by a cable switcher. The only exception is events that match the cable switcher’s Input definition. These events change the switch position (the routing), rather than pass through the cable switcher. A cable switcher can be assigned to any fader style. It’s practical to use the text fader style, as it allows you to label the switcher’s various routes.
The following is a summary of the currently implemented meta events that can be generated by faders: Meta event Controlled function 46 Assign Alias 49 Go to Screenset 50 Go to Project 51 Go to Marker 52 Stop Playback 96 Set fader range minimum 97 Set fader range maximum 98 Set the fader value without sending 99 Bang! Causes the fader to resend its current value.
Open the SysEx Fader Editor window • In Logic Pro, select the fader, then choose SysEx from either the Output or Input pop-up menu in the inspector. The SysEx Fader Editor window opens automatically. You can also specify SysEx as an Input definition, but this has limited usefulness because the incoming message (presumably SysEx) must be very short in order to be recognized.
The corresponding SysEx message is displayed. You can also enter SysEx messages in the SysEx fader window by typing the SysEx string into the Event List. (Check your MIDI device manual for SysEx documentation.) Manually enter SysEx strings • In Logic Pro, choose Syst. Exclusive from the Event Type pop-up menu, then click the Add Event button. A generic SysEx message appears. • The first data byte in the top line (directly after the word SysEx in the Num column) is the manufacturer’s ID.
You can use a similar method to create any kind of MIDI or meta event in the SysEx fader window. Command-clicking any of the eight event type buttons (Note, Program Number, Pitch Bend, Controller, Channel Aftertouch, Poly Aftertouch, SysEx, and Meta Event) creates a new event of that type. Meta events can be created by using the expanded view button, featuring the 0’s and 1’s on its face. The terms SUM (for the checksum) and VAL (for the fader value) being sent are displayed within the SysEx string.
Value option Result 3 Nibbles L The value is sent in three nibbles, with the least significant nibble first. 4 Nibbles L The value is sent in four nibbles, with the least significant nibble first. 2 Nibbles M The value is sent in two nibbles, with the most significant nibble first. 3 Nibbles M The value is sent in three nibbles, with the most significant nibble first. 4 Nibbles M The value is sent in four nibbles, with the most significant nibble first.
Alias objects Alias objects in the Logic Pro Environment You can create an alias of any Environment object, and behaves exactly like the original. In the case of faders, the alias has its own value, which can be different from the value of the original object. This is particularly useful when using text faders, as they consume a lot of memory. If you need several text faders of the same name, make several aliases of one original object. Aliases can be reassigned with meta events.
Alias parameters in the Logic Pro Environment Aliases share the parameters of their parent (original) objects, but they also have their own, special parameters: • Reference pop-up menu: Use to select the original on which the alias is based. • Channel field: Rechannelizes all events (except fader events), leaving the alias to the selected channel. If the Channel setting is All, existing channelized events are not changed.
GM mixer objects GM mixers in the Logic Pro Environment The GM mixer is a collection of 16 fader modules, configured to emulate a virtual mixing desk for 16 MIDI channels. Each module includes controls for volume, mute, preset, and bank, and four assignable knobs (one of which is typically used for pan). There are optional controls for standard XG and GS effects. Create a new GM mixer • In Logic Pro, choose New > GM Mixer.
• Legend checkbox: Turns the display of the legend along the left edge of the GM mixer off and on. The legend indicates what the rows of controls do, and is also used to set the function of the top four rows of knobs. After the GM mixer is set up, you can hide the legend to save space. • Bank checkbox: Hides or shows the bank MSB/LSB display at the bottom of the GM mixer. You can save space by hiding the bank display, unless you need to select program banks numerically.
• In addition to the GM Standard, there are extended standards created by Roland (GS) and Yamaha (XG). GS and XG mode allow you to select different effect programs, and to control the level of the reverb and chorus effects. • The Reset button transmits a GS On or XG On command, and resets all controllers to neutral positions. This allows you to reset all connected sound modules to their standard settings, and begin a mix from scratch.
MMC record buttons in the Logic Pro Environment The MMC record buttons object allows you to control the record-enable state of external MMC-compatible recording devices. (See MIDI Machine Control in Logic Pro.) Create an MMC record buttons object • In Logic Pro, choose New > MMC Record buttons. You can resize the object to determine the layout and number of track record buttons.
Monitor objects in the Logic Pro Environment A monitor object displays all events (MIDI and meta) passing through it. It remembers the last 32 events, with the newest events shown at the bottom of the list. You can resize it to show from 1 to 32 events. Clicking anywhere in the body of the monitor clears all events. Monitors are useful as both testing and branching devices.
Macros have the following parameters: • Auto Fader checkbox: If you select a group of faders and create a macro from them, selecting this box makes them behave as if they were cabled serially. • Show All checkbox: Determines which objects remain visible when integrated into a macro. When selected, all objects are visible (assuming the macro is not resized to hide some of them). When unselected, only fader, monitors, ornament, and keyboard objects are visible.
Arpeggiator objects Arpeggiators in the Logic Pro Environment An arpeggiator object turns chords into arpeggios. It plays the currently held notes— individually—in a selectable pattern (up, down, random, and so on), and at a selectable speed that ranges between whole notes and 768th notes. An arpeggiator features parameters for direction, velocity, speed (Resolution), note length, start quantize (Snap), repeats, octaves, and velocity offset (Crescendo).
Arpeggiator parameters in the Logic Pro Environment Arpeggiators have the following parameters: • • Logic Pro User Guide Direction pop-up menu: Determines the direction of the arpeggiated chord. You can choose between the following settings: • Up: Lowest note to highest note • Down: Highest note to lowest note • Up/Down: Up and down; highest and lowest notes repeat. • Auto: Up or down, depending on whether the second chord note arrived before, or after, the first chord note.
• Octaves field: The arpeggio can be repeated over 1 to 10 octaves. • Crescendo field: The velocity value set here is added every time the arpeggio is repeated (if the Repeat parameter is on). • Controller Base field: All ten parameters of the arpeggiator object can be controlled with MIDI continuous controller events. The Controller Base parameter determines the controller number for the first parameter (Direction). The other parameters are controlled by subsequent controller numbers.
Transformer configuration in the Logic Pro Environment Double-clicking a transformer icon opens the Transformer window, where you can set the conditions and operations. • Logic Pro User Guide Mode pop-up menu: Defines how a transformer handles MIDI events. You can choose between the following operation modes: • Apply operation and let non-matching events pass thru: MIDI events that match the condition are processed. MIDI events that don’t conform to the condition are passed through.
• SysEx mapper (data byte 1 → position, data byte 2 → value): This transformer mode is used to create and edit SysEx messages. The Transformer window operations are replaced by value fields that allow you to enter the structure of the SysEX message including its length, whether or not a checksum is required, and the values of bytes you don’t want to change in real time. In the Conditions area, you select the type of MIDI event that affects the data bytes in the SysEx message.
• Edit pitch bend events: A transformer object can process 14-bit pitch bend events, which contain two discrete data bytes: if byte 1 is changed (by addition or scaling with the -1- operation), the change also affects the second byte. Set the Data Byte 2 operation to Thru to ensure that 14-bit pitch bend data is processed properly. Use Meta events in the Logic Pro Environment You can control the values of any transformer conditions or operations by using meta events.
Delay line objects Delay lines in the Logic Pro Environment A delay line object repeats (echoes) MIDI events passing through it, at intervals ranging from one tick to 256 whole notes. Create a new delay line object • In Logic Pro, choose New > Delay Line. As with the arpeggiator, you need to place a delay line object in the MIDI signal path, and Logic Pro must be in playback mode.
Voice limiter objects Voice limiters in the Logic Pro Environment A voice limiter object restricts the number of MIDI notes (1 to 32) that can be held simultaneously. It does this by note stealing—newly arriving notes cause (some of the) currently held notes to be turned off, once the voice limit is reached. Create a new voice limiter • In Logic Pro, choose New > Voice Limiter. Normally, you assign a voice limiter to a track, and cable its output to the instrument object that you want to voice limit.
Channel splitters in the Logic Pro Environment A channel splitter routes MIDI events by channel. Every MIDI event received at the channel splitter input is automatically routed to the output that corresponds to its MIDI channel. If no cable is connected to the corresponding output channel strip, the event is rerouted to the SUM output (at the top). Create a new channel splitter object • In Logic Pro, choose New > Channel Splitter.
Chord memorizer parameters in the Logic Pro Environment Chord memorizer objects have the following parameters: • Channel field: All chord notes are sent to the defined channel. • Key Limit field: Notes within this range are mapped to chords. Notes outside the range are passed through unaltered. • Transposition pop-up menu: The output chords are transposed by the amount set here. For example, if you map C to a chord consisting of CEG, and set Transposition to 1, then C is mapped to C#FG#.
Enter chords using the mouse 1. In Logic Pro, click the input note on the top keyboard. All notes in the associated chord are inverted on the bottom keyboard. 2. Click notes on the bottom keyboard until the inverted notes of the desired chord are shown. You don’t need to stay within the same octave as the input note. When you’ve entered the notes for your chord, select another input note (on the top keyboard), or close the Chord Memorizer window. Enter chords using your MIDI keyboard 1.
Create a physical input object • In Logic Pro, choose New > Physical Input. To make use of an existing object, drag it into the relevant layer. This does not affect its cabling. Sequencer inputs in the Logic Pro Environment The sequencer input object represents the MIDI input of Logic Pro. You can only have one of these objects in the Environment. MIDI events arrive at main window tracks through the sequencer input object.
Create a sequencer input object • In Logic Pro, choose New > Sequencer Input. To make use of an existing object, drag it to the relevant layer. This does not affect its cabling. MIDI click objects in the Logic Pro Environment The MIDI click object is used to create note events at bar, beat, and division intervals. These can be sent to either a MIDI port or the internal speaker. Each project can have only one MIDI click object.
Channel strip objects Channel strips in the Logic Pro Environment. The Environment’s channel strip object is the building block of the Environment’s Mixer layer, the Logic Pro Mixer, and the inspector’s channel strips. For details about channel strip types, see Channel strip types in Logic Pro. The audio and software instrument tracks you see in the main window are actually routed to channel strip objects on the Environment Mixer layer.
Although channel strip objects aren’t part of the MIDI signal flow, they still allow MIDI messages to control aspects of audio and software instrument playback in Logic Pro. Any MIDI object can be cabled into a channel strip object, thereby feeding control data into it.
Input channel strip in the Logic Pro Environment You can only create input channel strip objects in the Environment. In general, you do not need to do so, as all audio hardware inputs are automatically seen by audio channel strips, and can be monitored and recorded. Input channel strips are primarily included for compatibility with earlier versions of Logic Pro, and for use with certain audio hardware devices.
Video and synchronization Logic Pro video and synchronization overview Logic Pro provides features that let you create or edit the soundtrack of any video or film project. See Add a movie to your project and Work with absolute time code. Logic Pro supports most synchronization protocols, allowing you to work with synchronized external video or film editing and playback hardware, or with video files stored on a locally attached or networked hard drive.
When a movie is opened in a project, the upper part of the inspector shows a closed Movie area, which can be opened by clicking the disclosure triangle. Movie playback follows the playhead position, and vice versa, in the Movie inspector area and in the Movie window. Audio playback for the movie is only audible if either the Movie inspector area or Movie window is open. Note: You will need a fast processor to ensure smooth movie playback.
Remove a movie from a project In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose File > Movie > Remove Movie (or use the corresponding key command). • Open the Movie pop-up menu in the global Movie track header, then choose Remove Movie. All references to the movie are deleted from the project. Use the Movie window in Logic Pro You can drag the slider at the bottom of the Movie window to navigate to any position in a video file.
• 0.25 Size: Reduces the movie to a quarter of its original size. • 0.5 Size: Reduces the movie to half its original size. • Original Size: Displays the movie at its original size. • 2x Size: Expands the movie to twice its original size. • 3x Size: Expands the movie to three times its original size. • Enter Full Screen: Expands the Movie window to fill the full screen. • Keep Aspect Ratio: If selected, the proportions of the image are retained when the Movie window is resized.
Use movie scene markers in Logic Pro Scene markers are SMPTE-locked markers: they remain at the same absolute time position, regardless of tempo changes, and are automatically deleted if the current movie is removed from the project. Scene markers are identified by a filmstrip icon. You can use the Create Movie Scene Markers function to search the movie for significant content changes (scene cuts), and automatically generate scene markers for each of them.
Remove individual scene markers • In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose an option from the Navigate > Other > Remove Movie Scene Markers submenu. • Use the Remove Scene Markers (Auto Range) key command. • Open the Marker List, select the scene marker, then choose Edit > Cut or Edit > Delete from the Marker List Edit menu (or use the corresponding key commands).
Import audio from a QuickTime movie into your project 1. In Logic Pro, select the audio track or tracks you want to use. 2. Do one of the following: • Choose File > Movie > Import Audio from Movie (or use the corresponding key command). • Control-click anywhere in the Movie track, then choose Import Audio from Movie from the shortcut menu. 3. Click the required checkboxes in the dialog, then click OK.
Create and edit soundtracks Logic Pro soundtracks overview Creating a new video soundtrack is similar to working with any Logic Pro project. You can import or record audio and instrument parts, arrange them, process them with effects, and mix your music, dialogue, and sound effects (known as Foley) in stereo or a surround format. You can also import an existing movie soundtrack, edit or enhance it in Logic Pro, and then export your audio back to the movie file. See Use movie audio tracks in Logic Pro.
The Lock (and Unlock) SMPTE Position function is available only when Logic Pro advanced tools and options is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. You can use the Move Region/Event to Playhead Position (Pickup Clock) key command to move a selected event, such as a note, a tempo event, or a region, to the current playhead position. If you want a particular bar in the project to coincide with a specific time position, you can change the tempo of the preceding passage.
Note: When using the Move Region/Event to Playhead Position (Pickup Clock) key command with audio regions, it is the region anchor—not the region start point—that is moved to the playhead position. Position a bar to a specific time 1. In Logic Pro, open the Tempo List. See Logic Pro Tempo List overview. 2. Create a tempo event at the target bar position. 3. Set a time position for this tempo event in the (SMPTE) Position column.
• Word Clock: A signal that is carried by all digital audio interface formats: ADAT, FireWire Audio, S/P-DIF, AES/EBU, T-DIF, and others. Used to maintain the timing integrity of sample words in audio signals that are transmitted digitally between Logic Pro and external hardware or software. See Audio Synchronization settings in Logic Pro. Tip: Logic Pro also supports manual or “human” sync, when receiving synchronization.
• Determine if MMC commands should or should not be transmitted when using the Logic Pro control bar buttons. MMC commands are used for remote control of MIDIcontrolled tape machines. See MIDI Machine Control in Logic Pro. • Open the Synchronization settings. See General Synchronization settings in Logic Pro. • Open the tempo editors. See Logic Pro tempo overview.
MIDI Machine Control in Logic Pro MMC (MIDI Machine Control) is a set of MIDI commands that Logic Pro uses to control the transport functions of any MMC-capable tape machine. The recording process can also be controlled and automated from Logic Pro via MMC. The tape machine provides a SMPTE signal that Logic Pro uses as a synchronization source—with Logic Pro as the receiver.
Switch the record-enabled state of one or more MMC tape tracks When a tape track is selected, the corresponding track on the tape machine switches to a record-enabled state, and deactivates the record-enabled state of all other tracks. You can also do any of the following: • Shift-click multiple tracks to select and record-enable several tracks on the tape machine.
Synchronization problems and solutions in Logic Pro Due to the number of synchronization types available, and different implementations by various manufacturers, you may experience timing issues when using Logic Pro synchronously with other devices or apps. This table describes common synchronization problems and solutions.
Preferences, project settings, and key commands Logic Pro preferences Overview of preferences in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, you can define and modify preferences that apply to all projects. You do this in the Preferences window. These preferences are automatically saved whenever you quit the application. A general preferences file, named com.apple.logic10.plist, is found in the ~/Library/Preferences folder. A separate preferences file for control surfaces, named com. apple.logic.pro.
General preferences Project Handling preferences in Logic Pro The Project Handling pane contains the following project startup and template preferences: • Logic Pro User Guide Startup Action pop-up menu: Defines what happens when Logic Pro is opened. • Do Nothing: Nothing happens when Logic Pro is opened; you need to create a new project, or open an existing project or template. • Open Most Recent Project: Opens the project you were working on when you last closed Logic Pro.
When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the following is available: • “Export MIDI File saves single MIDI Regions as Format 0” checkbox: If only one MIDI region is selected when you choose File > Export > Selection as MIDI File, the contents of the region are saved in MIDI file format 0. This file format is guaranteed to be compatible with every MIDI file player.
• Option-clicking the track header or associated channel strip continues to select the track and all associated regions. • Option-Shift-clicking adds the selected track’s regions to the current selection. • “Select tracks on region/marquee selection” checkbox: Selecting a region or making a selection with the Marquee tool also selects the track header and channel strip, without selecting any of the other regions on the track.
• Right Mouse Button pop-up menu: Determines whether the right mouse button opens the Tool menu, displays an additional Right-click Tool menu, or opens a shortcut menu. • Is Assignable to a Tool: Displays a third Tool menu (Right-click Tool menu) to the right of the Left-click and Command-click Tool menus. Choose the appropriate menu item to assign to the tool, which is available when the right mouse button is pressed while editing.
• Smooth Cycle Algorithm checkbox: Improves the timing of cycle jumps, making it easier to set the length of sample loops while in Cycle mode. If your computer has a very slow processor, this setting reduces the processing requirements for graphics operations. If you’re working in a style that involves frequent cycling of musical sections, you’ll want to select this checkbox.
Notifications preferences in Logic Pro Notification preferences are only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. • Reset Selected Warnings button: Resets any selected warnings and alerts that were previously set to “Do not show again.” • Reset All Warnings button: Resets all warnings and alerts that were previously set to “Do not show again.
The Devices pane contains the following preferences: • Core Audio Enabled checkbox: Enables the Core Audio driver. • Output Device pop-up menu: Use to choose between any installed Core Audio device, including the internal sound hardware. This also includes aggregate audio devices, consisting of several audio interfaces. See the Audio MIDI Setup Help for information on aggregate devices.
Tip: If you find that a higher I/O buffer size setting provides suitably low latency during record monitoring and software instrument playback, you should use it. This minimizes the impact on your computer’s processor or processors. • Resulting Latency (Roundtrip/Output) display: Displays the resulting roundtrip and output latency for the I/O buffer size. • Apply Changes button: Reloads the audio driver with any adjustments made to preferences in this window.
• “Display audio engine overload message” checkbox: When selected, displays an alert message in an overload situation. Otherwise, playback simply stops without displaying an alert. • Sample Accurate Automation pop-up menu: Determines which parameters, if any, are automated with sample accuracy. This type of automation is very processor intensive. It places higher overheads on system resources, which may affect performance (depending on the nature of your projects, and available computing power).
• “Playback pre-roll” checkbox: When selected, all Play commands start playback a little earlier. The exact pre-roll value depends on the current plug-in delay compensation value. This option ensures that transients that fall exactly on the start position are played back correctly. If this option is unselected, transients that fall precisely on the start position can be missed or seem to fade in.
Note: This requires twice as much RAM for 16-bit samples and a third more RAM for 24-bit samples. • Search samples on pop-up menu: Determines the locations that Sampler searches for instrument samples. Choose one of the following: • Local Volumes: Sampler searches storage media attached to or installed in the computer for samples. • External Volumes: Sampler searches storage media accessible over a network for samples. • All Volumes: Sampler searches both internal and network media for samples.
• • Numeric value: You can set a numeric position in the filename which Sampler uses to find the root key. This is useful when a filename uses multiple numbers, such as a loop that uses multiple numbers to indicate both tempo and root key. For example, a loop might be named “loop100-60.wav” to represent that it has a tempo of 100 beats per minute and the root is the 60th position (E6).
The Virtual Memory tab contains the following preferences: • Active checkbox: Turns on or off the virtual memory feature in Sampler. With virtual memory on, only the initial attacks of samples are loaded into RAM; the rest of the sample streams in real time from the hard drive. If your computer has enough physical RAM to hold all samples for a project, you can improve performance by deselecting the Active checkbox.
• Disk I/O Traffic field: Shows Sampler read/write disk load. If read/write traffic exceeds your hard drive’s throughput capacity, you may hear audio glitches. • Not Read From Disk in Time field: Shows the number of audio files Sampler is unable to read in time. If audio cannot be read from disk in time, you may hear audio glitches.
Output preferences in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the Audio Output pane is available. Audio Output preferences let you set the physical output pair on which the stereo output is played, and the surround format. The Output pane consists of the following preferences: When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: • Stereo Output pop-up menu: Sets the physical output pair on which the stereo output is played.
Bounce Extensions preferences in Logic Pro When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the Audio Bounce Extensions pane is available. Audio Bounce Extensions preferences let you set the bounce extension and the surround format.
Input preferences in Logic Pro Input preferences are only available when Additional Surround Options is selected in Advanced preferences. Logic Pro User Guide • Surround Show As pop-up menu: Sets the surround format. The choice you make automatically updates the remaining pop-up menus in the Input pane. • Surround Initialize buttons: Choose between the default setup, the ITU (International Telecommunications Union) standard, and the WG-4 standard.
Audio File Editor preferences in Logic Pro Audio File Editor preferences are only available when Additional Audio Options is selected in Advanced preferences. Logic Pro User Guide • “Warning before processing function by key command” checkbox: Provides a warning before carrying out a destructive edit in the Audio File Editor when you use a key command. This gives you the opportunity to cancel the edit before altering the data.
MP3 preferences in Logic Pro MP3 preferences let you control bit rate, quality, stereo mode, and other MP3 options. Logic Pro User Guide • Bit Rate (Mono/Stereo) pop-up menus: You can choose bit rates between 32 kbps and 320 kbps. The defaults are 80 kbps mono and 160 kbps stereo. These rates offer acceptable quality and good file compression. If you can afford the increased file size, you should choose 96 kbps for mono and 192 kbps for stereo streams. These settings deliver better audio quality.
Recording preferences in Logic Pro You can use Recording settings to determine how Logic Pro responds while in record mode. Logic Pro User Guide • Audio Recording File Type: Select the audio file format for recording. You can select from AIFF, BWF (Wave), or CAF files. AIFF and BWF files are the more universal audio file formats, but CAF allows for exceptionally long recordings. If you don’t plan on recording continuous, half-day or longer audio files, select either AIFF or BWF.
• • Replace pop-up menu: Set the behavior when Replace is enabled. • Region Erase: Erases regions from the Tracks area from the start of recording until the end of recording, even if nothing is played. • Region Punch: Erases regions only where audio material or MIDI events have been recorded. • Content Erase: Does not erase regions but the audio or MIDI content inside of them, from the start of recording until the end of recording, even if nothing is played.
Articulation Switches Note: If any of these parameters are being determined by the Articulation Set Editor for a given channel strip, the preference is dimmed. • MIDI Remote pop-up menu: Determines whether articulation switching is on or off. • MIDI Remote Set pop-up menu: Determines how the MIDI Remote state is set. If you want the MIDI Remote setting to be the same for every channel, choose Global. Otherwise, keep this set to Per Channel Strip.
Logic Pro User Guide • “Control 64 off (Sustain)” checkbox: Sends a Control 64 off (Sustain) message to all software instruments on cycle jumps and when playback begins. • “Control 1 (Modulation) to zero” checkbox: Sends a set Control 1 (Modulation) to zero message to all software instruments on cycle jumps and when playback begins. • “Pitch Bend to center position” checkbox: Sends a Pitch Bend to center position message to all software instruments on cycle jumps and when playback begins.
Sync preferences in Logic Pro The Sync pane contains the following preferences: When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: Logic Pro User Guide • All MIDI Output: Delay slider: Delays or advances the MIDI output for all ports, so you can compensate for any timing differences between MIDI tracks and audio or software instrument tracks.
When Additional MIDI Options is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: • MMC Uses pop-up menu: Choose between MMC standard messages and the old Fostex format. • MMC standard messages: The MIDI MMC specification is strictly followed. • Old Fostex format: The old Fostex format is used for MIDI Machine Control. • Output ID (Transport) checkbox: The All checkbox sends MMC to all ports. Use the field to the right to specify an output port ID.
MIDI Inputs preferences are only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. • On checkbox: Use these checkboxes to deactivate (or re-activate) a MIDI input port on your hardware device. When a MIDI input port is deactivated in Logic Pro, the MIDI hardware device still communicates with other software applications. • Port field: Lists the name of each available MIDI input port on all available hardware devices.
• “Show animations” checkbox: When selected, various windows and functions open with animations. If you find the animations distracting, deselect the checkbox. • “Display Middle C as” pop-up menu: Affects the description of notes in the editors. The bottom C on a five-octave keyboard (note # 36) is labeled C1, and middle C (note # 60) is labeled C3. According to this standard, the lowest MIDI note (note # 0) is called C–2. This is the official standard used by most manufacturers.
• Logic Pro User Guide Track Color pop-up menu: Choose whether Logic Pro automatically assigns a color to newly created tracks, and determine how it cycles through the color palette when assigning colors. • Static: Newly created tracks are not automatically assigned a new color. Tracks are created with the default color for that specific track type, or a previously manually assigned color from the color palette. This is the default setting.
Mixer Display preferences in Logic Pro Mixer Display preferences are only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. Logic Pro User Guide • “Open plug-in window on insertion” checkbox: Opens the window of a plug-in automatically after it is inserted in the channel strip. • “Open in controls view” checkbox: Opens plug-in windows in controls view rather than editor view.
• • Level Meters Scale pop-up menu: Switches level meters between an Exponential scale and a Sectional dB-linear scale. • Exponential: Provides higher display resolution in the upper range of the meter. • Sectional dB-linear: Provides the best possible display resolution across the entire level range. Level Meters Channel Order pop-up menu: Determines the order of channels in multichannel (surround) level meters.
Score preferences in Logic Pro The Score pane contains the following preferences: When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: • “Double-click to open” pop-up menu: Determines the window that opens when you double-click a note head: Note Attributes, Event List, Piano Roll, or Step Editor.
Movie preferences in Logic Pro Movie preferences are only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. Logic Pro User Guide • “Movie to project” slider: Fine-tunes the start point of a movie. • Cache Resolution pop-up menu: Defines the resolution of the thumbnails kept in the temporary internal memory (cache). Higher resolutions display more detail, but take up more space in the cache.
Automation preferences in Logic Pro Automation preferences are only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. • Logic Pro User Guide “Move track automation with regions” pop-up menu: Determines what happens to automation data when you move regions. • Never: Does not move automation when you move regions. • Always: Always moves automation when you move regions. The automation data area encompassed by the region boundaries is moved.
Control surface preferences General Control Surfaces preferences General Control Surfaces preferences are only available when Additional Control Surfaces Options is selected in Advanced preferences. General Control Surfaces preferences include resolution of relative controls, maximum MIDI bandwidth, and other functions. General preferences • Bypass All while in background checkbox: Turn on to allow your control surface to be shared with other applications when Logic Pro is not the active program.
• Jog resolution depends on horizontal zoom checkbox: Turn on to link the precision of scrubbing (using the Jog/Shuttle Wheel of your control surface) with the horizontal zoom level of Logic Pro. Your control surface must feature a Jog/Shuttle Wheel (or similar control) for this to have an effect. To retain a consistent resolution, regardless of Logic Pro window zoom levels, deselect this checkbox. • Pickup Mode checkbox: Turn on to use your control surface in Pickup mode (if this mode is available).
• Show value units for checkboxes: Turn on the two checkboxes to add the measurement unit to parameter values, where applicable—“Hz” or “%,” for example. You can set this option separately for instrument and plug-in parameters, and for volume and other channel strip parameters. Turn off this option if viewing unit types makes the display too cluttered. • Controller Assignments button: Click to open the Controller Assignments window. • Setup button: Click to open the Control Surfaces Setup window.
• Display Duration slider: Set the time that parameter names and values remain on the LCD, following selection and adjustment. • Show info for multiple parameters checkbox: Turn on to show the long name and information in the LCD until the most recently edited parameter information display times out. This may cause overlapping text. Turn off to limit the long name display to show only the most recently edited parameter, which can cause screen flicker.
MIDI Controllers preferences • Auto checkbox: Enable to use automatic assignments for the corresponding USB MIDI controller. The controller must be connected and turned on. • Assignments for this device are created immediately, based on information in the Lua script. If a user-defined or -edited assignment for a control already exists, it is retained, and no additional assignment is created for this control. • The Lua script is started, enabling its optional MIDI In and MIDI Out processing.
Advanced preferences in Logic Pro These preferences provide access to a number of advanced features and additional options. • “Show Advanced Tools” checkbox: When selected, advanced features such as project alternatives and backups, beat mapping, expanding mixing and automation capabilities, and more are available. Additional options can be individually enabled. Additional options are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences.
Project settings Overview of project settings in Logic Pro In Logic Pro, you can define and modify settings that apply to individual projects. You do this in the Project Settings window. These settings are automatically saved with each project, which means that different projects can have different settings. You can save your preferred settings in a default template, which can be used to automatically create a new project when you open Logic Pro. You can also import project settings from other projects.
• Audio tracks with input monitoring active. • Audio and software instrument tracks with plug-ins that automatically generate sound without requiring any input. • Any other tracks required for the complete signal flow. Plug-ins on tracks that are not required for project playback are dimmed, indicating that they are currently inactive. This includes tracks without regions on them, frozen tracks, tracks that have been turned off, and auxiliary tracks not in the signal path.
Synchronization settings General Synchronization settings in Logic Pro General Synchronization settings are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. These settings are used when Logic Pro is being controlled by another device and acting as a MIDI clock receiver. • • Sync Mode pop-up menu: Defines how Logic Pro syncs with the other device. • Internal: Selects the internal timer of Logic Pro, with Logic Pro transmitting MIDI clock.
• • 24 fps: Film, high definition video • 25 fps: PAL video/television broadcasts • 30 fps (drop frame): NTSC video/television broadcast; rarely used • 30 fps: High definition video; early black-and-white NTSC video; an older rate that is rarely used today • 29.97 fps (drop frame): NTSC video/television broadcasts • 29.97 fps: Standard definition NTSC • 23.976 fps: 24 fps running at 99.
Tip: It’s common practice in many video (and audio) post-production houses to set a one-hour SMPTE offset (01:00:00:00). This avoids a problem commonly referred to as midnight, where a pre-roll passes through SMPTE time 00:00:00:00, which causes issues with some tape machines (such as the ADAT). Audio Synchronization settings in Logic Pro You can use Audio Synchronization settings to keep your audio and MIDI tracks synchronized.
When Additional Audio Options is selected in Advanced preferences, the following is available: • Core Audio pop-up menu: Defines how your Core Audio hardware is synchronized to an external timecode transmitter. • MTC Continuous: Audio regions are started in sync, and the sample rate is continuously regulated to match variations in the timecode transmitter signal. Even very long audio regions stay in sync in this mode.
• Destination pop-up menu: Sets the MIDI output port that receives MIDI clock signal. Select “All” to use the same configuration for every MIDI output port. • Clock checkbox: Activates MIDI clock transmission for the MIDI output port shown in the Destination field of that row. MIDI clock can easily be sent with other normal MIDI events (notes and controllers, for example).
• Clock Start: “at position” field: Defines the musical position at which the MIDI Clock output should start. Every time you start playback, a Song Position Pointer (SPP) message is also sent. Because not all devices can process SPP, the MIDI system realtime Continue message is also sent. The exception is when you start at position 1 1 1 1. In this situation, the real-time Start message is sent.
Unitor Synchronization settings in Logic Pro Unitor Synchronization settings are only available when Advanced Editing is selected in Advanced preferences. You can use these settings to edit the major synchronization parameters for the Unitor8 MIDI interface. • • SMPTE Mode buttons: You can instruct the Unitor8 to read or write SMPTE data. • Read: Select to read SMPTE data. • Generate: Select to write SMPTE data.
• • TV Format pop-up menu: Defines the television format for timecode burn-in. • PAL: The video format used in Europe, South America, most Asian and African countries, and Oceania. If you’re working with video in SECAM format (used in France and French-speaking nations in Africa), choose PAL. • NTSC: The video format used in the U.S., Central America, Japan, and Canada. VITC Line 1 and VITC Line 2 pop-up menus: VITC is written into two lines of the video picture, which are normally invisible.
• “Click while recording” checkbox: Turns the metronome on during recording. This is the same as clicking the Metronome button in the control bar. • “Only during count-in” checkbox: The metronome is only audible during the project count-in, and is then turned off. • “Click while playing” checkbox: Turns the metronome on during playback. This is the same as clicking the Metronome button in the control bar.
Smart Tempo settings in Logic Pro These settings determine the default behavior for Smart Tempo. • Project Tempo Mode pop-up menu: Choose the Project Tempo mode (Keep, Adapt, or Automatic). • Keep Project Tempo: The project tempo is maintained when you record audio or import audio files. This behavior is identical to that of previous versions of Logic Pro. • Adapt Project Tempo: The project tempo adapts to the tempo of new regions that don’t match the project tempo.
• • “Set imported audio files to” pop-up menu: Sets the Smart Tempo behavior when importing audio files into your project. • Off: Smart Tempo does not analyze the tempo of imported audio files. • On: Smart Tempo analyzes the tempo of imported audio files and places tempo markers at each point a tempo change is detected. • On + Align Bars: Smart Tempo analyzes the tempo of imported audio files and places a tempo marker at each bar a tempo change is detected.
• • Record pre-roll: When selected, you can set a pre-roll time in seconds and milliseconds. When recording, this value is deducted from the current project position. Count-in pop-up menu: Sets the count-in period that precedes a recording. • None: The recording begins with no count-in. • x Bar: The recording begins with a count-in of between 1 Bar and 6 Bars (chosen from the pop-up menu). • x/4: The count-in’s time signature can be set here.
• “Auto-erase Duplicates” checkbox: With this selected, playing or adding a note to a MIDI region, either through step recording or merging, at the same position, pitch, and MIDI channel as an existing note, deletes the previous note. For the purposes of this function, the same position is defined as two notes with the same quantized playback position if both notes have been quantized, or within 100 ticks if quantization is not being used.
As you can see from the table, although the laws of physics dictate that the octave above C (100 Hz) is C (at 200 Hz), the practical exercise of a (C to C) circle of perfectly tuned fifths results in a C at 202.7287 Hz. This is not a mathematical error. If this were a real instrument, the results would be clear. As a workaround, choose between the following options: • Each fifth is perfectly tuned, with octaves out of tune. • Each octave is perfectly tuned, with the final fifth (F to C) out of tune.
Frequency correction takes place on the basis of analyzed chord structures. The positions of individual notes in each chord are analyzed, and the sum of each note’s distance to the tempered tuning scale is zeroed. In critical cases, different compensation functions help to minimize the degree of retuning, at the expense of absolute purity, if necessary. For example: • The notes C, E, and G form a C Major chord.
When Advanced Editing is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: • Software Instrument Scale: Fixed: Activates a number of fixed tuning scales and keys. Fixed Tuning mode tunes musical keys (to different degrees) for scaled tuning systems, and delivers a key signature character. When playing mostly white keys (in the Pure setting, and with C as the root key), C major is the main focus, and tuning is scaled to that chord.
Audio Settings General Audio Settings in Logic Pro General Audio settings are used to determine the audio behavior in Logic Pro. • Sample Rate pop-up menu: Use to choose the sample rate for the project. • Apple Loops: High Quality checkbox: This setting enables a newer, better sounding Apple Loops playback algorithm introduced with Logic Pro X 10.4. The setting is disabled when opening projects created in older versions of Logic to ensure they sound like they did originally.
Channel Strips Audio settings in Logic Pro Channel Strips Audio settings are used to determine the behavior of channel strips in Logic Pro. When Advanced Editing is selected in Advanced preferences, the following settings are available: • “Automatic management of channel strip objects” checkbox: Makes the creation and management of tracks and channel strips a transparent experience. You should deselect this setting only when you need to make manual changes to channel strips in the Environment window.
MIDI settings General MIDI settings in Logic Pro General MIDI settings are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. The General pane of the MIDI project settings contains the following settings: • Control Change 7/10 controls Volume/Pan of Channel Strip Objects checkbox: When selected, MIDI Control Change message #7 controls channel strip volume and MIDI CC#10 controls channel strip pan position.
• “SysEx with MIDI Thru function” checkbox: Incoming SysEx messages are passed through the computer to the MIDI outputs, along with other MIDI data. This is particularly important when using hardware programmers, as you can immediately monitor parameter changes to the synthesizer you’re editing. If you want to record SysEx dumps, do not select this checkbox.
Chase settings in Logic Pro MIDI Chase settings are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. If you start playback in the middle of a project, some events might not be heard (such as notes, sustain pedal events, and pitch bend events that start before the point where playback begins). Using the Chase Events function, you can have Logic Pro analyze the project and include some or all of these events when the project plays back.
• Chase on Cycle Jump checkbox: Scans for, and sends, all event types if the cycle start and end points fall across regions. • Chase on Cycle Jump: Notes checkbox: Limits cycle jump scan to note events. • “Send full MIDI reset before chasing” checkbox: Sends a MIDI reset message before chasing, ensuring that all MIDI devices being triggered are set to their defaults.
Score settings Global Score settings in Logic Pro Global Score settings define global formatting options, such as page margins, note spacing, bars per line, and more. When Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences, the following are available: • Top, Bottom, Left, and Right Margin fields: These values show the margin distances (in cm or inch) to the outer border of the printable area on the page. A “Top Margin 0.
You can also be change this value directly in the score, by dragging the purple line above the first staff. • Line Distance field: Defines additional vertical distance between staff systems (single, multiple, or bracketed staffs can constitute a system) on the same page. It applies to full scores, as well as single staff parts. • Maximum Bars/Line field: This parameter can be useful when using small spacing values (see below), to prevent too many bars from being displayed on one line.
• “Justify last staff” checkbox: Lengthens the last line (the last staff system, in full scores) to the right page margin. • “Alternate repeat symbols” checkbox: If selected, all repeat signs in the project are displayed with real book-style brackets. • “Hide muted notes” checkbox: Excludes muted notes from the score display. If unselected, muted notes are displayed in the score, even though they won’t be heard during MIDI playback.
Numbers & Names settings in Logic Pro Score Numbers and Names settings are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. These settings affect the automatic display of page numbers, bar numbers, and instrument names in the score. Page Numbers settings Logic Pro User Guide • Page Numbers checkbox: Turns on the display of page number parameters. • Horizontal Position pop-up menu: Alters the horizontal alignment on the page.
• Hide 1st Page Number checkbox: Prevents the display (and printout) of the page number on the first page. (All others are displayed and printed.) • Page Numbers Font Choose button and field: Click this button to choose a page number font. The chosen font, style, and size is displayed in the font field. • Prefix checkbox: Select to enter text that is displayed with every page number.
Instrument Names settings • Instrument Names checkbox: Select to turn on the display of instrument name parameters. • Position pop-up menu: Choose from Above Staffs or Beside Staffs. • Align pop-up menu: Refers to the space preceding staffs. Choose either Left (at the left margin) or Right (at the right margin). • 1st Staff pop-up menu: Choose one of the following to display the instrument name at the first staff: No Names, Short Names, or Full Names.
Tuning set parameters • Name field: Double-click to change the name in the text field. • Strings pop-up menu: Choose the number of strings (between 3 and 16). • Assign pop-up menu: Select the method for automatically assigning notes to strings. • String Pitch fields: Double-click to type, or drag vertically to select, the pitch that the open strings are tuned to. Note: Up to eight fields are shown directly within the pane.
Determine the string assignment Because most notes can be played at different positions (frets) on different strings, the Assign parameter in the Tablature pane performs an essential role. In most cases, the MIDI channels of the individual notes determine the string assignment. The MIDI channel parameter of an individual note has no impact on MIDI playback. The playback channel is determined in the Track inspector, found in the Main window.
Chords & Grids settings in Logic Pro Chords and Grids settings are available only when Additional Score Options is selected in Advanced preferences. These settings define the font, position, and scaling of chords and grids, and other settings. Chord settings • Root Font field: Defines the font for the chord symbol’s root note. • Extension Font field: Defines the font for the chord symbol’s extensions. • “Follow staff size” checkbox: Displays chord symbols according to staff size.
• Grid Scaling: Normal field: Sets the size of the second chord grid when added in the Score Editor. • Grid Scaling: Enlarged field: Sets the size of the third chord grid when added in the Score Editor. • Chord Scaling: Reduced field: Sets the size of the chord on the first chord grid when added in the Score Editor. • Chord Scaling: Normal field :Sets the size of the chord on the second chord grid when added in the Score Editor.
Clefs settings • Clefs pop-up menu: Choose from the following clef display parameters: Every Staff, First Staff on Every Page, First Staff on Page 1, and Hide All. • “Display warnings at line breaks” checkbox: Causes warning clef changes to be displayed at the end of a staff or staff system (if the actual change is at the beginning of the subsequent staff or staff system).
• “Hide bar lines” checkbox: Use to hide all bar lines, which can be useful for educational material, Gregorian plain chant notation, and other special situations. Note: Only automatically displayed bar lines are hidden, so it’s still possible to insert bar lines from the Part box, including the regular bar line, which are displayed and printed. Octave Symbols settings • +8, –8, 0, +15, –15 fields: Use to edit the text string (and text formatting) of the different octave symbols.
Line Thickness settings • Line Thickness parameters: Determines the line thickness of every notation element that uses lines. staff lines, stems, ledger lines, bar lines, repeat and end lines, tuplet brackets, text boxes, crescendi/decrescendi (also affects line objects and arrows), ties, and slurs. Note: If you have a high-resolution printer, try to use smaller line thickness settings (2, or maybe even 1). Smaller staff lines, in particular, look much better.
MIDI Meaning settings in Logic Pro Score MIDI Meaning settings are available only when Additional Score Options is selected in Advanced preferences. These settings determine if, and to what extent, the insertion of the listed symbols affects the MIDI playback of notes (that these symbols are attached to). • Symbols: Symbols change the MIDI output of all notes they are attached to.
Important: If you do use MIDI Meaning, you need to adjust the settings before you begin to insert accents and so on. This is because the settings have no influence on accents and phrasing marks that have already been inserted. Once set, the velocity and length of notes change as soon as you attach one of these symbols to a note. When you delete the symbol, note velocity and length are reset to their initial values.
Note Color Options settings • Accidentals checkbox: Determines whether accidentals are displayed in color (according to their note associations), or in black. • Dots checkbox: Determines whether dots are displayed in color (according to their note associations), or in black. • Ties checkbox: Determines whether ties are displayed in color (according to their note associations), or in black.
Assets settings in Logic Pro Assets settings are available only when Show Advanced Tools is selected in Advanced preferences. These settings let you select which asset types are copied either into the project package or into a subfolder inside the project folder, depending on how you chose to organize your project when saving it. Ideally, you should save all project assets with the project file, but on certain occasions you may prefer not to.
Key commands Key commands in Logic Pro You can perform nearly every Logic Pro function with a key command, greatly accelerating your workflow. You can use the Key Commands window to browse, copy, import, and save key command sets, as well as to assign Logic Pro functions that you use most often to computer keyboard keys. There are also a number of functions that are only available as key commands. Some of these may not have a default key command assignment.
Open the Key Commands window In Logic Pro, do one of the following: • Choose Logic Pro > Key Commands > Edit (or press Option-K). • Press and hold Control while choosing a menu command. The Key Commands window opens with the respective command selected. Reset all key command assignments Resetting causes you to lose your existing key command assignments, so be sure to create a copy of your key commands file before doing so.
• Click one of the filter buttons to restrict the list of key commands to the following: • All: Show all key commands. • Used: Show only assigned key commands. • Key: Show only key commands assigned to the keyboard. • Touch Bar: Show only key commands assigned to the Touch Bar. • Unused: Show only unassigned key commands. • Customized: Show only user customized key commands. • Multi-Used: Show only key commands used in multiple windows.
Assign key commands in Logic Pro You can assign particular computer keyboard keys to Logic Pro functions and control surface messages to particular commands—effectively teaching Logic Pro to understand these messages. If your computer has a Touch Bar, you can assign key commands to appear in the Touch Bar as one of the key commands screen shortcuts. See Overview of Touch Bar shortcuts in Logic Pro for more information. Assign a function to a key 1. In Logic Pro, select a command in the Command column. 2.
Assign a function to the Touch Bar 1. In Logic Pro, select a command in the Command column. 2. Click the Learn Touch Bar button. 3. Tap the relevant Touch Bar button, along with the modifier key or keys—Shift, Control, Option, Command. 4. If the Touch Bar button is already assigned, an alert appears. You have the following options: • Cancel: Click Cancel if you don’t want to change the existing assignment.
Learn a controller assignment 1. In Logic Pro, click the Learn New Assignment button. 2. Select the command in the Command column. 3. Send a MIDI message from your controller.
Delete a key command or controller assignment In Logic Pro, do one of the following: Logic Pro User Guide • To delete a key command assignment: Select the related command in the Command column, then click the Delete button. • To delete a controller assignment: Select the related command in the Command column, then click the Delete Assignment button.
Copy and print key commands in Logic Pro You can copy a list of all of the key commands to the Clipboard and then paste them into a document that accepts text for printing. Print a key command list 1. In Logic Pro, click the Actions pop-up menu and choose Copy Key Commands to Clipboard in the Key Commands window. 2. Paste the results into any document that accepts text, then format the results and print the list.
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Set Punch In Locator by Playhead Control-Option-Command-I Set Punch In Locator by Rounded Playhead Control-Option-Shift-Command-I Set Punch Out Locator by Playhead Control-Option-Command-O Set Punch Out Locator Point by Rounded Playhead Control-Option-Shift-Command-O Set Locators by Regions/Events/ Marquee and Enable Cycle Command-U Set Rounded Locators by Regions/ Events and Enable Cycle U Play from Selection Shift-Space bar Swap Le
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Go to Marker Number 2 𝍖2 Go to Marker Number 3 𝍖3 Go to Marker Number 4 𝍖4 Go to Marker Number 5 𝍖5 Go to Marker Number 6 𝍖6 Go to Marker Number 7 𝍖7 Go to Marker Number 8 𝍖8 Go to Marker Number 9 𝍖9 Go to Marker Number 10 𝍖 Control-0 Go to Marker Number 11 𝍖 Control-1 Go to Marker Number 12 𝍖 Control-2 Go to Marker Number 13 𝍖 Control-3 Go to Marker Number 14 𝍖 Control-4 Go to Marker Number 15 𝍖 Control-5 Go to Marker Number 16 𝍖 Con
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when MIDI/Monitor Metronome Click K Count In Shift-K Recall Screenset 1 𝍖1 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 2 𝍖2 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 3 𝍖3 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 4 𝍖4 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 5 𝍖5 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 6 𝍖6 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 7 𝍖7 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 8 𝍖8 Show Advanced Tools Recall Screenset 9 𝍖 9 Show Advanced
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Note Repeat Control-Option-↩ Spot Erase Control-Option-⌫ Open Audio File Editor Command-6 Show/Hide Musical Typing Command-K Show/Hide Event Float Option-E Show/Hide Mixer X Show/Hide Smart Controls B Show/Hide Score Editor N Show/Hide Staff Style Window Control-Option-Shift-S Show Advanced Tools Show/Hide Score Sets Window Control-Option-Shift-I Show Advanced Tools Show/Hide Piano Roll P Show/Hide Step Input Keyboard Opti
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Track Automation Event List Control-Command-E Toggle Automation Quick Access Control-Option-Command-A Show Advanced Tools Enable/Disable Automation Groups Shift-G Show Advanced Tools Open Group Settings Option-Shift-G Show Advanced Tools Close Window Command-W Cycle Through Windows Command-Grave Accent (`) Cycle Through Windows (counter clockwise) Shift-Command-Grave Accent (`) Select Previous Track Up Arrow Select Next Track D
Function Key command Previous Patch, Plug-in Setting or Sampler Instrument Left Bracket ([) Toggle Channel Strip Mute M Toggle Channel Strip Solo S Toggle Channel Strip Input Monitoring Control-I Toggle Channel Strip Format (mono/ stereo) Control-Shift-S Show/Hide All Plug-in Windows V Set Nudge Value to Bar Control-Option-M Set Nudge Value to Beat Control-Option-B Set Nudge Value to Division Control-Option-D Set Nudge Value to Tick Control-Option-T Set Nudge Value to SMPTE Frame Cont
Various windows key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Windows Showing Audio files key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Select Equal Regions/Events Shift-E Show Advanced Tools Select Similar Regions/Events Shift-S Show Advanced Tools Select Same Subpositions Shift-P Show Advanced Tools Select Muted Regions/Events Shift-M Show Advanced Tools Select Same-Color Regions/Events Shift-C Show Advanced Tools Select First, or Shift Marquee Selection Left Shift-↖ Select Last, or Shift Marquee Selection Right Shift-↘ Select Previous Region/Event or Move Mar
Function Key command Available when Set Region/Event/Marquee Start to Playhead Position Command-Left Bracket ([) Show Advanced Tools Set Region/Event/Marquee End to Playhead Position Command-Right Bracket (]) Show Advanced Tools Nudge Region/Event Position Right by Nudge Value Control-Option-Right Arrow Show Advanced Tools Nudge Region/Event Position Left by Control-Option-Left Arrow Nudge Value Show Advanced Tools Nudge Region/Event Length Right by Nudge Value Option-Shift-Right Arrow Show
Function Key command Copy Playing Cells Here Command-Page Up (⇞) Select Next Lower Cell, or Next Track Down Arrow Select Next Upper Cell, or Previous Track Up Arrow Extend Cell, or Track Selection Up Shift-Up Arrow Extend Cell, or Track Selection Down Shift-Down Arrow Select Previous Scene Option-Left Arrow Select Next Scene Option-Right Arrow Enable Performance Recording On/ Off Control-P Unpack Take Cell to Existing Scenes Control-Option-Command-U Unpack Take Cell to New Scenes Contro
Views showing Time Ruler key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Function Key command Navigation: Forward Option-Shift-Z Mute Notes/Regions/Folders On/Off Control-M Region Automation: Disable Shift-Command-Y Automation: Autodefine Command-Y Available when Main Window Tracks key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Pack Take Folder Control-Command-F Show Advanced Tools Unpack Take Folder to Existing Tracks Control-Command-U Show Advanced Tools Unpack Take Folder to New Tracks Control-Shift-Command-U Show Advanced Tools Un/disclose Take Folder Option-F Flatten Take Folder Option-Shift-U Flatten and Merge Take Folder Option-U Rename Take or Comp Shift-T Delete Take or Comp Option-Shift-⌫ Toggle Take Folder Quick Swipe Comping Mode Option-Q
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Toggle Track On Option-M Toggle Track Record Enable Control-R Individual Track Zoom In Control-Option-Command-Down Arrow Individual Track Zoom Out Control-Option-Command-Up Arrow Show Advanced Tools Toggle Individual Track Zoom Control-Option-Command-Z Toggle Zoom Focused Track Control-Z Reset Individual Track Zoom Control-Option-Command-⌫ Show Advanced Tools Individual Track Zoom Reset for All Tracks Control-Option-⌫ Show Advance
Function Key command Available when Time Stretch Region Length to Nearest Bar Option-Command-B Show Advanced Tools Detect Tempo of Selected Region… Option-Command-T Remove Silence from Audio Region… Control-X Add Region to Loop Library Control-Shift-O Normalize Region Parameters Control-N Show Advanced Tools Apply Quantization Destructively Control-Q Show Advanced Tools Convert Loops to Regions Control-L Show Advanced Tools Set Optimal Region Sizes Rounded by Bar Control-Backslash (\) R
Function Key command Available when Color Tracks by Region Color Option-Shift-Command-C Show Advanced Tools Waveform Vertical Zoom Out Command-Hyphen (-) Show Advanced Tools Waveform Vertical Zoom In Command-Equal Sign (=) Show Advanced Tools Show/Hide Toolbar Control-Option-Command-T Show Advanced Tools Configure Track Header Option-T Show Advanced Tools Show/Hide Editor E Show/Hide Note Pad Option-N Show/Hide List Editors D Show/Hide Browsers F Show/Hide Output Track Shift-Comma
Function Key command Select Output Channel Strips Shift-O Select MIDI Channel Strips Shift-E Select Same-Color Channel Strips Shift-C Select Muted Channel Strips Shift-M Select Previous (Left) Channel Strip Left Arrow Select Next (Right) Channel Strip Right Arrow Create New Auxiliary Channel Strip Control-N Create Tracks for Selected Channel Strips Control-T Configure Channel Strip Components Option-X Available when MIDI Environment key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects
Piano Roll key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset. Function Key command Available when Toggle Time Handles Shift-T Show Advanced Tools Define Brush Pattern & Set Brush Tool Control-Shift-B Reset Brush Pattern Control-Shift-⌫ Score Editor key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Logic Pro User Guide Function Key command Available when Enharmonic Shift: # Shift-3 Show Advanced Tools Enharmonic Shift: b Shift-B Show Advanced Tools Reset Note Attributes Control-Shift-⌫ Show Advanced Tools Assign MIDI Channels Based on Score Split Control-Shift-C Show Advanced Tools Nudge Position Up Control-Option-Command-Up Arrow Nudge Position Down Control-Option-Command-Down Arrow Nudge Position Left Control-Option-Command-Left Arrow Nudge Position Right Control-Option-Comman
Event Editor key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Function Key command Show/Hide All Edit Mode values Control-E Save Pattern Shift-Command-P Save Template Shift-Command-T Duplicate Row Command-D Learn Mode Command-L Select Step Above Up Arrow Select Step Below Down Arrow Select Previous Step Right Arrow Select Next Step Left Arrow Pattern Rotate Right Control-Option-Command-Right Arrow Pattern Rotate Left Control-Option-Command-Left Arrow Preview Option-Underscore (_) Available when Project Audio key commands in Logic Pro The fol
Function Key command Available when Export Region Information Control-E Show Advanced Tools Create Group Control-G Show Advanced Tools Audio File Editor key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Function Key command Available when Selection Start and End to Next Transient and Play Option-Command-Right Arrow Show Advanced Tools Toggle Transient Editing Mode Control-T Show Advanced Tools Increase Number of Transients Control-Equal Sign (=) Show Advanced Tools Decrease Number of Transients Control-Hyphen (-) Show Advanced Tools Select All Previous Control-Option-Shift-Left Arrow Show Advanced Tools Select All Following Control-Option-Shift-Right Arrow Show Advanced Tools Create Ne
Function Key command Select from Cursor to End Shift-Right Arrow Zoom All Up Arrow Center around Cursor Down Arrow Available when Sampler key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Step Input Keyboard key commands in Logic Pro The following table reflects default key commands included in the U.S. factory preset.
Function Key command 1/16 Note 5 1/32 Note 6 1/64 Note 7 1/128 Note 8 Triplets on/off 9 Dotted Note Values On/Off 0 Velocity 16 (ppp) C Velocity 32 (pp) V Velocity 48 (p) B Velocity 64 (mp) N Velocity 80 (mf) M Velocity 96 (f) Comma (,) Velocity 112 (ff) Period (.
Logic Pro User Guide Tool Key command Layout tool L Zoom tool Y Resize tool Z Voice Separation tool J Camera tool C Velocity tool V Quantize tool Q Fade tool A Automation Select tool U Automation Curve tool W Marquee tool R Flex tool X Brush tool B 1112
Use the Touch Bar with Logic Pro Overview of Touch Bar shortcuts in Logic Pro If your Mac has a Touch Bar, you can use gestures to start and stop playback and recording, navigate through your song, adjust track and instrument levels, and play instruments. The controls in the main area of the Touch Bar (to the right of the Control Strip) change depending on what Touch Bar screen you are using and what is selected in the app. The Escape (Esc) button offers a number of standard functions.
Icon Name Description Go to Project Start Places the playhead at the beginning of your project. Play or Stop Starts or stops playback at the current playhead position. Record Starts recording on record enabled tracks at the current playhead position. Cycle Turns Cycle mode on or off. Move Locators Backwards by Cycle Length Moves the locators backward by the Cycle length. Move Locators Forward by Cycle Length Moves the locators forward by the Cycle length.
The remainder of the Smart Controls screen shows buttons for the screen controls in the Smart Controls pane. The buttons change for each type of track and available effects. To adjust the Smart Controls using the Touch Bar: • Buttons controlling levels (the button has a colored line under the text indicating a slider): hold down the button until the slider appears, and drag to adjust the slider. Release the button when you are done. You can also tap the button to switch to a slider screen.
Configuration screen shortcuts These shortcuts appear in the Touch Bar on the Configuration screen. Note that the last button is different for each track type. Icon Name Description Close Returns you to the previous screen. Smart Controls Returns you to the Smart Controls screen. Overview Switches to the Overview screen. Key Commands Switches to the Key Commands screen.
To use the Overview to navigate through your song: • Drag the view rectangle left or right to move the visible area of the project. • Drag the line to move the playhead. Key Commands screen shortcuts When you tap the Key Commands button , the following controls appear by default. Some buttons change depending which window or editor is in focus. Icon Name Description Escape Standard Escape button functions. Key Commands Returns you to the Configuration screen.
Icon Name Description Split Regions at Playhead Splits the selected regions at the current playhead position. Split by Locators Splits the selected regions at the current locator positions. Crop When an audio region is selected, removes all parts of selected regions that fall outside its marquee selection. Legato When a MIDI Editor is in focus, trims Note End to the value selected in the MIDI Editor. Join Regions Joins multiple selected adjacent regions into one contiguous region.
Icon Name Description Pencil tool Switches to the Pencil tool. Fade tool Switches to the Fade tool. Brush tool Switches to the Brush tool. Finger tool Switches to the Finger tool. When you press the Control key, the following controls appear in the Key Commands screen by default: Icon Logic Pro User Guide Name Description Escape Standard Escape button functions. Key Commands Returns you to the Configuration screen. Show/Hide Automation Shows or hides track automation.
When you press the Shift key, the following controls appear in the Key Commands screen by default: Icon Name Description Escape Standard Escape button functions. Key Commands Returns you to the Configuration screen. Colors Opens the color palette. Show/Hide Audio Channel Strips When the Mixer is in focus, shows or hides all audio channel strips.
You can use the Key Commands window in Logic Pro to replace the default commands on any of the Key Commands screens and to add additional commands to custom Key Commands screens. See Assign key commands in Logic Pro for more information. Audio screen shortcuts When you tap the Audio button on the Configuration screen, the Touch Bar shows the following controls: Icon Name Description Close Returns you to the Configuration screen. Input Tap the Input button to access the Input selector screen.
Drum Pads screen shortcuts When you tap the Drum Pads button, you can use the Touch Bar to play the drums on a Drummer or software instrument track with a drum kit patch. Icon Name Description Close Closes the Drum Pads screen. Banks Selects between three banks of percussion instrument icons. Repeat Tap the Repeat button to reveal the Repeat slider. Drag the line to the desired note division. Tap the Repeat icon to repeat the held pad.
Use control surfaces Control surface requirements in Logic Pro To use a hardware control surface to give you tactile control over Logic Pro, you need to connect, add, and configure your control surface device for use with Logic Pro. The setup procedures and preferences are common to all directly supported control surfaces. Important: If you are using a music keyboard or desktop controller that is supported by a Lua script, see Automatic assignment for USB MIDI controllers.
Connect control surfaces in Logic Pro Logic Pro supports many control surfaces that connect to your computer via USB, Ethernet, MIDI, and so on. You may need an adapter or interface to connect your control surface—for example, if your control surface connects via MIDI, you may need a USB MIDI interface in order to connect your control surface, or if your device connects via Ethernet, you may need an Ethernet-to-USB-C converter.
Note: Generally, you can turn on your computer either before or after you turn on the control surface. Some devices, however, may require the computer to be turned on before or after the device has initialized. Check the device documentation and manufacturer website. Connect a MIDI control surface 1. To use a MIDI control surface with Logic Pro, connect your MIDI control surface to a MIDI interface, and connect the MIDI interface to your computer.
Add a control surface to Logic Pro Some control surfaces such as Mackie Control are detected automatically when you open Logic Pro. You can add other devices that are not detected automatically using the Setup window. Installation is covered in the setup section for your particular device. Some devices may require different or additional steps, but in most cases you only need to select the name of the device you want to use with Logic Pro, then add it.
You need to manually alter the MIDI In and Out port values (in the Control surface Device parameters in Logic Pro of the Setup window) to match those of the connected unit. Note: You can reinitialize the support of all connected control surfaces by choosing Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Rebuild Defaults. 4. Close the window when all devices are added to your system.
Create control surface groups in Logic Pro If you have multiple control surface units, you can define how they relate to each other by creating control surface groups. A control surface group consists of multiple devices that you combine to create a single, unified virtual control surface. You can create up to 20 control surface groups. Each group can consist of any number of physical devices. The only limiting factor is the number of available ports.
Pictured below is a multiple group example with several devices: The top row, consisting of the Logic Control and Logic Control XT, forms a single control surface group with 16 channels. Logic Control controls channels 1 to 8 and the XT unit controls channels 9 to 16. In the second row, the HUI and Mackie Control C4 form a second control surface group, controlling instruments (on channels 1 to 8) and auxes (on channels 9 to 16). In the third row, the Oxygen 25 forms a single unit control surface group.
Control surface inspector Overview of Control surface inspector in Logic Pro The right area of the Control Surfaces Setup window shows the Device area. This area offers a visual representation of every control surface device and control surface group available. Select an icon to set up and configure that device using the parameters on the left. See Control surface Device parameters in, Control surface Special parameters in, and Control Surface Group parameters.
Control surface Device parameters in Logic Pro Device parameters • Output Port pop-up menu: Choose the MIDI output port for your control surface from the pop-up menu. • Input pop-up menu: Choose the MIDI input port for your control surface from the popup menu. Each control surface must be connected to an independent MIDI In and Out port (or corresponding USB port, designated as a MIDI port by the device driver).
Usually, when a device is added to a control surface group, the device is added to the right of the other devices in the group, and its device icon is placed to the right of existing device icons. The new addition to the control surface group is assigned a fader bank offset based on how many faders are present in the other devices to the left of the new device.
Control surface Special parameters in Logic Pro Some control surfaces allow you to define special parameters such as fader touch sensitivity. When a device that offers such parameters is connected, these special parameters area appears in the inspector. Here are some special parameter that appear if you have one of these devices: OSC Devices • Host Name field: Shows the name of the network host for the OSC connected device. • Output Port field: Shows the network port number for outgoing OSC messages.
Control Surface Group parameters Overview of Control Surface Group parameters in Logic Pro If you have created one or more control surface groups, you can configure these groups in the Control Surface Group parameters window. These parameters apply only to the group associated with the selected device and allow you to customize each group to meet your needs. Many group parameters can also be changed directly from the control surface. Note: Lua script supported devices have a default modeless assignment.
Display parameters • Flip Mode pop-up menu: Choose functions for the faders and rotary encoders of channel strips on the device. For control surfaces that have a fader and a rotary encoder for each channel strip, Flip mode allows you to assign both controls to the same parameter, or to swap their assignments. The choices are: • Off: Default flip mode, with the fader acting as a volume control. • Duplicate: Assigns both the fader and the encoder to the currently selected encoder parameter.
• Fader Bank for All View field: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to offset Logic Pro channel strips that are controlled by the device in All view. This parameter is available only when multiple channel strip types are displayed in the Mixer. When single channel strip types are displayed, there are separate fader bank parameters (not displayed in the parameter list).
• • EQ Parameter pop-up menu: Choose the parameter of the selected EQ band controlled by the control surface encoders in EQ Multi Channel View. The choices are: • Frequency: Rotary encoders on the device set the frequency of the selected band. • Gain: Rotary encoders on the device set the gain of the selected band. This parameter controls the slope of the Low Cut (band 1) and High Cut (band 8) bands of the Channel and Linear Phase EQs.
• Position: Rotary encoders on the device set Pre, Post, or Post Pan fader modes. • Mute: Rotary encoders on the device mute/unmute the selected Send slot. • All Sends Parameter Page field: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to set the current page for Send parameters. Up to 32 parameters are available in Send Channel Strip view for a given channel (eight Send slots multiplied by the four parameters listed above). • Split: no.
• Plug-in Param Page (Split Lower) field: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define the parameter assigned to the leftmost encoder of Split Lower when editing a plug-in with Split mode turned on. The next plug-in parameter is assigned to encoder 2, and so on. • Channel Strip Track field: Drag vertically, or enter an integer value to define the track displayed for Channel Strip views. This applies only to Split Upper when Split mode is turned on.
Overview of Control Surfaces preferences Settings that affect the onscreen appearance and performance of control surfaces are changed in the Control Surfaces preferences window. For complete documentation for each Control Surfaces preferences window, see General Control Surfaces preferences. Open the Control Surfaces preference window • Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Preferences (or use the Open Control Surfaces Preferences key command).
Control surface use tips in Logic Pro You may find that using control surfaces changes the way you use Logic Pro. Slight changes to your working methods can help you use control surfaces more effectively. The following hints may streamline your control surface workflow. • • Customize your templates • Set up screensets 1–7 as your most frequently used screensets. You can access these directly on some control surfaces.
The table does not cover USB MIDI controllers supported with MIDI plug-ins supplied by the manufacturer or devices supported with Lua scripts. Refer to the documentation provided by the manufacturer if using a device that provides a third-party MIDI plug-in. For Lua supported devices, see Automatic assignment for USB MIDI controllers in Logic Pro for details. Important: Some devices are supported by both a Lua script and a control surface plug-in.
Logic Pro User Guide Supported devices Manufacturer Notes DM2000 Yamaha Emulates three HUI units, using three virtual MIDI In and Out connections over a USB cable. For more information, see Yamaha DM2000 in the Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support documentation. FaderMaster 4/100 JLCooper For more information, see JLCooper Fadermaster 4/100 in the Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support documentation.
Supported devices Manufacturer Notes Mackie Control Universal (Pro) Mackie A Mackie Control with Logic Control silk screening (legend) and firmware version 2.0 or later (including HUI emulation). If your unit has firmware version 1.02 or later, you can use either Logic Control or Mackie Control mode. For more information, see Mackie Control in the Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support documentation.
The firmware is usually stored on an EEPROM (Electronically Erasable Programmable ReadOnly Memory) chip. Some devices may provide a dedicated firmware update app. Other devices may be updated via a MIDI dump procedure, in the form of a MIDI file. Should new firmware become available, you can download the appropriate MIDI file and play it from Logic Pro to your control surface.
Assign hardware controllers Overview of controller assignments in Logic Pro Assigning controllers to Logic Pro parameters lets you use faders, knobs, switches, and other controllers to remotely adjust Logic Pro functions. These controls can be used directly or in conjunction with modifier keys. You can assign any controller capable of generating a MIDI message to a parameter in Logic Pro.
Controller Assignments Easy view Use controller assignments Easy view in Logic Pro Easy view offers a stripped down window for you to assign controllers to channel strip and plug-in parameters and to change the target track that assignments apply to. Easy view is only available when Show Advanced Tools is selected in the Advanced preferences pane. The Easy view window contains the following fields and buttons: • Expert View button: Click to open the editor in Expert view.
Assign and delete controllers in Easy view in Logic Pro Only one set of assignment parameters is visible at a time in Easy view. You use the Learn process to assign controllers to channel strip and plug-in parameters by moving a controller on your control surface. This sends a MIDI message toLogic Pro, thus “teaching” it which controller you are assigning to the chosen parameter. Assign a controller in Easy view 1. In the Logic Pro Mixer, or in any plug-in window, select a parameter. 2.
Assign a series of controllers to a series of parameters Logic Pro includes a shortcut that makes it easy to assign a series of controllers to a series of similar parameters. For example, you can use this shortcut to assign a series of faders to volume; to assign a series of knobs or switches to other channel strip parameters such as pan, solo, or mute; or to assign a series of controllers to a set of plug-in parameters. 1. In the Logic Pro Mixer, or in any plug-in window, select a parameter. 2.
Controller Assignments Expert view Use controller assignments Expert view in Logic Pro You can use Expert view to make advanced controller assignments. These include Logic Pro parameters other than channel strip and plug-in parameters. For example, you can assign controllers to global, automation, and control surface group parameters in Expert view. You can also edit controller assignments in Expert view and can define zones and modes that let you switch between groups of controllers.
• Control/Parameter list: Select the assignment you want to edit. The left column displays the name of the control and the right column displays the (abbreviated) name of the parameter being controlled. The parameters of the selected assignment appear in the fields to the right of the list. For more information, see Controller assignments Control Name and Label fields in Logic Pro. Note: You can select multiple assignments in the list, but only the parameters of the first selected assignment are displayed.
• Flip Group field: Enter an integer value to define a flip group for the assignment. For more information, see Controller assignments Flip Group and Exclusive parameters in Logic Pro. • Class pop-up menu: Choose the class of parameter (parameter type) you want to assign. For more information, see Controller assignments Class pop-up menu parameters in Logic Pro. Note: Depending on the chosen class, different fields and pop-up menus for that class appear below the Class pop-up menu.
Value parameters The lower area shows the following parameters. See Controller assignments Expert view Value parameters in Logic Pro for details. • Min and Max fields: Enter integer values to set the range for incoming MIDI values. • Format pop-up menu: Choose the format used to encode negative values. • Multiply field: Enter a value to scale incoming MIDI values. • Mode pop-up menu: Choose the mode used by incoming values to modify the current parameter value.
Delete an assignment in Expert view Should you accidentally move the wrong controller in Learn mode, you can easily delete an unwanted assignment. 1. In Logic Pro, select the assignment you want to delete in the Control/Parameter list. 2. Choose Edit > Delete (or press the Delete key).
The simultaneous use of modal and modeless assignments allows you to do things such as: • Define a zone that switches between two modes or functions by pressing and releasing a control surface modifier button (such as Shift or Option)—while using a particular function button on the control surface. • Define a zone that allows you to use modeless assignments for display updates, transport functions, and Save or Undo operations.
Define a zone 1. Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Controller Assignments (or press Command-K), then click the Expert View button. 2. Click the Add button in the lower-left corner of the Zone list. A new, blank zone appears in the Zone list. It is highlighted, allowing you to immediately rename it. 3. Enter a name for the zone. If you want to add controllers to the zone, see Assign and delete controllers in Expert view in Logic Pro. Define a mode 1.
Controller assignments Control Name and Label fields in Logic Pro The Control Name and Label fields are shown at the top right of the Controller Assignment parameters in the Expert View window. Control Name and Label parameters • Control Name field: Shows the name of the control. For supported devices, the control surface name is used. For assignments created with the Learn process on unsupported control surfaces, the control name defaults to “Learned.” You can enter a new name in the field.
Controller assignments Class pop-up menu parameters in Logic Pro Choose the class of assignment (the type of destination parameter controlled) from the pop-up menu. Different options appear below the Class pop-up menu when you choose a class. The following describes the different classes, and the options available for each. Class pop-up menu parameters • • Logic Pro User Guide Mode Change: Choose to use an assignment to switch from one mode to another.
• Logic Pro User Guide • Marker Length: Edit the length of the current marker. • Nudge selected Regions/Events: Nudge the selected regions or events by the chosen nudge value. (See “Nudge Value” below.) • Any Solo: Feedback only. On if any (track or region) Solo button is active. • Nudge Value: Set the value used for Nudge selected Regions/Events. Choose from: tick, division, beat, bar, frame, and 1/2 frame. • Scrub Status: Set the scrubbing status for the Playhead parameter (beats, scrubbing).
• Index: The index number of a channel strip in the Mixer, independent from channel strip type, as counted from the left end of the Mixer. The index number also includes channel strips without track numbers, such as auxiliary tracks. The index number changes as track order (and with it, channel strip order in the Mixer) changes. • Audio: An audio channel. The numerical value (No.) determines which audio channel is addressed (zero-based; to address audio channel 2, use a value of 1).
• Fader Bank for Current View: Maps to the fader bank for the currently used View allowing you to use one assignment per left or right button for all View modes. • Filter for All View: Choose to show eight additional checkboxes (for the eight channel strip types) when the View is All. Depending on the Value mode, these switches define which channel strips are displayed (by using Direct mode) or which are toggled (by using X-OR mode).
• Lo7: Low 7 bits of the value (LSB or Least Significant Bits) • Hi7: High 7 bits of the value (MSB or Most Significant Bits) For messages containing only a Lo7 placeholder, the value is treated as 7 bit. For messages containing both a Lo7 and Hi7 placeholder, the value is treated as 14 bit. The order of Lo7 and Hi7 is honored, and there may be constant bytes in between. This allows you to define Control Change LSB and MSB portions. For example, B0 08 Hi7 B0 28 Lo7 indicates a 14-bit message.
Controller assignments Expert view Value parameters in Logic Pro The parameters in this section control different aspects of incoming MIDI message values. Value parameters • Min and Max fields: Enter an integer value to set the minimum and maximum range for incoming values represented by Lo7 and Hi7. Typically, the minimum defaults to 0, and the maximum defaults to 127. Some control surfaces (such as CM Labs Motor Mix) may use the same message, with different value ranges, for different controls.
• Rotate: The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current value, cycling between maximum and minimum values. This is useful for button presses that cycle between modes, such as automation mode. • X-OR: The value defines a bit mask (a filter), which is applied to the parameter’s current value with the “exclusive or” Boolean operation. This is useful for enabling or disabling single channel strip types in All view. Note: For On/Off parameters, Mode is set to Toggle by default.
Note: The Key Repeat checkbox is available only for key commands, key presses, and relative value changes. If any other assignment class is selected, the checkbox is dimmed. The default key command assignments support the Key Repeat function if useful or applicable to the control surface or device, making changes unnecessary to use this function. If you want to enable the Key Repeat function for your own assignments, you may need to use the re-learn option for the assigned message.
2. In the Command list, click the disclosure triangle next to the category of commands you want to reveal, then select the key command you want to assign. You can also search for the key command in the Search field. 3. Click the Learn New Assignment button. 4. Press the control surface button that you want to assign to the key command. This sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro. The name of the controller appears in the Assignments field. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to make additional assignments. 6.
Glossary AAC Abbreviation for Advanced Audio Codec. A compression and decompression algorithm and file format for audio data. AAF Abbreviation for Advanced Authoring Format. A cross-platform, project exchange file format you can use to import multiple audio tracks, inclusive of references to tracks, time positions, and volume automation. accelerando A gradual increase in tempo. See tempo. AD converter (ADC) Short for analog-to-digital converter. A device that converts an analog signal to a digital signal.
allpass filter A filter that allows all frequencies to pass, providing only phase shift or phase delay without appreciably changing the amplitude characteristic. amplifier A device that increases the level of a signal. Sometimes called amp for short. alternative A different version of a project, with a unique name and different settings. Alternatives are saved as part of the project, and share the same assets. Alternatives for the current project appear in the File > Alternatives submenu.
audio interface The device used to get sound into and out of your computer. An audio interface converts analog signals (from microphones or musical instruments, for example) into digital audio data that can be processed by your computer, and, in the other direction, converts digital audio data from your computer into analog signals that speakers can broadcast. Audio MIDI Setup (AMS) A utility used to configure the audio and MIDI input and output devices connected to your computer.
Autopunch function A function that allows you to start and stop recording at predefined positions. Autopunch mode is most commonly used to re-record a section of an otherwise successful recording. The advantage is that you can concentrate on playing, rather than the mechanics of starting and stopping recording. See also Autopunch button. aux channel strip A channel strip found in the Mixer that can be used as a send/return (bus) and subgroup control. backup A saved version of the current project.
bounce To process MIDI or audio regions with any applied effects, such as delay or compression, combining (rendering) them into an audio file. In Logic Pro, you can choose between real-time and offline bouncing. Offline bouncing is faster, but doesn’t allow you to apply live automation or record real-time audio input. You can also bounce to several files when performing a Surround bounce. See also surround. Bounce button The button you click to bounce the output of any output channel to an audio file.
channel strip A virtual representation of a channel strip on a mixing console. Each channel strip contains a number of similar controls, including a Mute button, Volume fader, Pan/ Balance knob, Input slot, Output slot, Send slots, Effect slots, and Format button. The channel strips shown in the inspector and in the Mixer are used to process audio or MIDI information that is routed from tracks.
control surface A hardware device that communicates with Logic Pro via MIDI (or other communication protocol). It can be used to write automation data and control parameters, such as mixing levels and panning, and effects and instruments, as well as transport and navigation functions, among others. Controls view A nongraphical alternative to the Editor view of plug-in parameters.
delay (1) In the main window, a region parameter that lets you move a selected region ahead or behind the beat by a given number of milliseconds. (2) An effect that delays the incoming audio signal, typically resulting in a sense of audio space in which the signal is taking place. (3) In the Environment, an object that can create a series of repeats. destructive A type of audio processing in which the actual data of an audio file is changed, as opposed to just editing peripheral or playback parameters.
dynamic range The difference in level between the loudest and softest signals that an audio system (or device) can reproduce. Technically, dynamic range is the difference between the highest signal peak that can be reproduced and the amplitude of the highest spectral component of the noise floor. It is measured in decibels. See also dB. dynamics Refers to changes in volume, or other aspects of a piece of music, over time. editor In Logic Pro, an area or window for editing MIDI or audio data.
Event List A list that shows all events or regions in a project. The Event List allows you to directly manipulate events and regions in a precise, numerical way. It also allows you to add different types of events. expander An effect that increases the dynamic range of an audio signal. Compare compressor. export To create a version of a file, such as a Logic Pro project, in a different format that can be distributed and used by other apps.
Flex tool A tool that gives you quick access to the basic flex editing functionality, without having to turn on Flex view in the Tracks area. See also Flex view. Flex view A Tracks area view that allows you to edit the timing and pitch of audio material. folder In Logic Pro, a container for regions in the Tracks area. A folder can contain other folders or regions, much like a folder in the Finder can contain other folders or files. You can imagine a folder as a project within a project.
Hermode Tuning A process that automatically controls the tuning of electronic keyboard instruments, or the Logic Pro software instruments, during a musical performance. Hermode Tuning retains the pitch relationship between keys and notes, while correcting the individual notes of electronic instruments, ensuring a high degree of tonal purity. high cut filter A type of filter that is essentially a lowpass filter with no slope or resonance controls.
Lane inspector A Logic Pro inspector used to alter the settings of the selected lane. Lane Set A term for all simultaneously displayed event definitions in the Step Editor. See also event definition. latency A short delay between playing a note on your keyboard and hearing the sound. A variety of factors contribute to latency, including the audio interface in use and audio and MIDI drivers.
locators Left and right indicators that define the cycle area, which is used for cycle or skip playback and cycle recording operations. The locators are also used to define the editing area for certain functions. When the LCD is set to Custom, the locators are displayed to the right of the position indicators in the LCD. The number on top is the left locator; the number below is the right locator. Logic Pro main window The primary working window of the app.
metadata Refers to additional descriptive information that is stored in the file header of a number of file types (AAF, for example). Metadata is used to reference external media, to simplify searches, and more. metronome A device that produces a regular, metrical tick or other sound to mark the musical beat (in bpm). Logic Pro features a metronome for practice and recording. It can be configured in the Metronome project settings. MIDI Acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface.
MIDI Time Code (MTC) Refers to the translation of a SMPTE timecode signal into a MIDI standard timecode signal. MTC is used to synchronize Logic Pro with MIDI devices, other sequencers, video and audio tape, or hard disk machines that support MIDI Time Code. MTC determines absolute time positions and supports start, stop, and continue messages. mixdown A term commonly used to describe either the bouncing or merging of tracks. See also bounce and merge).
Multi Trigger mode A mode associated with synthesizers such as the ES1. In this mode, a synthesizer envelope is usually retriggered by each incoming note event. Musical Typing keyboard An onscreen keyboard that allows you to use the computer keyboard as a real-time MIDI keyboard, so that you can record MIDI when no music keyboard is connected. In earlier versions of Logic Pro, the Musical Typing keyboard was called the Caps Lock keyboard. mute To turn off (silence) the audio output of a channel or track.
pan, pan position Describes the placement of mono audio signals in the stereo field, by setting different levels on both sides. . Pan control A rotary knob (directly above the Volume fader) on mono channel strips, used to determine the position of the signal in the stereo image. patch An element that contains the instrument, effects, and routing settings that control the sound of a track. When you choose a patch in the Library, those settings are applied to the currently selected track.
preset A set of plug-in parameter values that can be loaded, saved, copied, or pasted via the Library or the Settings pop-up menu in the plug-in window header. See also setting and Settings pop-up menu. pressure See aftertouch. project A Logic document. It contains all MIDI regions and references to the audio files to be played back. A project file can be saved within a project folder, which can contain the project’s audio files and other assets (such as movie, sample files, and so on).
Quick Swipe Comping mode A mode available in a selected take folder. When Quick Swipe Comping mode is turned on, you can create and edit comps. When you turn it off, you can cut, drag, and move take folder and take region elements in the selected take folder. QuickTime An Apple cross-platform standard for digitized, data-compressed movie playback and encoding. QuickTime movies can be shown in a Logic Pro window or on the global Movie track, in sync with the project.
reverb Short for reverberation. Reverb emulates the sound of a physical space, or, more specifically, the reflections of sound waves within a space. For example, a handclap in a large cathedral reverberates for a long time as sound waves bounce off the stone surfaces, while a handclap in a small broom closet hardly reverberates at all. The difference in size, and in the materials of the wall surfaces, accounts for the difference in the amount and quality of reverberation.
score set A saved collection of multiple staff styles, staffs, and other elements shown in the Score Editor. You can use score sets to quickly switch between (and edit and print) different portions of the score—such as a brass section—separately from the entire score. It also simplifies experimentation with different layouts. screen control Each Smart Control has a set of screen controls.
shelving EQ A type of EQ that allows the frequency range above or below the specified frequency to be increased or decreased. side chain An alternative input signal—usually routed into an effect—used to control an effect parameter. For example, you could use a side chained track containing a drum loop to act as the control signal for a gate inserted on a sustained pad track, creating a rhythmic gating effect of the pad sound.
solo To temporarily isolate one or more tracks, regions, or events, allowing them to be heard without the rest of the project. Solo tool A tool used to play a region or event in isolation. S/P-DIF Short for Sony/Philips Digital Interface. A standard transmission format for professional stereo digital audio signals. The format is similar to AES/EBU, but uses 75 ohm coaxial or optical connectors and cabling.
stereo Short for stereophonic. Refers to the sound reproduction of two different audio channels. Compare mono. subframe A subdivision of a SMPTE frame, corresponding to its individual bits. One frame consists of 80 bits. summing stack A type of Track Stack that lets you combine multiple tracks and route their output to an audio subgroup. When you create a summing stack, the outputs from the subtracks are routed to a bus, the destination aux of which is assigned to the main track.
take folder A container for multiple take recordings. take A term used to describe a recording. Logic Pro allows you to create several takes, one after the other, without leaving record mode. These takes can then be compiled into a composite take, or comp. See also comping. template A project that contains a defined collection of settings and preferences. Templates serve as a starting point for new projects (scoring tasks, audio-only projects, MIDI-only projects, and so on).
Track Stack Track Stacks provide a convenient way to organize and control tracks, to manage projects with high track counts, and to create and manage audio subgroups. There are two types of Track Stacks: folder stacks and summing stacks. Both types have a main track and one or more subtracks. See also folder stack and summing stack. Tracks area The primary working space of Logic Pro. The Tracks area is used to record, edit, and arrange the audio, MIDI, and Drummer regions in a project.
Vibrato tool A tool in the Audio Track Editor used to adjust the amount of vibrato on notes in Flex Pitch mode. Voice Separation tool A tool in the Score Editor used to separate polyphonic voices onto different staffs by drawing a dividing line (if you’re using a polyphonic staff style). Volume tool A tool in the Audio Track Editor used to adjust the amount of gain applied to notes in Flex Pitch mode. VU meter Abbreviation for Volume Unit meter.
Apple Inc. © 2021 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws.
